SprinterOperating Instructions

Order no. 6462 7539 13 Part no. 906 584 92 05 Edition MY 2015 MB

É9065849205{ËÍ9065849205

Sprin

ter

Publication detailsInternet

Further information on Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles can be obtained on the Internet athttp://www.mercedes-benz.comhttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries orsuggestions you may have regarding thisOperator's Manual to the technical documen-tation team at the address on the inside of thefront cover.© Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC© Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. are Daimler companies.Not to be reprinted, translated, or otherwisereproduced, in whole or in part, without writ-ten permission.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 Stuttgart, GermanyGermany

SymbolsG WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i These symbols indicate useful instruc-tions or further information that could behelpful to you.

X This symbol designates an instruc-tion you must follow.

X Several consecutive symbols indi-cate an instruction with severalsteps.

(Y page) This symbol tells you where youcan find further information on atopic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning oran instruction that is continued onthe next page.

DisplayDisplay This text indicates a message onthe display and the rear view cam-era monitor.

Registered trademarks

ESP® is a registered trademark ofDaimler AG.

Vehicle distributor

In the USA:

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350www.mbusa.comwww.mbsprinterusa.comCustomer Assistance Center:1-877-762-8267

In Canada:

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, ON M4G 4C9www.mercedes-benz.caCustomer Relations Department:1-800-387-0100

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. are Daimler companies.Canada only:"Authorized Sprinter Dealer" is defined as anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Sprinter Dealer.

As at 03.03.2014

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzBefore you first drive off, read these Operat-ing Instructions carefully and familiarize your-self with your vehicle. Please adhere to theinformation and warning notes in these Oper-ating Instructions for your own safety and toensure a longer operating duration of thevehicle. Failure to observe the instructionsmay lead to damage to the vehicle or personalinjury.Vehicle damage caused by a failure toobserve the instructions is not covered by theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.The equipment or model designation of yourvehicle may differ according to:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityThe illustrations in this manual show a left-hand-drive vehicle. The location of vehicleparts and controls for right-hand drive vehi-cles differ accordingly.Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating itsvehicles to the state of the art.Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to intro-duce changes in:RdesignRequipmentRtechnologyTherefore, the descriptions provided mayoccasionally differ from your own vehicle.The following are integral parts of the vehicle:ROperating InstructionsRMaintenance/Service BookletRservice and warranty informationRequipment-dependent operating instruc-tions

We wish you pleasant motoring at all times.

9065849205 É9065849205{ËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 22

At a glance ........................................... 31

Safety ................................................... 41

Opening and closing ........................... 65

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 81

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 91

Climate control ................................. 111

Driving and parking .......................... 135

On-board computer and displays .... 179

Stowing and features ....................... 229

Transporting loads ............................ 239

Maintenance and care ...................... 247

Roadside Assistance ........................ 273

Wheels and tires ............................... 283

Technical data ................................... 315

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket ........................................ 236

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 204Function/notes ................................ 57Important safety notes .................... 57Indicator lamp ................................ 218

Access step in the bumperCleaning ......................................... 269

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 117Activating/deactivating the roofventilator ........................................... 133Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ............................. 162ADAPTIVE ESP®

see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)Add-on equipment ............................... 26Additional indicators

Replacing bulbs (roof) .................... 104Additives

Diesel ............................................ 320Engine oil ....................................... 323

ADR (working speed governor) ........ 172Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 49Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 48Important safety notes .................... 47Introduction ..................................... 47Thoraxbag ........................................ 48Window curtain air bag .................... 49

Air filterIndicator lamp ................................ 225

Air pressuresee Tire pressure

Air ventsAdjusting for the passenger com-partment ........................................ 121Adjusting on the roof ..................... 121Important safety notes .................. 120Setting the center air vents ........... 121Setting the side air vents ............... 121

Air-conditioning systemRefrigerant ..................................... 326see Climate control

Air-recirculation modeImportant safety notes .................. 120Switching on/off ........................... 120

Anti-lock Braking Systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-theft systemInterior motion sensor ..................... 62

Armrests .............................................. 87Ashtray ............................................... 235ASR (acceleration skid control)

Activating/deactivating ................... 58Display message ............................ 205Function/notes ................................ 58Important safety notes .................... 58Indicator lamp ................................ 218

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 61Switching off the alarm .................... 61

Authorized workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 265Automatic climate control

see Climate controlAutomatic headlamp mode ................ 93Automatic locking ............................... 71Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 144Changing gear ............................... 143Changing gear yourself .................. 143Driving tips .................................... 144Emergency running mode .............. 145Important safety notes .................. 142Kickdown ....................................... 144Maneuvering .................................. 144Overview ........................................ 142Problem (malfunction) ................... 145Releasing the parking lock man-ually ............................................... 145Selector lever ................................ 142Selector lever positions ................. 143Shift ranges ................................... 144Starting the engine ........................ 139Touchshift ...................................... 143Trailer towing ................................. 144

4 Index

Transmission oil change ................ 324Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 145AUX port ............................................. 237Auxiliary heating

Activating/deactivating heaterbooster mode ................................ 130Adjusting ....................................... 194Conditions for switching on ........... 123Heating time .................................. 123Important safety notes .................. 122Operating with the button (controlpanel) ............................................ 123Operation with the remote con-trol ................................................. 125Operation with the timer ................ 127Problem (malfunction) ................... 132Selecting a switch-on time ............. 124Setting the switch-on time ............. 125see Auxiliary heating

Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-ing) ...................................................... 330

BBackup lamps

Replacing bulbs ............................. 103Backup lamps (Chassis Cab)

Replacing bulbs ............................. 104BAS (Brake Assist System)

Display message ............................ 205Function/notes ................................ 59Indicator lamp ................................ 218

Basic settingssee Settings

BatteryIsolating switch .............................. 137Replacing (SmartKey) ...................... 69

Battery (SmartKey)Checking .......................................... 68Important safety notes .................... 68Replacing ......................................... 69

Battery (vehicle)Care ............................................... 264Charge indicator lamp ................... 222Charging ........................................ 263Disconnecting and connecting(driver's footwell) ........................... 260

Disconnecting and connecting(engine compartment) ................... 262Display message ............................ 216Important safety notes .................. 258Installing/removing (driver's foot-well) ............................................... 262Installing/removing (engine com-partment) ....................................... 263Jump starting ................................. 276Location ......................................... 260Removing/installing the floor cov-ering (driver's footwell) .................. 260

Before driving offImportant safety notes .................. 138

Beltsee Seat belts

Bleeding the fuel system .................. 141Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating ......... 165, 194Notes/function .............................. 163Trailer towing ................................. 165

BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat-ment

Notes ............................................... 25Bottle holder

see Cup holderBrake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)Brake Assist System

see BAS (Brake Assist System)Brake fluid

Checking the level ......................... 254Display message ............................ 206Notes ............................................. 324Warning lamp ................................. 219

Brake force distribution, elec-tronic

see EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampsReplacing bulbs ............................. 103

Brake lamps (Chassis Cab)Replacing bulbs ............................. 104

Brake liningsDisplay message ............................ 205Indicator lamp ................................ 222

Brake systemMalfunction .................................... 205

Index 5

Warning lamp ................................. 218Brakes

ABS .................................................. 57Adaptive Brake Assist .................... 162Applying the parking brake ............ 150BAS .................................................. 59Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 324Checking brake fluid level .............. 254Display messages .......................... 205EBD .................................................. 59Important safety notes .................. 154Maintenance .................................. 218Parking brake (notes) ..................... 155Riding tips ...................................... 154

BreakdownFire extinguisher ............................ 276First-aid kit .................................... 275Jump-starting ................................. 276Reflective safety jacket .................. 275Vehicle tool kit ............................... 274Warning lamp ................................. 275Warning triangle ............................ 275see Flat tiresee Towing away

Bulbsee Changing bulbs

Bulb failure indicator .......................... 92

CCar

see VehicleCare

Access step in the bumper ............ 269Car wash ........................................ 265Display ........................................... 270Exterior lights ................................ 268Interior ........................................... 270Notes ............................................. 265Paint .............................................. 267Plastic trim .................................... 270Power washer ................................ 266Rear view camera .......................... 269Roof lining ...................................... 271Seat belt ........................................ 271Seat cover ..................................... 271Selector lever ................................ 270Sensors ......................................... 268

Sliding door ................................... 269Steering wheel ............................... 270Step (electrical) ............................. 269Trim pieces .................................... 270Washing by hand ........................... 266Washing the engine ....................... 266Wheels ........................................... 267Windows ........................................ 267Wiper blades .................................. 268

Cargo compartmentActivating/deactivating ventila-tion ................................................ 133

Cargo compartment floor ................... 27Cargo tie-down points and tiedowns

Important safety notes .................. 242Cargo tie-down rings

Installing ........................................ 244Permissible tensile load ................. 327

Carrier systemLadder rack ................................... 245

CD player/CD changer ...................... 188Cell phone

see Mobile phoneCenter console overview .................... 37Central locking

Automatic locking ............................ 71Important safety notes .................... 71Locking/unlocking (buttons) ........... 71Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 66Locking/unlocking manually ............ 71

Central locking systemsee Central locking

Changing bulbsAdditional indicators (roof) ............ 104Backup lamp (Chassis Cab) ........... 104Backup lamps ................................ 103Bi-Xenon bulbs ................................. 99Brake lamps ................................... 103Brake lamps (Chassis Cab) ............ 104Cornering lamps ............................ 101Courtesy lights ............................... 105Daytime running lamps (halogenheadlamps) .................................... 101Display message ............................ 208Front interior light .......................... 105High-beam headlamps ................... 100Interior light ................................... 105

6 Index

Interior lighting .............................. 105License plate lamp ......................... 103License plate lamp (Chassis Cab) .. 104Low-beam headlamps .................... 100Overview of lamp types (frontbulbs) ............................................. 100Overview of lamp types (rearbulbs, Cargo Van/PassengerVan) ............................................... 102Overview of lamp types (rearbulbs, Chassis Cab) ....................... 104Parking lamps ................................ 100Perimeter lamp ...................... 104, 105Rear fog lamp ................................ 103Rear fog lamp (Chassis Cab) .......... 104Rear interior light ........................... 106Standing lamps (rear, ChassisCab) ............................................... 104Standing lamps (rear) .................... 103Tail lamps ...................................... 103Tail lamps (Chassis Cab) ................ 104Turn signals (front) ......................... 102Turn signals (rear, Chassis Cab) ..... 104Turn signals (rear) .......................... 103Warning and indicator lamps ......... 227see Replacing bulbs

Changing bulbssee Replacing bulbs

ChecklistBefore driving off-road ................... 157

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 55LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 53On the front-passenger seat ............ 55Rearward-facing restraint system .... 55Top Tether ....................................... 54

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 55Rear door ......................................... 56Sliding door ..................................... 56

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 51Restraint systems ............................ 52Special seat belt retractor ............... 52

Chock ................................................. 151Cigarette lighter ................................ 235

CleaningMirror turn signal ........................... 268Trailer tow hitch ............................. 270

Climate controlAir-conditioning system ................. 114Auxiliary heating ............................ 122Checking/cleaning the air filter(rear-compartment air condition-ing) ................................................ 256Cooling with air dehumidification .. 117Defrosting the windows ................. 118Heating .......................................... 113Important safety notes .................. 112Operating the cargo compartmentair vents ......................................... 133Overview of systems ...................... 112Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 119Problems with the windshieldheating .......................................... 119Rear-compartment air condition-ing ................................................. 116Rear-compartment heating ............ 115Reheat function (air dehumidifica-tion) ............................................... 118Setting the air distribution ............. 117Setting the air vents ...................... 120Setting the airflow ......................... 118Setting the temperature ................ 117Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 120Switching on/off ........................... 116Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 119Switching windshield heating on/off .................................................. 119

CockpitOverview .......................................... 32see Instrument cluster

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating the dis-tance warning function .................. 162

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 270

Combination switch ............................ 94Communications equipment

Operation ....................................... 237PND fittings ................................... 237

Index 7

Ports .............................................. 237Type approval/frequency .............. 316

Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 195Control panel

Above the windshield ....................... 38Center console ................................ 37Climate control ................................ 37Driver's door .................................... 39Left and right side of the steeringwheel ............................................... 39

Conversions/equipment .................... 26Coolant (engine)

Adding ........................................... 254Checking the level ......................... 253Display message ............................ 212Displaying the temperature (on-board computer) ............................ 187Filling capacity ............................... 326Important safety notes .................. 253

Coolingsee Climate control

Cornering lampsReplacing bulbs ............................. 101

Cornering light functionFunction/notes ................................ 95

Courtesy lightsReplacing bulbs ............................. 105

Crosswind driving assistance ............ 59Cruise control

Activating ....................................... 160Activation conditions ..................... 160Cruise control lever ....................... 159Deactivating ................................... 160Display message ............................ 214Driving system ............................... 159Function/notes ............................. 159Important safety notes .................. 159Problem (malfunction) ................... 161Setting a speed .............................. 160Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 160

Cup holder ......................................... 235Cup holder

see Cup holdersCup holders ........................................ 234Curtains (cleaning instructions) ...... 271

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 28Customer Relations Department ....... 28

DDashboard

see CockpitDashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lightingData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Activating/deactivating (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ......... 192Changing bulbs (halogen head-lamps) ............................................ 101Switching on/off (switch) ................ 92Switching on/off (vehicles with-out steering wheel buttons) ........... 183

Dealershipsee Qualified specialist workshop

Declarations of conformity ................. 24DEF

Exhaust gas aftertreatment ............. 25DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid )

Refilling .......................................... 147Delayed switch-off ............................ 193Diagnostics connection

Operating safety and vehicleapproval ........................................... 25

Diesel .................................................. 319Diesel engine

Preglow indicator lamp .................. 225Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)

Display messages (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 211Display messages (vehicles with-out steering wheel buttons) ........... 200Indicator lamp ................................ 221Information on consumption .......... 321Level indicator ............................... 182Notes ............................................. 320Storage .......................................... 321Tank content .................................. 321

Diesel particle filterDisplay message ............................ 211Short-distance driving .................... 153

8 Index

Digital speedometerSetting the unit (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 190

DisplayDisplay messages .......................... 197Outside temperature (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ......... 187Outside temperature display(vehicles without steering wheelbuttons) ......................................... 182Standard display (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 187Standard display (vehicles with-out steering wheel buttons) ........... 182see Warning and indicator lamps

Display messagesCalling up the message memory .... 198Driving systems ............................. 214Engine ............................................ 211Important safety notes .................. 197Lights ............................................. 208Safety systems .............................. 204SmartKey ....................................... 217Tires ............................................... 215Vehicle ........................................... 216

Distance recorder ............................. 187see Odometersee Trip odometer

Distance warning functionActivating/deactivating ................. 162Function/notes ............................. 161Warning lamp ................................. 162

Door locksee Central locking

DoorsCentral locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 66Control panel ................................... 39Display message ............................ 217Indicator lamp ................................ 227

Drinking and driving ......................... 152Drinks holder

see Bottle holderDriver's seat

see SeatsDriver's/co-driver's door

Unlocking ......................................... 72Driving abroad ................................... 153

Driving off-roadsee Off-road driving

Driving on flooded roads .................. 155Driving on rough terrain

Checklist before driving off-road .... 157Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 57Adaptive Brake Assist .................... 162ASR (Acceleration Skid Control) ...... 58BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 59Distance warning function ............. 161EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 59Important safety information ........... 57Overview .......................................... 57

Driving systemsBlind Spot Assist ............................ 163Cruise control ................................ 159Display message ............................ 214Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 165PARKTRONIC ................................. 167

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 144Brakes ........................................... 154Break-in period .............................. 136Downhill gradient ........................... 154Drinking and driving ....................... 152Driving abroad ............................... 153Driving in winter ............................. 156Driving on flooded roads ................ 155Driving on wet roads ...................... 155Exhaust check ............................... 152Fuel ................................................ 152General .......................................... 151Hydroplaning ................................. 155Icy road surfaces ........................... 156Important safety notes .................. 136Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 155Off-road driving .............................. 156Overrun cut-off .............................. 152Snow chains .................................. 287Speed limitation ............................. 153Towing a trailer .............................. 173Transport by rail ............................. 154Wet road surface ........................... 154

Index 9

EEBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 206Function/notes ................................ 59Indicator lamps .............................. 218

Electrical closing assist ...................... 73Electrical fuses

see FusesElectrical step

Cleaning ......................................... 269Display message ............................ 216Emergency release .......................... 74Function ........................................... 74Important safety notes .................... 73Indicator lamp ................................ 227Manual retraction ............................ 74Obstacle detection ........................... 74

Electrical systemBattery main switch ....................... 137

Electronic brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency exit .................................... 60Emergency exit window ..................... 60Emergency Tensioning Devices

Activation ......................................... 49Emissions control

Service and warranty information .... 28Engine

ADR (working speed governor) ...... 172Changing the power output ............. 25Check Engine warning lamp ........... 224Cleaning instructions ..................... 266Engine number ............................... 317Engine speed setting (workingmode) ............................................ 173Irregular running ............................ 141Jump-starting ................................. 276Starting .......................................... 139Starting problems .......................... 141Switching off .................................. 150Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 280

Engine electronicsNotes ............................................. 316

Problem (malfunction) ................... 141Engine oil

Adding ........................................... 252Additives ........................................ 323Checking the oil level (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 250Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 251Display message ............................ 213Filling capacity ............................... 323Information about oil consump-tion ................................................ 324Mixing ............................................ 323Notes about oil grades ................... 322Oil change ...................................... 323Oil level (note) ............................... 250Viscosity ........................................ 322Warning lamp ................................. 222

Engine speed setting (workingmode) ................................................. 172Engine, jump-starting ....................... 276Equipment/conversions ..................... 26ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

Display message ............................ 207Important safety information ........... 59Indicator lamp ................................ 221Warning lamp ................................. 218

Exhaust check ................................... 152Exhaust gas aftertreatment

DEF level indicator ......................... 182DEF reducing agent ....................... 320Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 320Display messages (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 211Display messages (vehicles with-out steering wheel buttons) ........... 200Indicator lamp ....................... 221, 225Malfunction .................................... 211Refilling DEF .................................. 147

Exterior lightingsee Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ......................................... 89Important safety notes .................... 89

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 231

10 Index

FFire extinguisher ............................... 276First-aid kit ......................................... 275Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting thespare wheel ................................... 306General notes ................................ 305

Fog lampsSwitching on/off .............................. 93

Fogged-up windowssee Climate control

Folding seat ......................................... 85Folding table

In the twin co-driver's seat ............ 234Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 316Two-way radio ................................ 316

Front fog lampsSwitching on/off .............................. 93

Front interior lightReplacing bulbs ............................. 105

Front windshieldsee Windshield

FuelAdditives (diesel) ........................... 320Consumption information .............. 320Consumption statistics .................. 195Diesel at very low outside temper-atures ............................................ 319Display message ............................ 212Driving tips .................................... 152Fuel gauge ..................................... 181Important safety notes .................. 318Problem (malfunction) ................... 147Quality (diesel) ............................... 319Refueling ........................................ 145Showing the range (on-boardcomputer with steeringwheel but-tons) .............................................. 195Showing the range (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 195Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 319

Fuel filter with water separatordraining ......................................... 255Indicator lamp ................................ 226

Fuel gauge ......................................... 181

Fuel tankProblem (malfunction) ................... 147

Fuel tank contentReserve, display message .............. 212

Fuses .................................................. 280

GGasoline

Reserve fuel warning lamp ............. 224General driving tips

Driving short distances .................. 153Genuine parts ...................................... 27Glove box ........................................... 230GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini-tion) .................................................... 303Guarantee ............................................ 28

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHazard warning lamps ........................ 95Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 86Adjusting (rear) ................................ 86

HeadlampsAdding fluid to cleaning system ..... 255Cleaning system (function) .............. 95Fogging up ....................................... 97see Automatic headlamp mode

Headliner (cleaning instructions) .... 271Heating

see Climate controlHigh-beam headlamps

Highbeam Assist .............................. 96Replacing bulbs ............................. 100Switching on/off .............................. 94

Highbeam AssistFunction/notes ................................ 96Switching Highbeam Assist on/off .................................................. 192

HoodClosing ........................................... 249Display message ............................ 217Important safety notes .................. 248Indicator lamp ................................ 227Opening ......................................... 248

Index 11

Hydroplaning ..................................... 155

IImmobilizer .......................................... 61Indicator lamp

see Warning and indicator lampsIndicators

see Turn signalsInsect protection on the radiator ...... 27Installing a wheel

Installing the adapter (sparewheel) ............................................ 309

Instrument clusterFuel gage ....................................... 181Important safety notes .................. 180Instrument cluster lighting ............. 181Outside temperature display .......... 181Overview .......................................... 34Speedometer ................................. 181Tachometer ................................... 181Warning and indicator lamps ........... 35

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 181Instrument lighting

see Instrument cluster lightingInterior lighting ................................... 97

Front ................................................ 97Motion detectors ............................. 99Notes on replacing bulbs ............... 105Replacing bulbs ............................. 105Switching the rear compartmentlighting on centrally ......................... 98

Interior motion sensorArming ............................................. 62Deactivating ..................................... 62Function ........................................... 62Switching off .................................... 62

JJack

Jacking points ................................ 307Preparation .................................... 307Storage location ............................ 274Using ............................................. 307

Jump-starting ..................................... 276

KKey

Position in the ignition lock ............ 138Key positions ..................................... 138Kickdown ........................................... 144

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 166Function/notes ............................. 165

LanguageDisplay (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 190

Lashing points and tie downsPermissible tensile load ................. 327

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 53License plate lamp

Replacing bulbs ............................. 103License plate lamp (Chassis Cab)

Replacing bulbs ............................. 104Light sensor ......................................... 93Lighting

see LightsLighting

see LightsLights

Activating/deactivating daytimerunning lamps (on-board com-puter with steering wheel but-tons) .............................................. 192Activating/deactivating surroundlighting (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 193Automatic headlamp mode .............. 93Bulb failure indicator ........................ 92Cornering light function ................... 95Driving abroad ............................... 153Fog lamps ........................................ 93Hazard warning lamps ..................... 95High beam flasher ............................ 94High-beam headlamps ..................... 94Highbeam Assist .............................. 96Important safety notes .................... 92

12 Index

Light switch ..................................... 92Low-beam headlamps ...................... 92Parking lamps .................................. 92Rear fog lamp .................................. 93Setting the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 193Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) ...................... 92Turn signals ..................................... 94see Changing a bulbsee Interior lighting

Limited Warranty ................................ 22Load distribution ............................... 242Load securing aids

Carrier systems ............................. 245Loading guidelines

Important safety notes .................. 240Loading rails

Installing cargo tie-down rings ....... 244Maximum tensile strength ............. 328

LoadsSecuring ........................................ 242Transporting .................................. 240

Locator lightingSetting (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 193

Lockingsee Central locking

Locking and unlocking manually ....... 71Locking centrally

see Central lockingLow-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 208Driving abroad ............................... 153Replacing bulbs ............................. 100Switching on/off .............................. 92

Lumbar support ................................... 83

MM+S tires ............................................ 286Maintenance ...................................... 256Malfunctions

Message memory (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 198

Maximum speedSpeed limitation ............................. 153

Menu (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons)

Audio ............................................. 187Operation ....................................... 186Settings ......................................... 188Telephone ...................................... 196

Messagesee Display message

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 198Mirrors

Exterior mirrors ................................ 89Rear-view mirror .............................. 89

Mobile navigation devices ................ 237Mobile phone ..................................... 237

Important safety notes .................. 236Pre-installation ............................... 237Type approval/frequency .............. 316

Mounting wheelsLowering the vehicle ...................... 310Mounting a new wheel ................... 309Preparing the vehicle ..................... 306Raising the vehicle ......................... 307Removing a wheel .......................... 309Removing andmounting the sparewheel ............................................. 313Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 306

NNavigation

Fittings for PNDmobile navigationdevices .......................................... 237

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 136

OOccupant safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 51Important safety notes .................... 42Pets in the vehicle ........................... 56

OdometerDisplay (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 187Display (vehicles without steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 182

Index 13

Off-road drivingChecklist after driving off-road ...... 158Important safety notes .................. 156Rules for driving off-road ............... 158

Oilsee Engine oil

On-board computerDisplay message ............................ 197Lighting submenu .......................... 192

On-board computer (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons)

Audio menu ................................... 187Display message ............................ 184Menu overview .............................. 186Operating ....................................... 184Operation menu ............................. 186Settings menu ............................... 188Standard display ............................ 187Telephone menu ............................ 196Trip computer menu ...................... 195

On-board computer (vehicles with-out steering wheel buttons)

Display message ............................ 198General notes ................................ 182Setting the clock ............................ 183Standard display ............................ 182

Operating InstructionsBefore the first journey .................... 22Limited Warranty ............................. 22

Operating safetyVehicle registration .......................... 28

Operating safety and vehicleapproval

Attachments and bodies .................. 26BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat-ment ................................................ 25Changing the engine power out-put ................................................... 25Correct use ...................................... 22Declaration of conformity ................ 24Equipment and conversions ............. 26Important safety notes .................... 24Information about body/equip-ment mounting directives ................ 26Notes on operating the vehicle ........ 24Qualified specialist workshop .......... 25Registering your vehicle ................... 25

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Operator's ManualGeneral notes .................................. 22Vehicle equipment ........................... 22

Outline lampReplacing bulbs ............................. 105

Outside temperature display ........... 181Overhead control panel ...................... 38Overrevving range ............................. 181Overrun cutoff ................................... 152

PPaintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 267Paper holder ...................................... 233Parking ............................................... 149

Important safety notes .................. 149Parking brake ................................ 150Wheel chock .................................. 151see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidsee PARKTRONIC

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 207Notes/function .............................. 150

Parking lampsReplacing bulbs ............................. 100

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 169Driving system ............................... 167Function/notes ............................. 167Important safety notes .................. 167Problem (malfunction) ................... 171Range of the sensors ..................... 168Roll-back warning .......................... 169Trailer towing ................................. 170Warning display ............................. 169

Partition sliding doorImportant safety notes .................... 77Opening/closing .............................. 77

Passenger compartment air-condi-tioning system

see Climate controlPassenger compartment heating

see Climate control

14 Index

Perimeter lampReplacing bulbs ............................. 104

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 56Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 270Power supply

Battery isolating switch ................. 137Switching off .................................. 137Switching on .................................. 137

Power take-offEngine speed setting ..................... 172

Power washers .................................. 266Power windows

see Side windowsPreparing for a journey

Checks in the vehicle ..................... 138Visual check of the vehicle exte-rior ................................................. 138

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 23

Pulling away ...................................... 140

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 25

RRadiator cover ..................................... 27Radio

Changing stations (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 187see separate operating instructions

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 24Rain and light sensor

Setting the sensitivity (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ......... 193Windshield wiper ........................... 107

Range (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) .................................. 195Rear bench seat

Installing/removing (PassengerVan) ................................................. 85Stowage compartment (crewcab) .. 233

Rear compartmentActivating/deactivating climatecontrol ........................................... 116Setting the air vents ...................... 121

Rear doorChild-proof locks .............................. 56Important safety notes .................... 75Opening/closing .............................. 75

Rear fog lampReplacing bulbs ............................. 103Switching on/off .............................. 93

Rear fog lamp (Chassis Cab)Replacing bulbs ............................. 104

Rear interior lightReplacing bulbs ............................. 106

Rear lampssee Lights

Rear rackNotes ............................................. 245

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 269Important safety notes .................. 171Switching on .................................. 171

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 119Switching on/off ........................... 119

Rear window wiper ........................... 108Switching on/off ........................... 108

Rear-compartment air-condition-ing system

see Climate controlRear-compartment heating

see Climate controlRear-view mirror

Anti-glare mode ............................... 89Refilling

DEF filler neck ............................... 148Important safety notes (DieselExhaust Fluid – DEF) ...................... 147Refilling procedure (DieselExhaust Fluid – DEF) ...................... 148

Refrigerant ......................................... 326Refueling

Fuel filler flap ................................. 146Fuel gauge ..................................... 181Important safety notes (fuel) ......... 145Refueling procedure (fuel) ............. 146see Fuel

Index 15

Releasing the parking lock man-ually (automatic transmission) ........ 145Remote control

Changing the operating duration(auxiliary heating) .......................... 126Replacing the battery (auxiliaryheating ) ........................................ 130Switching on/off (auxiliary heat-ing) ................................................ 126Synchronizing (auxiliary heating) ... 126

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................... 99

Replacing the battery (auxiliaryheating remote control) .................... 130Restraint system

Introduction ..................................... 42Warning lamp (function) .......... 42, 222

Reverse warning feature .................. 140Roof carrier

Maximum payload .......................... 328Notes ............................................. 245

Roof load (roof carrier) ..................... 328

SSafety

Child restraint systems .................... 52Children in the vehicle ..................... 51

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Seat beltsAdjusting the height ......................... 45Cleaning ......................................... 271Correct usage .................................. 45Display message ............................ 207Fastening ......................................... 45Important safety guidelines ............. 44Introduction ..................................... 43Releasing ......................................... 46Warning lamp ................................. 227Warning lamp (function) ................... 46

Seat heating ......................................... 87Seats

Adjusting lumbar support ................ 83Adjusting the co-driver's seat .......... 83Adjusting the head restraint ............ 86Armrest ............................................ 87Cleaning the cover ......................... 271

Correct driver's seat position ........... 82Folding seat ..................................... 85Important safety notes .................... 82Rear bench seat ............................... 85Seat heating .................................... 87Setting the driver's seat ................... 83Swivel seat ....................................... 84Twin co-driver's seat ........................ 85

Securing loadsImportant safety notes .................. 242

Selector leverCleaning ......................................... 270

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 268Service center

see Qualified specialist workshopService interval display

Calling up the service due date ...... 258Exceeding a service due date ........ 258Notes ............................................. 257Service due date (automatic dis-play) ............................................... 257

Service productsBrake fluid ..................................... 324Coolant (engine) ............................ 325Diesel ............................................ 318Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 320Engine oil ....................................... 322Fuel ................................................ 318Important safety notes .................. 318Power steering fluid ....................... 324Refrigerant ..................................... 326Transmission oil ............................. 324Washer fluid ................................... 326

Setting the air distribution ............... 117Setting the airflow ............................ 118Setting the clock

Vehicles with steering wheel but-tons ............................................... 191Vehicles without steering wheelbuttons .......................................... 183

SettingsResetting all (vehicles with steer-ing wheel buttons) ......................... 188Resetting submenus (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ......... 189

Short journeys (diesel particle fil-ter) ...................................................... 153

16 Index

Side windowsCleaning ......................................... 267Hinged side windows ....................... 78Important safety information ........... 78Opening/closing .............................. 78Overview .......................................... 78Problem (malfunction) ..................... 79Resetting ......................................... 79

Sliding doorChild-proof locks .............................. 56Cleaning ......................................... 269Closing assist ................................... 73Important safety notes .................... 72Opening/closing .............................. 72Opening/closing from the inside ..... 73Opening/closing from the out-side .................................................. 73

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 69Changing the locking system set-tings ............................................... 194Checking the battery ....................... 68Display message ............................ 217Door central locking/unlocking ....... 66Important safety notes .................... 66Loss ................................................. 70Problem (malfunction) ..................... 70

SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 138Snow chains ...................................... 287Sockets .............................................. 236Spare wheel

General notes ................................ 312Important safety notes .................. 312Removing/mounting ...................... 313

Special seat belt retractor .................. 52Specialist workshop ............................ 25Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Digital (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 191Digital (vehicles without steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 182Selecting display unit (vehicleswith steering- wheel buttons) ........ 190see Instrument cluster

Sprinter Dealersee Qualified specialist workshop

Standing lampsReplacing bulbs ............................. 100Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 103

Standing lamps (Chassis Cab)Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 104

Start-off assistDisplay message ............................ 205

Starting (engine) ................................ 139Station

see RadioSteering wheel

Adjusting ......................................... 88Button overview ............................... 37Cleaning ......................................... 270

Stepsee Electrical step

StickersGeneral safety notes ........................ 22

Stowage spacessee Stowage spaces and stowagecompartments

Stowage spaces and stowage com-partments

Eyeglasses compartment ............... 231Glove box ....................................... 230Important safety notes .................. 230Paper holder .................................. 233Stowage compartment above thewindshield ..................................... 232Stowage compartment in the cen-ter console ..................................... 232Stowage compartment in thedashboard ...................................... 231Stowage space above the head-liner ............................................... 232Stowage space under the rearbench seat ..................................... 233Stowage space under the twin co-driver's seat ................................... 232

Summer tires ..................................... 286Switch unit

see Control panelSwitching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 61Switching the heater booster func-tion on/off ......................................... 130

Index 17

Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) ............. 193Swivel seat ........................................... 84

TTachometer ........................................ 181Tail lamps

Changing ....................................... 104Replacing bulbs ............................. 103see Lights

Tail lamps (Chassis Cab)Replacing bulbs ............................. 104

Tank contentFuel gauge ..................................... 181Range (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 195Reserve fuel warning lamp ............. 224

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 318Cargo tie-down points .................... 327Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 327Loading rails .................................. 328Roof carrier .................................... 328Tires/wheels ......................... 294, 311Trailer tow hitch ............................. 328Vehicle data ................................... 327

Telephone .......................................... 236Telephone (on-board computer)

Accepting an incoming call ............ 196Display messages .......................... 217Numbers from the phone book ...... 196Operating ....................................... 196Redialing ........................................ 197Rejecting or ending a call .............. 196

TemperatureOutside temperature ...................... 181Setting (climate control) ................ 117Setting the unit (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 189

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 61Immobilizer ...................................... 61Tow-away alarm ............................... 62

Thoraxbag ............................................ 48Tightening torques forwheel nuts/wheel bolts ........................................ 310

TimeSetting the time (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 191Setting the time (vehicles withoutsteering wheel buttons) ................. 183

TimerActivating ....................................... 128Important safety notes .................. 127Overview ........................................ 127Setting the heating level (auxiliaryheating) ......................................... 129Setting the preselection time(auxiliary heating) .......................... 129Setting weekday, time and oper-ating duration (auxiliary heating) ... 128Switching immediate heatingmode on/off (auxiliary heating) ..... 128

Tire pressureCalling up (on-board computer) ..... 291Checking manually ........................ 290Display messages (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 215Display messages (vehicles with-out steering wheel buttons) ........... 199Maximum ....................................... 290Notes ............................................. 289Recommended ............................... 288Setting the unit (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 191Tire label ................................ 288, 289

Tire pressure loss warning system .. 292Tire pressure monitor

Checking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 292Display message ............................ 215Function/notes ............................. 291Indicator lamp ................................ 226Restarting ...................................... 293Warning lamp ................................. 292

Tire pressure table ............................ 294Tires

Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 304Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 303Bar (definition) ............................... 302Changing a wheel .......................... 305Characteristics .............................. 302Checking ........................................ 285

18 Index

Curb weight (definition) ................. 304Definition of terms ......................... 302Direction of rotation ...................... 306Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 305DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 303DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 302GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 303GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi-nition) ............................................ 303GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 303GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 303Important safety notes .................. 284Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 303Information on driving .................... 284Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 303Labeling (overview) ........................ 299Load bearing index (definition) ...... 304Load index ..................................... 301Load index (definition) ................... 304M+S tires ....................................... 286Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 304Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 303Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 304Maximum tire load ......................... 301Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 304Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 304PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 304Replacing ....................................... 305Service life ..................................... 286Sidewall (definition) ....................... 304Snow chains .................................. 287Speed rating (definition) ................ 303Storing ........................................... 306Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 302Summer tires ................................. 286

TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 304Tire bead (definition) ...................... 304Tire pressure (definition) ................ 304Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 303Tire size (data) ....................... 294, 311Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 300Tire tread ....................................... 285Tire tread (definition) ..................... 304Total load limit (definition) ............. 305Traction (definition) ....................... 304TWR (permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight) (definition) ................. 305Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 303valve, Snap-In ................................ 290Wear indicator (definition) ............. 305Wheel rim (definition) .................... 303

Top Tether ............................................ 54Touchshift (automatic transmis-sion) .................................................... 143Tow-away alarm

Arming/deactivating ........................ 62Deactivating ..................................... 62Operation ......................................... 62

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 280Important safety notes .................. 277

TowingIf the vehicle is stuck ..................... 280Installing/removing the towingeye ................................................. 278With a raised front or rear axle ...... 279

Towing a trailerAxle load, permissible .................... 330Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 270Coupling up a trailer ...................... 175Decoupling a trailer ....................... 177Driving tips .................................... 173Important safety notes .................. 173Notes on retrofitting ...................... 328Power supply ................................. 178Trailer loads ................................... 330

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 277In the event of malfunctions .......... 279With both axles on the ground ....... 279

Index 19

TrailerBrake force booster malfunction ... 219

Trailer couplingsee Towing a trailer

Trailer loads and drawbar nose-weights ............................................... 177Trailer towing

Blind Spot Assist ............................ 165PARKTRONIC ................................. 170Permissible trailer loads anddrawbar noseweights ..................... 177

Transmissionsee Automatic transmission

Transmission oil ................................ 324Transport

Loading guidelines ......................... 240Vehicle ........................................... 280

Transport by rail ................................ 154Transportation

Rail ................................................ 154Transporting

Load distribution ............................ 242Securing a load .............................. 242

Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 270Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 195Trip meter

see Trip odometerTrip odometer

Display (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 187Display (vehicles without steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 182Resetting ....................................... 181see Trip computer (on-board computer)

Turn signalsReplacing bulbs (front) ................... 102Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 103Switching on/off .............................. 94

Turn signals (Chassis Cab)Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 104

Twin co-driver's seatFolding table .................................. 234Stowage compartment .................. 232

Two-way radiosType approval/frequency .............. 316

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-nition) ................................................. 305

UUnlocking

From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 71

USB port ............................................. 238

VVehicle

Data acquisition ............................... 29Display message ............................ 216Electronics ..................................... 316Equipment ....................................... 22Individual settings (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 188Limited Warranty ............................. 22Loading .......................................... 295Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 66Lowering ........................................ 310Maintenance .................................... 28Parking for a long period ................ 151Pulling away ................................... 140Raising ........................................... 307Registration ............................... 25, 28Reporting problems ......................... 28Securing from rolling away ............ 149Towing away .................................. 277Transporting .................................. 280Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 66

Vehicle batterysee Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle bodiesBody/equipment mounting direc-tives for trucks ................................. 26

Vehicle data ....................................... 327Vehicle identification number .......... 316Vehicle identification plate .............. 316Vehicle tool kit .................................. 274Vents

see Air ventsVoltage supply

Fuses ............................................. 280

20 Index

WWarning

Stickers ........................................... 22Warning and indicator lamps

Brakes ........................................... 219Check Engine ................................. 224Coolant .......................................... 223Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 221Electrical step ................................ 227ESP® .............................................. 218ESP® function ................................ 221Overview .......................................... 35Seat belt ........................................ 227

Warning lamp .................................... 275Warning triangle ................................ 275Warning- and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 218Air filter .......................................... 225ASR ................................................ 218BAS ................................................ 218Battery charge ............................... 222Brake wear .................................... 222Bulbs .............................................. 227Doors ............................................. 227Engine oil level ............................... 222Preglow .......................................... 225Reserve fuel ................................... 224Tire pressure monitor .................... 226Water separator ............................. 226Windshield washer fluid ................. 226

Washer fluidAdding ........................................... 255Capacities ...................................... 327Display message ............................ 217Indicator lamp ................................ 226Notes ............................................. 326Wiping with .................................... 107

WheelsChanging a wheel .......................... 305Checking ........................................ 285Cleaning ......................................... 267Important safety notes .................. 284Installing the adapter (sparewheel) ............................................ 309Interchanging/changing ................ 305Mounting a new wheel ................... 309Mounting a wheel .......................... 306

Removing a wheel .......................... 309Removing andmounting the sparewheel ............................................. 313Snow chains .................................. 287Storing ........................................... 306Tightening torque ........................... 310Wheel size/tire size ....................... 311

Window curtain air bag ....................... 49Windows

see Side windowsWindshield

Defrosting ...................................... 118Windshield heating

Problem (malfunction) ................... 119Switching on/off ........................... 119

Windshield washer fluidAdding ........................................... 255Indicator lamp ................................ 226

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 109Rain and light sensor ..................... 107Rear window wiper ........................ 108Replacing the wiper blades ............ 108Setting the sensitivity (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons andrain/light sensor) ........................... 193Switching on/off ........................... 107Wiping with windshield washerfluid ............................................... 107

Winter diesel ..................................... 319Winter driving

Slippery road surfaces ................... 156Snow chains .................................. 287

Winter operationGeneral notes ................................ 286Radiator cover ................................. 27

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 286Setting a limit speed ...................... 153

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 268Replacing ....................................... 108

Workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

Index 21

Operating Instructions

Before the first journeyThese instructions, the Maintenance Bookletand the additional equipment-related instruc-tions are integral parts of the vehicle. Keepthese documents in the vehicle at all times. Ifyou sell the vehicle, always pass on all docu-ments to the new owner.Before you first drive off, read these docu-ments carefully and familiarize yourself withyour vehicle.For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,follow the instructions and warning notices inthese Operating Instructions. Failure toobserve the instructions may lead to damageto the vehicle or personal injury.Vehicle damage caused by a failure toobserve the instructions is not covered by theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this Operator'sManual about the proper operation of yourvehicle as well as about possible vehicledamage. Damage to your vehicle that ari-ses from culpable contravention of theseinstructions is not covered by the LimitedWarranty of the distributor named on theinside of the front cover.

Vehicle equipmentThe Operating Instructions describe all mod-els and standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to systems and functionsrelevant to safety. The equipment in yourvehicle may therefore differ from that shownin the descriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase contract documenta-tion for your vehicle contains a list of all of thesystems in your vehicle.If you have questions about equipment andoperation, consult any authorized SprinterDealer.

Proper use

Observe the following informationwhen oper-ating your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in these operating instruc-tionsRthe technical data in these OperatingInstructionsRtraffic laws and regulationsRmotor vehicle laws and safety standardsThere are various warning stickers affixed tothe vehicle. If you remove warning stickers,you and others may fail to recognize the dan-gers. Leave the warning stickers in their orig-inal position.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

The general operating permit for your vehiclecould be rendered invalid if you carry outmodifications to electronic components,their software as well as wiring.

22 Introduction

G WARNINGGases and fluids from substances that con-stitute a health hazard or react aggressivelycan escape even from securely closed con-tainers. When transporting such substancesin the vehicle interior, your ability to concen-trate or your health could be affected duringthe journey. Malfunctions, short circuits orelectrical component system failures mayalso result. There is a risk of an accident andfire.Do not store or transport any substances inthe vehicle interior which are hazardous tohealth or react aggressively.

These instructions must also be observed forvehicles where the cargo compartment is notfully separated from the driver's cab.Partition with door/window: always keep thedoor/window in the partition closed duringtransport.Examples of substances that are hazardousto health and/or react aggressively:RSolventsRFuelROil and greaseRCleaning agentsRAcids

Protection of the environment

Economic and environmentally awaredriving

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.

Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental issues and recommen-dationsWhen prompted by this Operator's Manual todispose of materials, please try to regenerateand recycle these materials. Observe all rel-evant environmental guidelines and regula-

Introduction 23

Z

tions when disposing of materials. This helpsto protect the environment.

Operating safety and vehicle approval

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-rial, which may require special handling andregard for the environment. The guidelinesmust be observed during disposal.In California, you can find more informationon the Internet at www.dtsc.ca.gov.

Notes on operating the vehicleThere is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle makes contact with the ground,e.g. on a high curb or a loose road surfaceRyou drive too quickly over an obstacle, e.g.a curb or a potholeRa heavy object hits the underbody or chas-sis component

In these or similar situations, the vehiclebody/frame, the underbody, chassis compo-nents, wheels or tires could be damaged evenif this is not visible from the outside. Compo-nents that have been damaged in thisway canunexpectedly fail or no longer be able toassimilate the loads occurring in the event ofan accident. If the underbody paneling isdamaged, flammable material, such asleaves, grass or twigs, could collect betweenthe underbody and underbody paneling.These materials could ignite if they remain in

contact with hot components of the exhaustsystem for an extended period.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

Have the vehicle checked and repaired imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop. Ifyou become aware when continuing the jour-ney that driving safety has been effected,stop as soon as possible in accordance withthe traffic conditions. In such cases, consult aqualified specialist workshop.

Declaration of conformity

Radio-based vehicle componentsUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-ation is subject to the following two condi-tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-ful interference. 2. This device must acceptany interference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation.Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: 1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and 2) thesedevices must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device".

24 Introduction

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

Changing the engine power output! Increases in engine power can:Rchange the emission valuesRcause malfunctionsRcause consequential damageThe operating reliability of the engine is notguaranteed in all cases.

Any tampering with the engine managementsystem in order to increase the engine poweroutput will lead to the loss of the New VehicleLimited Warranty and other warranty entitle-ments.If you sell the vehicle, inform the purchaserabout the changes to the engine power out-put of the vehicle. If you do not inform thebuyer, this may constitute a punishableoffense under national legislation.

Qualified specialist workshopsAn authorized Sprinter Dealer is a qualifiedspecialist workshop.A qualified specialist workshop has the nec-essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-fications to correctly carry out the workrequired on the vehicle.This is especially the case for work relevant tosafety. Observe the information in the Main-tenance Booklet.

The following work should always be carriedout at qualified specialist workshop:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRmodifications as well as installations andalterationsRwork on electronic componentsFor this reason, we recommend an authorizedSprinter Dealer.

! Only have work carried out on the engineelectronics and its associated parts, suchas control units, sensors, actuating com-ponents and connector leads, at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Vehicle componentsmay otherwise wear more quickly and thevehicle's operating permit may be invalida-ted.

Registering your vehicleWe may ask our authorized Sprinter Dealersto carry out technical inspections on certainvehicles to improve their quality or safety. Wecan only inform you about vehicle checks ifwe have your registration data.Your registration data is not stored if:Ryou did not purchase your vehicle at anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.Ryour vehicle has never been inspected at anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

It is advisable to register your vehicle with anauthorized Sprinter Dealer. Please inform usas soon as possible about any change ofaddress or vehicle ownership.

Exhaust gas aftertreatmentTo function properly, exhaust gas aftertreat-ment must be operated with Diesel ExhaustFluid (DEF) reducing agent . The DEF range isdependent on operating and driving condi-tions. Therefore, add to the DEF supply tankregularly during vehicle operation or, at the

Introduction 25

Z

latest, after receiving the first warning mes-sage via the on-board computer.To conform to emission regulations, youmustoperate the vehicle with DEF and refill thesupply regularly. The engine managementrecognizes attempts to operate the vehiclewithout DEF, with thinned DEF or withanother reducing agent. After previous warn-ing messages, the engine management thenprevents a further engine start.If the DEF level drops below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l),the first warning message is issued and awarning tone sounds. After the messageappears for the first time, and under normaldriving conditions, the remaining DEF supplywill last for approximately 1000 miles(1600 km).If a reserve mark of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) isreached, a second warningmessage is issuedand a warning tone sequence sounds. Afterthe first message, the DEF supply will last forapproximately 1200 miles (1900 km). Subse-quently, you will only be able to start theengine a further 16 times.You should immediately add 2.0 US gal (7.6 l)of DEF (Y page 147) or have the DEF supplyreservoir filled at a qualified specialist work-shop.When the number of remaining engine startsis 00 and the engine is restarted, the enginemanagement prevents the vehicle from beingdriven at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).If the;Check Engine indicator lamp lightsup, the exhaust gas aftertreatment is faulty oran emission-related malfunction has occur-red (Y page 211). You will then only be able todrive a maximum 50 mi (80 km) before theengine management restricts the number ofstarts remaining.If the exhaust gas aftertreatment is faulty,have it checked and repaired at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Further information on DEF can be found inthe "Refueling" (Y page 147) and "Serviceproducts and capacities" (Y page 320) sec-tions.

Attachments, bodies, equipment andconversions

Information about body/equipmentmounting directives

! For safety reasons, have add-on equip-ment manufactured and installed accord-ing to the Sprinter body/equipmentmount-ing directives in force. These body/equip-ment mounting directives ensure that thechassis and the body formone unit and thatmaximum operating and road safety is ach-ieved.We recommend for safety reasons that:Ryou carry out no other modifications tothe vehicle.Ryou obtain the agreement of the distrib-utor named on the inside of the frontcover for any deviations from theapproved body/equipment mountingdirectives.

Approval from certified inspection agen-cies or official approvals cannot rule outrisks to your safety.

Please observe the information concerningMercedes-Benz Genuine Parts (Y page 27).Further information can be obtained at anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

G WARNINGThe function of systems or components canbe affected by conversions or modificationsto the vehicle. They might not function prop-erly any more and/or jeopardize the opera-tional safety of the vehicle. There is anincreased risk of an accident and injury.Conversions or modifications should alwaysbe carried out at qualified specialist work-shop.

If you intend to make modifications to yourvehicle, we strongly recommend that youcontact the distributor named on the inside ofthe front cover. There you will receive all thenecessary information and a charge may belevied.

26 Introduction

You alone accept the responsibility if bodymanufacturers or dealersmakemodificationsthat affect the final certification of the engine,the vehicle or the equipment. This alsoapplies to the identification and documenta-tion of modifications to the affected vehiclecomponents.You are responsible for certification and con-firmation that:Rall the applicable standards and regulationsthat are affected by the vehicle modifica-tion are metRthe modified vehicle fulfills the vehiclesafety standards and emissions laws andregulationsRthe modifications or installation of acces-sories does not affect the safety of thevehicle

We are not responsible for the final certifica-tion, product liability or warranty claimswhich result from the modifications. Thisapplies to:Rthe modified components, assemblies orsystemsRany resulting noncompliance with any ofthe emissions laws and regulations or themotor vehicle safety standardsRany consequences arising from thechanges that make the vehicle less safe oreven render it defective

We do not assume responsibility as the final-stage manufacturer or for the consequentialproduct liability.

Notes on the radiatorEven seemingly small changes to the vehicle,such as attaching a radiator trim for winterdriving, is not permitted. Do not cover up theradiator. Do not use thermal mats, insect pro-tection covers or anything similar.Otherwise, the values of the diagnostic sys-tem may be affected. Some of these valuesare legally prescribed and must always becorrect.

Information on the cargo compartmentfloor

! The wooden or plastic cargo area floor fit-ted at the factory is an integral componentof the vehicle structure. The vehicle bodycould be damaged if you have the load areafloor removed. This then affects the secur-ing of loads and the maximum loadingcapacity of the lashing points is no longerguaranteed.Therefore, do not have the load area floorremoved.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

H Environmental noteWe supply reconditioned assemblies andparts which are of the same quality as newparts. The same New Vehicle Limited War-ranty applies as for new parts.

The operating safety of the vehicle could bejeopardized if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in

Introduction 27

Z

safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake sys-tem. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz partsor parts of equal quality. Only use tires,wheels and accessories that have been spe-cifically approved for your vehicle.We test genuine Sprinter parts, as well asconversion parts and accessories that havebeen specifically approved for the type ofvehicle, for:RreliabilityRsafetyRsuitabilityDespite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. There-fore, we accept no responsibility for the use ofsuch parts in Sprinter vehicles, even if theyhave been officially approved or independ-ently approved by a testing center.In some countries, certain parts are only offi-cially approved for installation ormodificationif they comply with legal requirements. Allgenuine Sprinter parts satisfy these require-ments. Make sure that all parts are suitablefor your vehicle.Always specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) and engine number when orderinggenuine Sprinter parts (Y page 316).

Service and vehicle operation

Maintenance and literatureThe Service and Warranty Information Book-let contains detailed information on the typesof warranty that your Sprinter is covered by,including:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyRDiesel Engine Limited WarrantyRAnti-Perforation WarrantyRLimited Warranty for Restraint Systems(only vehicles that have been sold and reg-istered in the state of Kansas)RLegally required Emission PerformanceWarranty

Replacement parts and accessories are sub-ject to the Replacement Part and AccessoryWarranty of the dealer mentioned on theinside cover. You can obtain these from anyauthorized Sprinter dealer.

MaintenanceTheMaintenance Booklet and the Service andWarranty Information Booklet describe allnecessary maintenance work that should becarried out at regular intervals.When you take the vehicle to an authorizedSprinter dealer, always be sure to bring theMaintenance/Service/Warranty InformationBooklet. Your customer service advisorenters each maintenance service into theMaintenance Booklet for you.

Registering your vehicleWe may ask our authorized Sprinter Dealersto carry out technical inspections on certainvehicles to improve their quality or safety.We can only inform you about vehicle checksif we have your registration data.Your registration data is not stored if:Ryou did not purchase your vehicle at anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.Ryour vehicle has never been inspected at anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

It is advisable to register your vehicle with anauthorized Sprinter Dealer. Please inform usas soon as possible about any change ofaddress or vehicle ownership.

Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to con-tact an authorized Sprinter Dealer immedi-ately to have the problem diagnosed and rec-tified.

28 Introduction

If the problem cannot be rectified to your sat-isfaction there:Rplease discuss the problem with a manage-ment representative from the authorizedSprinter Dealer.Rif necessary, contact the distributor namedon the inside of the front cover.

Data stored in the vehicle

A wide range of electronic components inyour vehicle contain data memories.These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rthe vehicle's operating statusReventsRmalfunctionsIn general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.This includes, for example:Roperating conditions of system compo-nents, e.g. fluid levels.Rthe vehicle's status messages and those ofits individual components, e.g. number ofwheel revolutions/speed, deceleration inmovement, lateral acceleration, accelera-tor pedal position.Rmalfunctions and defects in important sys-tem components, e.g. lights, brakes.Rthe vehicle's reactions and operating sta-tuses in special driving situations. e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of stabilitycontrol systems.Rambient conditions, e.g. outside tempera-ture.

This data is exclusively technical in natureand can be used to:Rassist in the detection and rectification ofmalfunctions and defectsRanalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-dentRoptimize vehicle functions

The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When you use one of the available services,technical information may be read from theevent data memory and malfunction datamemory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarranty claimsRquality assuranceThe information is read out by employees ofthe service network (including manufactur-ers) using special diagnostic testers. Furtherinformation is available there if required.After a malfunction has been rectified, theinformation is deleted from the malfunctionmemory or is continually overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations areconceivable in which this technical data, inconnection with other information - if neces-sary, under consultation with an authorizedexpert - could be traced to a person.Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions which are con-tractually agreed with the customer likewiseallow specific vehicle data to be obtainedfrom the vehicle. Such additional functionsinclude vehicle locating in an emergency, forexample.

Introduction 29

Z

30

Cockpit ................................................. 32Instrument cluster .............................. 34Steering wheel buttons ...................... 37Center console .................................... 37Overhead control panel ...................... 38Door control panel .............................. 39Further control panels ........................ 39

31

Ataglance

Cockpit

Function Page

: Door control panel 39

; Light switch 92

= Combination switch• turn signals 94• high-beam headlamps 94• windshield wipers 107• rear window wiper 108

? Cruise control lever 159

A Steering wheel without/with buttons 37

B Instrument cluster 34

C Stowage compartment• 3.5 mm audio jack 237• USB port 238

D Timer for the auxiliarywarm-air heater (auxiliaryheating) 127

Function Page

E • Stowage compartmentwith interior light 97• Overhead control panel 38

F Rear-view mirror 89

G PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 167

H Opens/closes the right-hand side window 78

I Stowage compartment(jack and vehicle tool kit) 274

J Glove box 230

K Center console 37

L Selector lever (automatictransmission) 142

M Ignition lock 138

N Further control panels 39

O Steering wheel buttons 37

P Applies/releases the park-ing brake 155

32 CockpitAt

aglance

Function Page

Q Horn

R Opens the hood 248

S Steering wheel buttons 37

Cockpit 33

Ataglance

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttonsFunction Page

: Speedometer 181

; Tachometer 181

= f,g Brightens/dims theinstrument cluster lighting 181

? Fuel gagewith fuel filler flaplocation indicator 181

A DisplayVehicles without steeringwheel buttons 182Vehicles with steeringwheel buttons 184

Function Page

B Reset button9 34

C Menu button4• changes standard display 182• selects menus 183

D Service button Ë

Checks the engine oil level 250

34 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Indicator and warning lamps

Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttonsFunction Page

: Speedometer with warn-ing and indicator lamps

d ESP® warning lamp 218ASR warning lamp 218

% Coolant level too low 223

? Coolant temperature toohigh 223

6 Restraint systems malfunc-tion 42

b Brake fluid level too low 219EBD malfunctioning 218Trailer brake force boostermalfunction 219

4 Engine oil level warning 222

Function Page

; Check Engine indicatorlamp 224

% Preglow 139Preglow system malfunc-tion 225

; Indicator and warninglamps

G Left-hand turn signal 94

! ABS malfunction 218

h Tire pressure loss or the tirepressure monitor is mal-functioning (USA only) 226Tire pressure loss (Canadaonly) 292

Instrument cluster 35

Ataglance

Function Page

¦ Fluid level too low in wind-shield washer/headlampcleaning system 226

å DEF supply low or contami-nated/thinned 182Exhaust gas aftertreatmentmalfunction 221

Ä Warning and indicatorlamps, distance warningsystem 162

à Warning and indicatorlamps, Lane Keeping Assist 166

1 Door or hood open 227Electrically operated stepmalfunction 227

# Brake pads/linings worn 222

K High-beam headlamps on(vehicle with steering wheelbuttons) 94

J Right-hand turn signal 94

: ASR malfunction 58BAS malfunction 218

h ESP® malfunction 218

Function Page

È Dirt accumulation in air fil-ter 225

6 Reserve fuel 181Fuel filler cap open 224

: Water in the fuel 226

# Battery charging malfunc-tion 222

b Bulb defective 227

= Tachometer with warn-ing and indicator lamps

c Parking brake applied 155

L Low-beam headlamps on 92

K Working speed governor(ADR) on 172

K High-beam headlamps on(vehicle without steeringwheel buttons) 94

| Reserve fuel 224Fuel filler cap open 224

h ESP® malfunction 218

7 Fasten seat belts 227

i Corresponding messages may also beshown in the display (Y page 197).

36 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Steering wheel buttons

Function Page

: Display 184

On-board computer oper-ation

; Selects a submenu oradjusts the volume 184WUp/increases the vol-umeX Down/reduces thevolumeUsing the telephone 1966 Accepts a call/startsdialing~ Ends a call/rejects anincoming call

= Scrolls from one menu toanother 184V ForwardsU BackScrolls within a menu 1849 Forwards: Back

Center console

Function Page

: Stowage compartment 231

; Audio 10 or Audio 15 (seethe separate operatinginstructions)

= Air-conditioning controlpanel 112Paper holder1 233

? Center console controlpanel

c Switches the left/right-hand seat heating on/off 87

z Switches the windshieldheating on/off 119

| Switches the rear windowdefroster on/off 119

f Activates/deactivatesPARKTRONIC 169

1 Only on vehicles without rear-compartment climate control.

Center console 37

Ataglance

Function Page

£ Switches the hazard warn-ing lamps on/off 95

à Activates/deactivates ASR 58

ÃÄ

Central locking, interior/rear compartment 71

æ Activates/deactivates thedistance warning function 162

j Activates/deactivatesLane Keeping Assist 166

Activates/deacti-vates Blind Spot Assist 163

A •Stowage compartment or• CD changer; see the sep-arate operating instruc-tions, or

B Cup holder with: 234• ashtray 235• cigarette lighter 235

C 12 V socket 236

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: Microphone for the mobilephone 236

; Switches the reading lampon/off, right 97

= Switches the automaticinterior lighting on/off 97

? • Eyeglasses compartmentor 231• Anti-Theft Alarm system(ATA) 61

A Switches the interior light-ing on/off 97

B Switches the reading lampon/off, left 97

38 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: Adjusts the exterior mirrors 89

; Selects an exterior mirror 89

= Opens/closes the left-handside window 78

? Opens/closes the right-hand side window 78

Further control panels

Control panel between the lightswitch and the steering wheel

Function Page

y Switches the auxiliary heat-ing on/off 123

± Switches the heater boos-ter function on/off 130

EF

Sets the working speed172

E Switches the workingspeed governor (ADR)on/off 172

´·

Ventilates the cargo com-partment 133

Further control panels 39

Ataglance

Control panel between the steeringwheel and the ignition lock

Function Page

lk

Switches the central rearcompartment lightingon/off 97

40 Further control panelsAt

aglance

Useful information .............................. 42Occupant safety .................................. 42Children in the vehicle ........................ 51Pets in the vehicle ............................... 56Driving safety systems ....................... 57Emergency exit .................................... 60Theft deterrent locking system ......... 61

41

Safety

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all modelsaswell as standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to systems and functionsrelevant to safety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 25).

Occupant safety

Restraint system introductionThe restraint system reduces the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with partsof the vehicle's interior in the event of anaccident. The restraint system can alsoreduce the forces to which vehicle occupantsare subjected during an accident.The restraint system comprises:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsRChild restraint systemRChild seat securing systemsThe components of the restraint systemworkin conjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times,all vehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 45)Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraintproperly (Y page 82).

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the cor-rect driver's seat position (Y page 82).You also have tomake sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 47).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the airbag increases the level of protection for vehi-

cle occupants in the event of an accident. Forexample, if, in the event of an accident, theprotection offered by the seat belt is suffi-cient, the air bags are not deployed. When anaccident occurs, only the air bags thatincrease protection in that particular accidentsituation are deployed. However, seat beltsand air bags generally do not protect againstobjects penetrating the vehicle from the out-side.Information on restraint system operationcan be found under "Deployment of Emer-gency Tensioning Devices and air bags"(Y page 49).For more information about children travelingwith you in the vehicle and on child restraintsystems, see "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 51).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system, maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an airbag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Sprinter dealership fordetails. USA only: contact our CustomerAssistance Center at 1‑877‑762‑8267 fordetails.

Restraint system warning lampThe restraint systems functions are checkedafter the ignition is switched on and at regularintervals when the engine is running. This

42 Occupant safetySafety

allows malfunctions to be detected in goodtime.When the ignition is switched on, the 6restraint system warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up. It goes out no laterthan a few seconds after the vehicle is star-ted. The components of the restraint systemare on standby.A malfunction has occurred if the 6restraint system warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition isswitched on.Rdoes not switch off after a few seconds.Rgoes out, but then lights up again, e.g. whenthe engine is running.

G WARNINGIf restraint system is malfunctioning, restraintsystem components may be triggered unin-tentionally or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-ple. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occu-pants in the event of an accident or the vehi-cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with partsof the vehicle interior or being ejected fromthe vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helpsto keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi-tion in relation to the air bag.

The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices and seatbelt force limiters for the driver's and front-passenger seat beltsOn vehicles with two seats on the front-passenger side, both seat belts on thefront-passenger side have an EmergencyTensioningDevice. Only the seat belt on theouter front-passenger seat has a seat beltforce limiter.

The seat belt system only includes Emer-gency Tensioning Devices and seat belt forcelimiters for the driver and front passenger ifthe vehicle is equipped with a driver's air bag.If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outletquickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot beextracted any further.The Emergency Tensioning Device tightensthe seat belt in an accident, pulling the beltclose against the body. However it does notpull the vehicle occupant back in the directionof the backrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does notcorrect an incorrect seat position or the rout-ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, seat belt force limiters helpto reduce the force exerted by the seat belt onthe vehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters are synchronizedwith the front air bags, which absorb part ofthe deceleration force. This can reduce theforce exerted on the vehicle occupants duringan accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckleof the front-passenger seat. This may oth-erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-gency Tensioning Device in the event of anaccident, which will then need to bereplaced.

Vehicles with two seats on the front-passenger side: the Emergency TensioningDevice of the inner front-passenger seat is

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

triggered independently of the lock status ofthe seat belt.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-not protect as intended. Furthermore, anincorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants areseated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannotfasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional suitable restraint system. If the seat

belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protectas intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-tened seat belt can cause additional injury, forexample, in an accident, during braking or anabrupt change of direction. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraintsystems.

If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this vehicle. The childrestraint systemmust be appropriate to theage, weight and size of the childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-tion of this Operator's Manual(Y page 51) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installa-tion instructions

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-sioning Devices could accidentally trigger orfail to deploy when necessary. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checked

44 Occupant safetySafety

immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by the sales organizationnamed on the inside cover. Any such modifi-cations could invalidate the vehicle's generaloperating permit.

Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 44).All vehicle occupants must be wearing theseat belt correctly before beginning the jour-ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu-pants are always wearing the seat belt cor-rectly while the vehicle is in motion.When fastening the seat belt, always makesure that:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to thebelt buckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur bedistributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or berouted under your arm. Where possible,adjust the seat belt to the appropriateheight.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low downas possible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdo-men. This applies particularly to pregnantwomen. If necessary, push the lap beltdown to your hip joint and pull it tight usingthe shoulder section of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,pointed or fragile objects.

If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses,store these in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt at atime.Infants and children must never travel sit-ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In theevent of an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seatbelt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observethe "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,luggage or loads (Y page 240).

Fastening and adjusting seat beltsPlease take note of the safety notes on seatbelts (Y page 44) and the notes on their cor-rect use (Y page 45).

Illustration

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

X Adjust the seat (Y page 82).The seat backrest must be in an almostupright position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sashguide= and engage belt tongue; intobelt buckle:.

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

The shoulder section of the belt must alwaysrun over the center of the shoulder. Adjust thebelt outlet if necessary.X To raise: slide belt guide= upwards.The belt outlet engages in various posi-tions.

X To lower: press belt guide release? andslide belt guide= downwards.

X Let go of belt guide release? in thedesired position and make sure that thebelt guide engages.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv-er's seat belt, are equippedwith a special seatbelt retractor to secure child restraint sys-tems properly. Further information can befound under "Special seat belt retractor"(Y page 52).

Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their

protective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X Press release button:, hold belttongue; firmly and guide it back towardsbelt outlet=.

Belt warning for drivers and co-driversThe7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder for all occupants tofasten their seat belts. It may light up contin-uously or flash. A warning tone may alsosound.Regardless of whether the driver has alreadyfastened their seat belt, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up for 6 seconds eachtime the ignition is switched on. After theengine is started, it goes out as soon as thedriver's seat belt had been fastened.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened afterthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone switchesoff after a maximum of 6 seconds or once thedriver's seat belt is fastened.If a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) isexceeded and the driver has still not fastenedtheir seat belt, a warning tone sounds again.The warning tone sounds for 60 seconds oruntil the driver has fastened their seat belt.

46 Occupant safetySafety

If the driver unfastens their seat belt duringthe journey, the belt warning is automaticallyactivated again.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster"(Y page 227).

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the SRS/AIR BAG or AIR BAG sym-bol.An air bag complements the correctly fas-tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seatbelt. The air bag provides additional protec-tion in applicable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems function inde-pendently from one another (Y page 49).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructions

Always make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that theseat is in an almost upright position. Thecenter of the head restraint must supportthe head at about eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passengerseats as far back as possible. The driver'sseat position must allow the vehicle to bedriven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-side. This allows the air bag to be fullydeployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean againstthe door or side window. You may other-wise be in the deployment area of the airbags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell infront of the seat. Do not put your feet on thedashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-erwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraintsystems. Up to this height, the seat beltcannot be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under 12 years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height insuitable child restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installedon the rear seats.RAlways secure a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system on a suitable rearseat. The front-passenger front air bag can-not be deactivated.RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 51) and on the "Child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat"(Y page 55) in addition to the child

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

restraint system manufacturer's installa-tion instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-vent an air bag from functioning correctly.Before starting your journey and to avoid risksresulting from the speed of the air bag as itdeploys, make sure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploy-ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors or sidewindows.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objectsare in the pockets of your clothing. Storesuch objects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyany more. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel. Front-passenger front airbag; deploys in front of and above the glovebox and the center console.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for theoccupants in the front seats.

Thorax bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers may obstruct or evenprevent deployment of the air bags integratedinto the seats. The air bags may then fail toprotect the vehicle occupants as intended.There is an increased risk of injury, possiblyeven fatal.Only use seat cushions that are approved foryour vehicle by the distributor named on theinside cover page.

Thorax bags: deploy next to the outer seatcushions.

48 Occupant safetySafety

Thorax bags are only available in combinationwith individual seats on the driver's and co-driver's side.When deployed, thorax bag: offers addi-tional thorax protection. However, it does notprotect the:RheadRneckRarmsThe thorax bag is deployed on the side of theimpact.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integratedinto the side of the roof frame above the frontdoors.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest orarms.In the event of a side impact, the window cur-tain air bag is deployed on the side on whichthe impact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 49).

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig-gered or air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. The 6 restraint system warn-ing lamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect yourhearing. The powder that is released gener-ally does not constitute a health hazard, but it

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

may cause short-term breathing difficulties inpeople with asthma or other respiratory prob-lems. To avoid this, youmay wish to get out ofthe vehicle or open the windows as soon as itis safe to do so.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-rial, which may require special handling andregard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. InCalifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, therestraint system control unit evaluates impor-tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-ation or acceleration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers theEmergency Tensioning Devices during a fron-tal or rear collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched on.Rthe components of the restraint system areoperational; see "Restraint system warninglamp" (Y page 42)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe respective front-passenger seat

Vehicles with two seats on the front-passenger side: the Emergency TensioningDevice on the inner front-passenger seat istriggered independently of the lock status ofthe seat belt.

If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RFront air bagsRWindow curtain air bag on the side ofimpact

The activation threshold of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and the air bag are deter-mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel-eration or acceleration which occurs at vari-ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should takeplace in good time at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion and the direction of the force are essen-tially determined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-sionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-cleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factorswhich can only be seen andmeasuredafter a collision has occurred do not play adecisive role in the deployment of an air bag.Nor do they provide an indication of air bagdeployment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably,without an air bag being deployed. This is thecase if only parts which are relatively easilydeformed are affected and the rate of decel-eration is not high. Conversely, air bags maybe deployed even though the vehicle suffersonly minor deformation. This is the case if, forexample, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-gitudinal bodymembers are hit, and sufficientdeceleration occurs as a result.

50 Occupant safetySafety

If the restraint system control unit detects aside impact or that the vehicle is rolling over,the relevant restraint system components areactivated independently of one anotherdepending on the apparent type of accident.If the systemdetermines a need for additionalprotection for the vehicle occupants, theEmergency Tensioning Devices are triggered.RThorax bag on the side of impact, inde-pendently of the Emergency TensioningDevice and the use of the seat beltRWindow curtain air bag on the side ofimpact, independently of the use of theseat belt and independently of whether thefront-passenger seat is occupied

i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-dent. The different air bag systems workindependently of each other.How the air bag system works is deter-mined by the severity of the accident detec-ted, especially the vehicle deceleration oracceleration and the apparent type of acci-dent:Rfrontal collisionRside impact

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, we strongly advise that you installa child restraint system on a rear seat. Chil-dren are generally better protected there.If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this vehicle. The childrestraint systemmust be appropriate to theage, weight and size of the childRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes in this section in addition to

the child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly. Particular attention must bepaid to children.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 44) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 45).

Children in the vehicle 51

Safety

Z

A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a heightwhere a lap/shoulder belt can be fastenedproperly without a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv-er's seat belt, are equippedwith a special seatbelt retractor. When activated, the specialseat belt retractor ensures that the seat beltcannot slacken once the child seat is secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystemmanufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the beltoutlet.

X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is enabled.

X Push the child restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does notloosen.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivat-ing the special seat belt retractor:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystemmanufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Press the belt buckle release button, holdthe belt tongue and guide it back towardsthe belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-ted.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or a

52 Children in the vehicleSafety

sudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loadingguidelines" (Y page 240).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

The securing systems of child restraint sys-tems are:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchorages

i If it is absolutely necessary to carry a childon the front-passenger seat, be sure toobserve the information on "Child restraintsystems on the front-passenger seat"(Y page 55).

All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-ards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that are inclu-ded with the child restraint system.Observe thewarning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation and operating instructions for thechild restraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system isengaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat beltcould otherwise be damaged.

Children in the vehicle 53

Safety

Z

: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsX Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings:.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings: for a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system are installed between theseat cushion and the seat backrest:Ron the outer left and right seat on rearbench seats with 3 seatsRon the outer left seat on rear bench seatswith 2 seats

Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats mayalso be used and can be installed using thevehicle's seat belt system. Install the childseat according to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mountand the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk ofinjury even further. If the child restraint sys-tem is equipped with a Top Tether belt, thisshould always be used.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the Top Tether belt has been incorrectlysecured, e.g. to an eyelet in the cargo com-partment, the child restraint system is notcorrectly kept in place. It therefore cannotperform its intended protective function in theevent of an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Only secure the Top Tether hook to the TopTether anchorage intended for this purpose.

Top Tether anchorages

Example: rear bench seat with 3 seats

Top Tether anchorages; are on the benchseat legs on the rear side of the respectiverear bench seat.

X Move head restraint: upwards.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Alwayscomply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructionswhen doing so.

54 Children in the vehicleSafety

X Route Top Tether belt? under headrestraint:between the twohead restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook= into Top Tetheranchorage;.Make sure that:RTop Tether hook= is hooked into TopTether anchorage; as shown.RTop Tether belt? is not twisted.

X Tension Top Tether belt?. Always complywith the child restraint systemmanufactur-er's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X If necessary, move the head restraint backdown again slightly (Y page 86). Makesure that you do not interfere with the cor-rect routing of Top Tether belt?.

Child restraint system on the co-driv-er's seat

General notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install the child restraint system on arear seat.

Rearward-facing child restraint systemThe front-passenger front air bag cannot bedeactivated. Always install a rearward-facingchild restraint system on a suitable rear seat.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install aforward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Theentire base of the child restraint systemmustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the child

restraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passengerseat. The child restraint system must not besubjected to a load by the head restraint.Adjust the head restraint position accord-ingly. Alwaysmake sure that the shoulder beltstrap is correctly routed from the vehicle beltoutlet to the shoulder belt guide on the childrestraint system. The shoulder belt strapmust be routed forwards and downwardsfrom the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary,adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Child-proof lock/override feature for:RSliding door (Y page 56)RRear door (Y page 56)

Children in the vehicle 55

Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Child-proof locks for the sliding doorand rear door

Sliding door

Rear door: Child safety bolt2 Door secured – then make sure that the

child-proof locks are working properly.3 Door releasedThe child-proof lock on the doors enable youto secure each door individually.A door with an activated child-proof lock can-not be opened from the inside. If the vehicle isunlocked, the door can be opened from theoutside.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.

56 Pets in the vehicleSafety

As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

OverviewIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)RASR (Acceleration Skid Control)RBAS (Brake Assist System)REBD (Electronic Brake Force Distribution)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if youare inattentive, the driving safety systems canneither reduce the risk of accident nor over-ride the laws of physics. Driving safety sys-tems are merely aids designed to assist driv-ing. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, brakingin good time and for staying in your lane.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road andweather conditions andmaintaina sufficient, safe distance from other roadusers. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described can onlyattain their maximum effectiveness whenthere is optimum contact between the tires

and the road can. Pay particular attention tothe information regarding tires, recommen-ded minimum tire tread depth etc. under"Wheels and tires" (Y page 284).Inwintry driving conditions, always usewintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snowchains. This is the only way to get the fullbenefit from the driving safety systemsdescribed.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Important safety notesObserve the important safety guidelines forthe driving safety system (Y page 57).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems willalso fail, including driving safety systems.Observe the information relating to the !warning lamp (Y page 218).ABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, evenwhen you only brake gently.The yellow ! warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. The lamp goes out when theengine starts running.

Driving safety systems 57

Safety

Z

BrakingIf ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsating in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-tion of hazardous road conditions and func-tions as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal with force until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

ASR (acceleration skid control)

General notes

Important safety notesObserve the important safety guidelines forthe driving safety system (Y page 57).ASR can neither reduce the risk of an accidentnor suspend the laws of physics if the driverdoes not pay attention when pulling away oraccelerating. ASR is only an aid. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing roadand weather conditions.Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: ifASR is malfunctioning, the: indicatorlamp lights up while the engine is running andthe engine power may be reduced(Y page 218).ASR significantly improves traction, i.e. thetransmission of power from the tires to theroad surface, and thus increases the vehicle'sdriving stability. If the driving wheels start tospin, ASR brakes individual drive wheels andlimits the engine torque. ASR thus signifi-cantly assists you when pulling away andaccelerating, especially on wet or slipperyroads.If traction on the road surface is not sufficient,even ASR will not allow you to pull away with-out difficulty. The type of tires and totalweight of the vehicle as well as the gradient ofthe road also play a crucial role.

If ASR intervenes, thed warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes.

Activating/deactivating ASR

G WARNINGIf deactivated, ASR will not attempt to stabi-lize the vehicle during pulling away and accel-eration. There is an increased risk of skiddingand of an accident.Only deactivate ASR in the situations descri-bed in the following.

! If you deactivate ASR, ESP®will still inter-vene to stabilize the vehicle. Frequent brak-ing automatically triggered by ESP® candamage the brake system.For this reason, deactivate ASR only brieflyand when absolutely necessary.

When ESP® is intervening and thedwarn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster is flashing,leave ASR on. In this case, only depress theaccelerator pedal as far as required whenpulling away.X Press theà button.If ASR is deactivated, thed warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

ASR is automatically activated when theengine is started.It may be best to deactivate ASR briefly in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

58 Driving safety systemsSafety

If you deactivate ASR:Rengine torque is not limited and the drivewheels are able to spin. The spinningwheels will then achieve a cutting effect forbetter traction.Rtraction control remains active throughbrake intervention. If a drive wheel attainsits tire traction limit because one side of theroad is slippery, for example, that wheel isbraked. The traction is then increased inthis situation.Ractive brake intervention by ESP® toincrease driving stability remains active.Thed warning lamp in the instrumentcluster flashes when ESP® is intervening.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: ifthe BAS driving safety system is malfunction-ing, the:warning lamp lights upwhile theengine is running (Y page 218).BAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake quickly, BASautomatically increases the brake pressure,thereby reducing the stopping distance.The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure to the rear wheels. This enables EBD toimprove handling during braking.Observe the information on warning and indi-cator lamps (Y page 218).

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Important safety notesObserve the important safety guidelines forthe driving safety system (Y page 57).

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning it will not provideany vehicle stabilization. There is an increasedrisk of skidding or of an accident.Exercise caution when continuing to drive.Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! Do not run the vehicle on a roller dyna-mometer (e.g. for performance tests). Ifyou must operate the vehicle on a rollerdynamometer, please consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop in advance. You couldotherwise damage the drive train or thebrake system.

If ESP® is malfunctioning, theh warninglamp lights up while the engine is running andthe engine power may be reduced(Y page 218).Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Crosswind Assist

Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® isdeactivated or disabled because of a mal-function.

Driving safety systems 59

Safety

Z

Crosswind Assist does not react:Rin the event of severe jolts and vibrations,e.g. as a result of uneven surfaces or pot-holesRif the vehicle loses traction, e.g. on snow orice or when aquaplaningRto large and sudden steering movementsby the driver

Crosswind Assist is operational again as soonas the driving conditions return to normal.Crosswind Assist detects strong crosswindgusts that can impair the road holding of yourvehicle when driving straight ahead. Cross-wind Assist intervenes depending on thedirection and strength of the crosswind.A stabilizing brake application helps you tokeep the vehicle on track.Information appears in the instrument clusterIn the event that Crosswind Assist intervenesnoticeably.On vehicles without steering wheel but-tons: thed indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster flashes.On vehicles with steering wheel buttons:thed indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster flashes and the message CrosswindCrosswindAssist ActiveAssist Active appears in the multifunctiondisplay.Crosswind Assist is active above a vehiclespeed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when the vehicleis driving straight ahead or cornering gently.

Emergency exit

Emergency exit window

G WARNINGThe emergency exit window cannot be lockedin place. You risk injury if you exit the vehiclethrough the emergency exit window.RMake sure that nobody becomes trapped,both when closing and when opening theemergency exit window.RThe opened emergency exit window mustbe held in place by another person.

Pay attention to traffic conditions.

G WARNINGIf the emergency exit window is unlockedwhile driving, it could open and slam shut andconsequently fall down. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Before starting off, make sure that the emer-gency exit window is locked and the lockingpins are undamaged.

! Make sure there is sufficient clearancewhen opening the emergency exit window.Hold the open window in position. Youcould otherwise damage the emergencyexit window.

The emergency exit window is intended foruse in an emergency only and must not beopened unless the vehicle is stationary. Theemergency exit window is the first windowbehind the driver's seat on the driver's side. Itis marked by the "Emergency Exit" label.X To open: position both handles: verti-cally. This will break locking pins;.The window is unlocked.

X Swing the window outward by the handlesand hold it in this position. Make sure thereis sufficient clearance when doing so.

X To close: close the window.

60 Emergency exitSafety

X Position both handles: horizontally.Make sure that the locks= are inside infront of the window frame.The window is locked.

X Replace locking pins; at the latest beforestarting on a new journey.You can obtain information on this at anyqualified specialist workshop.

In an emergency, or after an accident, thevehicle occupants can exit the vehiclethrough the emergency exit window.Observe the following notes tomake sure thatthe emergency exit window can be usedsafely in the event of an emergency:RBefore beginning a journey, inform the vehi-cle occupants of the emergency exit win-dow and explain how to use it. Make sure toexplicitly point out the risks described here.ROnly vehicle occupants who know how touse the emergency exit window are permit-ted to sit next to it.RAccess to the emergency exit windowmustremain unobstructed. Do not place anylarge or heavy objects on or in front of theseats next to the emergency exit window.RThe window handles must not be used ashooks, e.g. to hang up light objects, bags oritems of clothing.RWhen exiting the vehicle through the emer-gency exit window, pay attention to thevehicle height and the local conditions. Par-ticularly children and smaller adults mayrequire assistance when exiting the vehi-cle.

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerX To activate: remove the key from the igni-tion lock.

X To deactivate: turn the key to position 2 inthe ignition lock.

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct key.

Always take the key with you and lock thevehicle when leaving the vehicle. If you leavethe key in the vehicle, anyone can start theengine.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be star-ted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Sprinter dealer orcall 1-877-762-8267 (in USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)X To arm: close all doors.X Lock the vehicle with the key.The indicator lamp in the central lockingbutton (Y page 71) flashes.

X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with thekey.The indicator lamp in the central lockingbutton (Y page 71) goes out.i Cargo Van and Passenger Van only:Unless you open a door within 40 secondsafter unlocking the vehicle:Rthe vehicle will be locked againRthe anti-theft alarm systemwill be armedagain

If the alarm system is armed, a visual andaudible alarm is triggered by the following:RUnlocking the vehicle from insideROpening a doorROpening the hood

i The alarm is not switched off, even if youimmediately close the open door that hastriggered it, for example.

X To stop the alarm: press the% buttonon the remote control.

orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.The alarm stops.

Theft deterrent locking system 61

Safety

Z

Tow-away alarm

OperationA visual and audible alarm is triggered if theinclination of the vehicle changes when thetow-away alarm is armed. This can be thecase if the vehicle is raised on one side, forexample.

Arming/disarmingThe tow-away alarm is automatically armedapproximately 20 seconds after you lock thevehicle.The tow-away alarm is automatically deacti-vated when you unlock the vehicle.

Disarming

X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Press button:.When the button is released, indicatorlamp; in the button lights up for about5 seconds.

X Lock the vehicle.The tow-away alarm is disarmed.

The tow-away alarm remains disarmed untilyou lock the vehicle again.Disarm the tow-away alarm when lockingyour vehicle and:Rloading and/or transporting the vehicle, ona ferry or car transporter, for exampleRparking on a moving surface, as split-levelgarage

This will prevent false alarms.

Interior motion sensor

OperationIf the armed interior motion sensor detectsmotion in the vehicle interior, a visual andacoustic alarm is triggered. This can happen ifsomeone reaches into the vehicle interior, forexample.

Switching onX Close the side windows.X Make sure that nothing (such asmascots orcoat hangers) are hanging on the rear-viewmirror or on the grab handles on the head-liner.This will prevent false alarms.

X Lock the vehicle.The interior motion sensor is armed afterapproximately 40 seconds.

Switching offX Unlock vehicle.The interior motion sensor automaticallyswitches off.

Deactivating

X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Press button:.When the button is released, indicatorlamp; of the button lights up for about5 seconds.

X Lock the vehicle.The interior motion sensor is deactivated.

62 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety

The interior motion sensor remains deactiva-ted until you lock the vehicle again.Deactivate the interior motion sensor whenlocking your vehicle:Rwith people or animals remaining insideRwith the side windows remaining openRwhen transporting it on a ferry or car trans-porter, for example

This will prevent false alarms.

Theft deterrent locking system 63

Safety

Z

64

Useful information .............................. 66Key ........................................................ 66Central locking .................................... 71Driver's door and co-driver's door ..... 72Sliding door ......................................... 72Electrical step ...................................... 73Rear doors ........................................... 75Partition sliding door .......................... 77Side windows ...................................... 78

65

Openingandclosing

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all modelsaswell as standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to systems and functionsrelevant to safety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 25).

Key

Important safety notes

G WARNINGActivate the child-proof door locks if childrenare traveling in the vehicle. The children couldotherwise open the doors while the vehicle isin motion, injuring themselves and others.

G WARNINGDo not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system. Children could otherwiseinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle.They could be severely or even fatally injuredby prolonged exposure to intense heat orcold.If children open a door, they could:Rinjure other peopleRget out of the vehicle and thereby injurethemselves or be injured by a passing vehi-cleRseverely injure themselves by falling down,in particular due to the vehicle height

Always take the keywith youwhen leaving thevehicle, even if you are only leaving for a shorttime.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-

tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Do not keep the key with remote control:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another key with remote controlRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoilRin metallic objects, e.g. metal casesThis can affect the key's functionality.

Key functions of the remote control

General notesThe vehicle is equipped with either 2 or4 remote controls with a folding key, or 4mechanical keys. In this Operator's Manual,both the mechanical keys and the keys withremote control are referred to as keys. Theremote control key has a range of up to 32 ft(10m). Use the remote control of the key onlywhen in immediate proximity of the vehicle.This prevents theft.Remote controls that are not included in thescope of delivery for the vehicle must be pro-grammed before use. Further information canbe obtained at any authorized SprinterDealer.The key's remote control locks/unlocks thedriver's door and/or the following centrally ifthe factory settings have not been changed:Rthe driver's and the co-driver's doorRthe sliding doorsRthe rear doors

i If the driver's or co-driver's door is notclosed, the corresponding door is notlocked. If a sliding door or a rear door is notclosed properly, none of the rear doors arelocked.

66 KeyOp

eningandclosing

If there is a key is in the ignition lock, theremote control is inoperative. When lockingor unlocking the vehicle with the remote con-trol, always pay attention to the indicatorlamp signaling. Also check the locking knobsof the doors.

Unlocking/locking the vehicle with theremote control

Remote control with an integrated folding key: 5 To unlock the sliding doors and the

rear door; % To unlock the driver's door only or

unlock the vehicle centrally= & To lock the vehicle centrally? Key release buttonA Battery check lampX To unlock the driver's door: press the% button.The turn signals flash once. The theft deter-rent locking system is deactivated.

X To unlock the sliding doors and the reardoor: press the5 button.The turn signals flash once.

X To unlock centrally: unlock the driver'sdoor.

X Press the% button again within 2 sec-onds.The turn signals flash once.i If the surround lighting has been switchedon using the on-board computer(Y page 193), it goes on when the vehicle isunlocked.

If you do not open a Cargo Van orPassenger Van within approximately40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe theft deterrent locking system isarmed again.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.The indicator lamps flash three times whenthe theft deterrent locking systemhas beenarmed and all doors have been closed.

X Check the locking knobs on all the doors.The locking knobs must all be in the low-ered position.

Unlocking/locking the vehicle with themechanical key or the folding keyThe anti-theft alarm system (ATA) is triggeredif you unlock and open the driver's door or therear door with the mechanical key or the fold-ing key.The alarm can be disabled in the following twoways:X Press the% or& button on theremote control.

OrX Insert the key into the ignition lock.

Key 67

Openingandclosing

Z

Driver's door

Rear door1 Locked2 UnlockedX To unlock the driver's or rear door: pressthe key release button on the remote con-trol.The key folds out.

X Insert the key fully into the door lock andturn it to position2.The door is unlocked.

X To lock the vehicle: lock all doors exceptthe driver's door and, if necessary the reardoor, from inside. To do this, press downthe door locking buttons.

X Press the key release button on the remotecontrol.The key folds out.

X Insert the key fully into the driver's doorlock and turn it to position1.The driver's door is locked.

Remote control battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The key batteries contain perchlorate mate-rial, which may require special handling andregard for the environment. Check with yourlocal government’s disposal guidelines. Cali-fornia residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.We recommend that you have batterieschanged at a qualified specialist workshop.

Checking the batteriesX Press the% or& button for longerthan two seconds.If battery indicator lamp (Y page 66) lightsup briefly, the batteries in the remote con-

68 KeyOp

eningandclosing

trol still have sufficient charge. Otherwise,change the batteries immediately.i If the remote control is checkedwithin thesignal reception range of the vehicle, press-ing the& or% button:Rlock orRunlock the vehicle

Changing batteriesYou need a CR 2025 2 3 V cell battery, whichcan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.When changing the batteries, do not pressany of the buttons on the remote control.

X Press release button;.The key folds out.

X Remove battery compartment cover: inthe direction of the arrow.

X Remove the batteries from the battery tray.X Insert the new batteries into the batterytray with the positive pole facing upwards.Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

X Align battery compartment cover: andpush it on until it audibly engages.

X Check the function of all the remote controlbuttons on the vehicle.

Key 69

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the key/remote control

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

It is no longer possibleto lock the vehicleusing the remote con-trol.The turn signals do notflash when the vehicleis locked.

The doors are not closed properly.X Close the doors properly and lock the vehicle again.

The central locking system has malfunctioned.X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 66).X Have the central locking system checked as soon as possible ata qualified specialist workshop.

It is no longer possibleto lock or unlock thevehicle using theremote control.

The key battery is weak or discharged.X Point the remote control at the driver's door handle from veryclose range and press the% or& button.

If this does not work:X Replace the key battery (Y page 69).orX Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 66).

The remote control is faulty.X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 66).X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The key cannot beturned in the ignitionlock.

The steering lock has jammed mechanically.X Remove the key and insert it again into the ignition lock. Turn thesteering wheel from side to side while doing so.

The engine cannot bestarted using the key.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off all non-essential consumers, such as interior lighting,and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 263).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 276).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the mechanical locks replaced.

70 KeyOp

eningandclosing

Central locking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGActivate the child-proof door locks if childrenare traveling in the vehicle. The children couldotherwise open the doors while the vehicle isin motion, injuring themselves and others.

G WARNINGDo not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system. Children could otherwiseinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle.They could be severely or even fatally injuredby prolonged exposure to intense heat orcold.If children open a door, they could:Rinjure other peopleRget out of the vehicle and thereby injurethemselves or be injured by a passing vehi-cleRseverely injure themselves by falling down,in particular due to the vehicle height

Always take the keywith youwhen leaving thevehicle, even if you are only leaving for a shorttime.

You can open a locked front door from theinside at any time. You can open a lockedsliding door or rear door from the inside if ithas been previously unlocked from inside.

Locking and unlocking manually

Central locking buttons

Use the central locking buttons to centrallylock/unlock either the entire vehicle or justthe sliding doors and rear doors from theinside.X To lock/unlock the entire vehicle: pressthe upperà central locking buttonwhen the doors are closed.When the entire vehicle is locked, the indi-cator lamp in theà central locking but-ton lights up.i If the key has been removed or is in posi-tion 0 in the ignition lock, the indicatorlamp in theà central locking buttonremains lit for 5 seconds.

X To lock/unlock the sliding doors andrear doors: press the lower section of theÄ central locking button when thedoors are closed.When the sliding doors and rear doors arelocked, the indicator lamp in the upperà central locking button lights up.

Automatic locking

General notesThe vehicle locks automatically as standardonce a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) has beenreached. Depending on the vehicle's equip-ment, the doors may be locked automaticallyonce the ignition is switched on. Informationon the functions of the automatic locking

Central locking 71

Openingandclosing

Z

mechanism of your vehicle can be obtainedfrom any authorized Sprinter Dealer.If the automatic locking when driving functionis activated, there is a risk of being locked outwhen the vehicle is pushed or towed.For this reason, deactivate the automaticlocking when driving function:Rbefore pushing the vehicleRbefore towing the vehicleIf activated, automatic locking is deactivatedwhen the vehicle is unlocked or locked usingthe central locking button.Automatic locking is reactivated after theignition is switched off or a door is openedwith the vehicle stationary.

Activating automatic lockingwhen driv-ingX Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock when the doors are closed.

X For the entire vehicle: press the upperà central locking button until the indi-cator lamp in the button flashes four times.

X For the sliding doors and rear doorsonly: press theÄ lower central lockingbutton until the indicator lamp in theÃupper button flashes four times.

Deactivating automatic locking whendrivingX Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock when the doors are closed.

X For the entire vehicle: press theÃupper central locking button until the indi-cator lamp in the button flashes twice.

X For the sliding doors and rear doorsonly: press theÄ lower central lockingbutton until the indicator lamp in theÃupper button flashes twice.

Driver's door and co-driver's door

! Only open the doors when road and trafficconditions permit. Make sure that there issufficient clearance when opening thedoors. Otherwise, you could damage yourvehicle or other vehicles.

You can open the driver's or co-driver's doorfrom the inside at any time, even if it is locked.X Pull door handle:.Locking knob; pops up.The door opens.

Sliding door

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the open sliding door is not engaged, it couldmove on its own if the vehicle is on a slope.This could trap you or other persons. There isa risk of injury.Alwaysmake sure that the open sliding door isengaged.

! Only open the doors when road and trafficconditions permit. Make sure that there issufficient clearance when opening thedoors. Otherwise, you could damage yourvehicle or other vehicles.

The sliding door of your vehicle can be equip-ped with an electrical access step. Observethe notes on the electrical step when openingand closing the sliding door (Y page 73).

72 Sliding doorOp

eningandclosing

Opening/closing from the outside

The sliding door is equipped with an activeretainer, which engages the door at the endstop when opened.i You can also lock the sliding door in placearound halfwaywhen opening/closing. Thedoor does not have to be opened fully whengetting into or out of the vehicle. The inter-mediate detent does not fully engage thesliding door.

X To open: pull door handle:.The sliding door opens.

X Push back the sliding door using door han-dle: until it engages.

X Check the sliding door detent.X To close: slide the sliding door firmly for-wards by handle: until it closes.

Opening/closing from the inside

Interior door handle on the sliding door

The sliding door is equipped with an activeretainer, which engages the door at the endstop when opened.You can only open a sliding door from theinside if the child-proof locks have not beenactivated.i You can also lock the sliding door in placearound halfwaywhen opening/closing. Thedoor does not have to be opened fully whengetting into or out of the vehicle. The inter-mediate detent does not fully engage thesliding door.

X To unlock: pull locking knob= upwards.Only this sliding door unlocks. The otherdoors remain locked.

X To open: press button:.X Slide the sliding door by handle; back tothe stop.

X Check the sliding door detent.The sliding door must be engaged.

X To close: slide the sliding door firmly for-wards by handle; until it engages.

X To lock: press locking knob= down.Only the sliding door is locked. All otherdoors that were previously unlockedremain unlocked.

Electrical closing assistIf your vehicle is equippedwith electrical clos-ing assist, you will require less force to closethe sliding door.

Electrical step

Important safety notesIf you do not use the grab handle and the step,you could injure yourself when getting in andout of the vehicle.

Electrical step 73

Openingandclosing

Z

In order to reduce risks:Rdraw the passengers' attention to the elec-trical step. Wait until the electrical step isfully extended.Rdo not jump out of the vehicle.Ronly use the grab handle and step. Onlythey are designed for such a load.Rkeep grab handles, access steps and entrysills free from dirt, e.g. mud, clay, snow andice.

Operation and obstacle detection

Electrical step

The sliding door of your vehicle can be equip-ped with an electrical step.X When getting in and out of the vehicle, usethe grab handles and electrical step:.

Electrical step: automatically extendswhen the sliding door is opened and retractswhen it is closed.Electrical step: is equipped with anobstruction detection device on the frontside. If the step comes into contact with anobstacle while it is extending, it stops.After you have removed the obstacle, youmust first close the sliding door and open itonce again so that the step can extend com-pletely.

i If the electrical step obstructs loading,you can prevent the step from extendingwhen opening the sliding door via obstacledetection. The electrical step can thenremain retracted and a forklift or other lift-

ing equipment can be moved nearer to thecargo compartment.

Vehicles without steering-wheel buttons:if the1 indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up and a warning tone sounds,electrical step: is malfunctioning(Y page 227).Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: ifthe Electrical StepElectrical Step message is shown inthe display and a warning tone sounds, elec-trical step: is malfunctioning (Y page 216).If electrical step: is malfunctioning, thestepmay only partially extend/retract or maynot extend/retract at all. If a malfunctiondoes occur, you will have to retract and lockelectrical step:manually before continuingthe journey (Y page 74).Before passengers get out of the vehicle, letthem know that electrical step: might notbe extended.

Emergency release! Driving with the step extended may resultin it being damaged.If the electrical step does not retract auto-matically, you will have to push it in andlock it into place manually before continu-ing your journey.

X Pull R-clips; on both rods: on theunderside of the step out of their respectivepins.

X Remove washers= and detach bothrods:.

74 Electrical stepOp

eningandclosing

X Fold rods: into the housing in the step.X Push the step into its housing.

i When securing the step for the first time,you must pierce a film with the R-clips.

X Insert R-clips; into the step as far as theywill go through the holes on both sides ofthe housing.The step is secured in its housing.

Rear doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you open a rear door, you could:Rendanger other people or road usersRbe caught by oncoming trafficThis is particularly the case if you open therear door more than 90°. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Only open the rear doors when traffic condi-tions permit. Always make sure that the reardoors are properly locked.

G WARNINGIf you open the rear doors to 90° (detent posi-tion), the rear lamps are no longer visible.The vehicle is no longer sufficiently visiblefrom the rear andwill only be recognized as anobstacle at a late stage by other road users.This could lead to an accident.Therefore, in such a situation, ensure that thevehicle is visible from the rear according tothe respective national regulations, e.g. with awarning triangle.

! Make sure that there is sufficient clear-ance when opening the rear doors. Youcould otherwise damage the vehicle andobjects in close range of the rear doors.

You can lock the rear doors at an angle of 90°,180° and 270°. Always make sure that theopen rear door is correctly engaged in thedetent.

Opening/closing from the outside

Opening the right-hand rear door

X Pull handle:.X Swing the rear door to the side until itengages.

Rear doors 75

Openingandclosing

Z

Opening the left-hand rear door

X Make sure that the right-hand rear door isopen and engaged.

X Pull release handle: in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Swing the rear door to the side until itengages.

Opening the rear doors to an angle of180° or 270°

Door retainer (example: right rear door)X Open the rear door to about 45°.X Pull and hold door retainer: in the direc-tion of the arrow.

X Open the rear door more than 90°, so thatthe door retainer cannot engage.

X Release the door retainer and open thedoor to an angle of 180° or 270°.

Magnetic door retainerX With the rear door opened to an angle of270°, push it against magnetic doorretainer; on the side wall.When the magnet on the rear door is incontactwithmagnetic door retainer;, therear door is held in this position.i Vehicles with 270° pivoting rear doors:If door retainer:malfunctions while load-ing, you can swivel it 180° against thespring force and onto the door and engageit. The door retainer remains in this positionand will not swivel back to its original posi-tion.Before closing the door, release doorretainer: from the detent and return it toits original position.

Closing the rear doors from the outsideX Pull the rear door away frommagnetic doorretainer.

X Close the left-hand rear door firmly fromthe outside.

X Close the right-hand rear door firmly fromthe outside.

76 Rear doorsOp

eningandclosing

Opening/closing from the inside

Release the lever on the inside of the right reardoor.

A white section on latch; indicates that therear door is unlocked.i You can only open the locked rear doorsfrom the inside if the child-proof locks havenot been activated.

X To unlock: slide latch; to the left.You will see a white marking.Only the rear door unlocks. All other doorsthat were previously locked remain locked.

X To open: pull opening lever: and openthe unlocked rear door.

X Swing the rear door to the side until itengages.

X To close:make sure that the left-hand reardoor is closed.

X Pull the rear door firmly by the door handleto close it.

X To lock: slide latch; to the right.The white section is no longer visible.Only the rear door is locked. All other doorsthat were previously unlocked remainunlocked.

Partition sliding door

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the open partition sliding door is notengaged, it could move automatically while

the vehicle is in motion. This could trap you orother persons. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Close the partition sliding door before everyjourney and make sure that it is engaged.

Opening/closing the partition slidingdoor from the cab

X To open: turn the key counter-clockwise=.The sliding door is unlocked.

X Slide the sliding door to the stop in thedirection of arrow;.

X To close: slide the sliding door in the direc-tion of arrow: until it engages.The sliding door can be locked using thekey.

Opening/closing the partition slidingdoor from the cargo compartment

Partition sliding door 77

Openingandclosing

Z

X To unlock: press the catch in the directionof arrow=.The sliding door is unlocked.

X Slide the sliding door to the stop in thedirection of arrow:.

X To close: slide the sliding door in the direc-tion of arrow; until it engages.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

G WARNINGDo not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system. Children could otherwise

injure themselves on parts of the vehicle.They could be severely or even fatally injuredby prolonged exposure to intense heat orcold.If children open a door, they could:Rinjure other peopleRget out of the vehicle and thereby injurethemselves or be injured by a passing vehi-cleRseverely injure themselves by falling down,in particular due to the vehicle height

Always take the keywith youwhen leaving thevehicle, even if you are only leaving for a shorttime.

Opening/closing the side window

Control panel (example: driver's door): Power window, left; Power window, rightX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press or pull button: or; until the cor-responding side window has reached thedesired position.

If you press the switch beyond the pressurepoint and then release it, the window opensautomatically. To stop the movement, pressor pull the switch again.

78 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Resetting the side windowsYou must reset the side windows if there hasbeen a malfunction or an interruption in thevoltage supply.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Pull the two power window switches andhold for approximately 1 second after clos-ing the side window.

Problems with the side windowsIf you cannot completely open or close a sidewindow:If there are no objects or leaves in the windowguide that prevent the sliding sunroof fromclosing, there has been a malfunction or theon-board voltage has been interrupted.X Reset the side window (Y page 79).

Side windows 79

Openingandclosing

Z

80

Useful information .............................. 82Seats .................................................... 82Steering wheel .................................... 88Mirrors ................................................. 89

81

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all modelsaswell as standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to systems and functionsrelevant to safety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 25).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the driver's seat is not engaged, it couldmove unexpectedly while the vehicle is inmotion. This could cause you to lose control ofthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Always make sure that the driver's seat isengaged before starting the engine.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Your seat must be adjusted in such a way thatyou can wear the seat belt correctly.Observe the following points:RPosition the backrest in an almost verticalposition so that you are sitting virtuallyupright. Do not drive with the backrestreclined too far back.RYour arms should be slightly bent when youare holding the steering wheel.RAvoid seat positions that prevent the seatbelt from being routed correctly. The shoul-der section of the belt must be routed overthe middle of your shoulder and be pulledtight against your upper body. The lap beltmust always pass across your lap as lowdown as possible, i.e. over your hip joints.

82 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

RAdjust the head restraint so that it supportsthe back of the head at eye level.RThe distance from the pedals should besuch that you can depress them fully.

Observe also the safety notes in the sectionon "Air bags" (Y page 47) and "Children in thevehicle" (Y page 51).If you swap over the head restraints for thefront and rear seats, you will not be able toadjust the height and angle of the headrestraints to the correct position.Use the head restraint pad to adjust the headrestraint so that it is as close as possible tothe back of your head.Before the journey, make sure the headrestraints have been correctly set for each ofthe vehicle's passengers (Y page 86).

Driver's and co-driver's seat

: Seat fore-and-aft adjustment; Lumbar support adjustment= Seat backrest adjustment? Seat height adjustmentA Seat cushion angle adjustmentB Seat suspension adjustmentC Seat suspension lock

i Depending on the seat model, someadjustments may not be available.

You can find information on rotating thefront seats under "Swiveling front seats"(Y page 84).

X To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:pull lever: up.

X Slide the seat forwards or back.X Release lever:.X Slide the seat forwards or back until youhear it engage.

X To adjust the backrest: turn handwheel= towards the front.The seat backrest moves to a vertical posi-tion.

X Turn handwheel= towards the rear.The seat backrest tilts towards the rear.

X To adjust the seat height: press or pulllever? repeatedly until you have reachedthe desired seat height.

X To adjust the seat angle: turn handwheelA towards the front.The front of the seat cushion is lowered.

X Turn handwheelA towards the rear.The front of the seat cushion is raised.i The lumbar support allows you to use thebackrest to increase the support providedto the lumbar spine.When the lumbar support is correctlyadjusted, it reduces strain on your backwhile driving.

X To adjust the lumbar support: turn hand-wheel; upwards.This increases the support provided to thelumbar region.

X Turn handwheel; downwards.This reduces the support provided to thelumbar region.

Seats 83

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

The seat suspension must be adapted to yourbody weight. Adjust the seat suspension onlywhile the seat is unoccupied.X To adjust the seat suspension: take yourweight off the seat.

X Using handwheelB, set your body weight(40 to 120 kg) for optimum seat suspen-sion.The seat suspensionwill becomemore rigidthe higher you set the weight. It will thennot move as far.

If the seat moves up and down frequently andto a great extent, you can lock the seat in thelower range.X To engage the seat suspension lock:turn leverC upwards.When it next moves, the seat will lock inposition.

X To release the seat suspension lock:turn leverC to the right.The seat can nowmove up and down again.

Swiveling front seats

G WARNINGIf the driver's and co-driver's seats are notengaged facing the direction of travel whiledriving, the restraint systems may not be ableto provide the intended protection. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Engage the driver's and co-driver's seats sothey are facing the direction of travel beforestarting the engine.

! When rotating the seats, make sure thatthere is sufficient space to do so.Move the seat forward or back first. Thiswill help to avoid contact with other parts ofthe interior.Push the handbrake lever down to the stop.The parking brake or handbrake lever couldotherwise be damaged.

Seat release (example: co-driver's seat)

The driver's seat and co-driver's seat can berotated by 50° and 180°.The seats engage when facing in the directionof travel aswell aswhen facing in the oppositedirection and also engage at an angle of 50°to the door.X Make sure that the parking brake has beenengaged and that the handbrake lever hasbeen pushed down to the stop(Y page 150).

X Adjust the steering wheel to provide thenecessary space to rotate and adjust thedriver's seat (Y page 88).

X Before rotating, push the co-driver's seatforwards (Y page 83).

X 2 To rotate the seat: push lever: on therear of the seat towards the center of thevehicle and rotate the seat slightly inwards.The rotation device is released.

X Release lever:.X Turn the seat about 50° towards the out-side or inside to the desired position.

84 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Twin co-driver's seat

X To fold a seat cushion forwards: lift theseat cushion out of front anchorage:.

X Pull the seat cushion forwards slightly andout of rear anchorage;.

X Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion up.i You can stow various articles in the spaceunder the twin co-driver's seat.

X To fold the seat cushion back: fold downthe seat cushion by the rear edge.

X Slide the seat cushion under the seat back-rest into rear anchorage;.

X Push down on the seat cushion at the frontuntil it engages in front anchorage:.

Folding seat

G WARNINGIf the key is inserted in the partition slidingdoor, it may come into contact with the per-son on the folding seat. There is a risk ofinjury.Always remove the key from the partition slid-ing door before a person sits on the foldingseat.

Folding seat (example with partition sliding door)X Remove key: from the partition slidingdoor.

X Pull grip; of the catch in the direction ofthe arrow and fold seat cushion= up ordown.

X Release grip; of seat cushion= in thecorresponding end position.

X Move the seat cushion= until it engages.Grip; of the catch must lie completely onthe seat frame.

Rear bench seat (Passenger Van)

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat is not installed as descri-bed or an unsuitable rear bench seat is instal-led, the seat belts may not provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Install the rear bench seat as described. Onlyuse rear bench seats that are approved foryour vehicle by the distributor named on theinside cover page.

! For safety reasons, the four-seat rearbench must only be removed or installed ata qualified specialist workshop.

Keep the seat bench mounting recesses inthe vehicle floor free from dirt and foreignobjects.

Seats 85

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Locking mechanism lever on the feet of the benchseatX To remove the rear bench seat: swing alllevers: of the bench seat completelyupwards.The bench seat moves back into the seatmounting recesses on the vehicle floor.

X Lift the bench seat upwards out of the seatmounting recesses.

i Do not exceed the maximum permissiblenumber of seats for models registered aspassenger vehicles.

X To install the rear bench seat: observethe prescribed installation position of thebench seat.Install the two-seat bench seat only on thedriver's side.

X Check mounting shells; on the vehiclefloor.

X Position the bench seat in the direction oftravel in correspondingmounting shells;.

X Slide the bench seat forwards until youhear the locking mechanisms engage.

X Check levers: on the anchorages of thebench seat.All levers: must be flush to the vehiclefloor.

Head restraints

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Donot change over the head restraints for thefront and rear seats. Otherwise, it will not bepossible to correctly adjust the height andangle of the head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeas possible to your head.

Head restraint (example: luxury head restraint onthe co-driver's seat): Release button; Head restraint height= Head restraint angle (luxury head

restraints only)

86 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release button: and slidethe head restraint down to the desired posi-tion.

X To adjust the angle: hold the front part ofthe luxury head restraint by the lower edgeand tilt it to the desired position.

X To remove: pull the head restraint up tothe stop.

X Press release button: and pull out thehead restraint.

X To insert: insert the head restraint so thatthe rod with the detents is on the left whenviewed in the direction of travel.

X Press and hold release button:.X Push the head restraint down until itengages.

Armrests

X To set the armrest angle: fold the armrestupwards by more than 45°;.The armrest is released.

X Fold armrest= forwards to the stop.X Slowly fold the armrest upwards to thedesired position.

X To fold the armrest up: if necessary, foldthe armrest upwards: by more than 90°.

Seat heating

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

! When you leave your seat, do not placeanything on the seat and switch off the seatheating. Do not switch the seat heating onwhen the seat is not occupied, e.g. whendriving without a co-driver. The seat heat-ing may otherwise overheat, causing dam-age to the seat.

The three red indicator lamps in thecbutton show the activated heating level 1 to3.The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyfive minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximatelyten minutes.At level 1, the seat heating remains in con-tinuous operation.

Seats 87

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press thec buttonrepeatedly until the desired heating levelhas been set.

X To switch off: press thec buttonrepeatedly until all indicator lamps go out.

If the indicator lamps of the current heatinglevel in thec button flash, the seat heat-ing has switched off automatically. In thiscase, too many electrical consumers areswitched on or the battery charge is not suf-ficient. The seat heating will automaticallyswitch back to the current heating level whenenough on-board voltage is available again.

Steering wheel

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The steering wheel can still be adjusted if thekey has been removed.

: Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment; Steering column height= LeverX To set the steering wheel: swing lever=down until it engages.The steering wheel is unlocked.

X Move the steering wheel to the desiredposition.

X Pull lever= up to the stop.The steering wheel is locked again.

88 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: push anti-glare lever:in the direction of the arrow.

Exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe additional mirrors in the exterior mirrorsreduce the size of the image. Objects visible inthe mirrors are closer than they appear. Youcould misjudge the distance from road usersdriving behind you when changing lanes, forinstance. There is a risk of an accident.You should therefore always determine theactual distance from road users drivingbehind you, e.g.:Rby looking over your shoulderRby looking in the main mirror in the exteriormirror.

Adjusting manuallyX Before starting off, manually adjust theexterior mirrors in such a way that you canget a good overview of road and traffic con-ditions.

Adjusting electrically

Adjustment buttons and switches for setting themirrorsX Before pulling away, turn the key to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 138).

X Press switch; to position 1 for the left-hand exterior mirror or to position 2 for theright-hand exterior mirror.

X Press adjustment button: at the top, bot-tom, right or left.Adjust the exterior mirrors in such a waythat you can get a good overview of roadand traffic conditions.

i The exterior mirrors are automaticallyheated at low outside temperatures.

Mirrors 89

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

90

Useful information .............................. 92Exterior lighting .................................. 92Interior lighting ................................... 97Changing bulbs .................................... 99Windshield wipers ............................ 107

91

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all modelsaswell as standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to systems and functionsrelevant to safety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 25).

Exterior lighting

Important safety notesFor reasons of safety, we recommend thatyou drive with the lights switched on evenduring the daytime. There may be differencesin operation due to legal requirements andvoluntary recommendations in some coun-tries.

Bulb failure indicatorThe bulb failure indicator is only an aid. Youare responsible for the proper functioning ofthe vehicle lighting. Insufficient or non-func-tioning vehicle lighting puts the operatingsafety of the vehicle at risk.For this reason, check the condition and func-tion of your vehicle's lighting system and, ifnecessary, that of the trailer before each jour-ney.The bulb failure indicator monitors all of theexterior lighting lamps, except the perimeterlamp and the trailer lighting. If a bulb fails,either the b(Y page 35) indicator lamplights up, or you will see a correspondingmessage in the display (Y page 208).

i Depending on the equipment, the bulbfailure indicator can fail for all lamps withthe exception of the turn signal lamps.

Light switch

Operation

1Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime running lamps

2$ Lights off3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument lighting4 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps5 N Fog lamps6 R Rear fog lampIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to$ orÃ.orX If the rear fog lamp is switched on: pressthe light switch in to the stop.

The turn signals, high-beam headlamps andthe high-beam flasher are operated using thecombination switch (Y page 94).

Low-beam headlampsX To switch on: turn the key to position 2 inthe ignition lock or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to position L.The L indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

Daytime running lampsYou can activate/deactivate the daytime run-ning lamps function using the on-board com-puter.

92 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

This is not possible in countries where day-time running lamps are a legal requirement.The daytime running lamps function must beactivated using the on-board computer:Rvehicles with steering wheel buttons(Y page 192)Rvehicles without steering wheel buttons(Y page 183)

X To switch on: turn the light switch to the$ position.The low-beam headlamps, parking lampsand license plate lamp are switched onwhen the engine is running. The L indi-cator lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup.i USA only:If you turn the light switch to the T orL position, the parking lamps or low-beam headlamps switch on. If you turn thelight switch to theà position, the day-time running lamps remain switched on.

i Canada only:If you turn the light switch to the Lposition, the low-beam headlamps areswitched on. If you turn the light switch tothe T orà position, the daytimerunning lamps remain switched on.

Automatic headlamp mode

G WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Automatic headlamp mode is only a drivingaid. You are responsible for the vehicle light-ing at all times.Depending on ambient light, the rain and lightsensor automatically switches on the parking

lamps, low-beam headlamps and the licenseplate lamp. This excludes weather-relatedimpairments to visibility, such as snow, fog orspray.If there is fog, snow or spray, turn the lightswitch quickly fromà to L. You couldotherwise briefly interrupt operation of theheadlamps.X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: theparking lamps switch on or off automati-cally depending on the ambient light.When the engine is running: if you activatethe "daytime running lamps" function usingthe on-board computer, the daytime run-ning lamps are switched on. The parkinglamps and low-beam headlamps alsoswitch on or off automatically, dependingon the ambient light.When the low-beam headlamps areswitched on, the L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Fog lamps/rear fog lamp

G WARNINGIf you suspect that driving conditions will befoggy, turn the light switch toL before youstart your journey. Your vehicle may other-wise not be visible and you could endangeryourself and others.

G WARNINGIn low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,only switch from positionà to L withthe vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.Switching fromà to L will brieflyswitch off the headlamps. Doing so while driv-ing in low ambient lighting conditions mayresult in an accident.

X Turn the ignition key to position 2 in theignition lock or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or T.

Exterior lighting 93

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

i If your vehicle is only equipped with onerear fog lamp, you must turn the lightswitch to L.

i When the light switch is set toÃ, youcannot switch on the front or rear foglamps.

X To switch on the front fog lamps: pull thelight switch out to the first locking point.The green N indicator lamp on the lightswitch lights up.

X To switch on the rear fog lamp: pull thelight switch out to the second locking point.The yellow R indicator lamp on the lightswitch lights up.

X To switch off the front fog lamps/rearfog lamp: push in the light switch to thestop.The R and N indicator lamp on thelight switch go out.

Combination switch

Turn signal lamps

: To indicate a right turn; To indicate a left turn

X To indicate: press the combination switchin desired direction: or; until itengages.The combination switch automaticallyreturns to its original position after largesteering movements.

X To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly in desired direction: or;.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

High-beam headlamps and high-beamflasher

: High-beam headlamps; High-beam flasherX To switch on the high-beam headlamps:switch on the low-beam headlamps(Y page 92).

X Press combination switch: forwards.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.i In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is darkand the engine is running.

X To switch off the high-beamheadlamps:move the combination switch back to itsnormal position.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

X To switch on the high-beam flasher: turnthe key to position 1 or 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Pull the combination switch briefly in direc-tion of arrow;.

94 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Cornering lampsThe cornering lamps improve the illuminationof the road over a wide angle in the directionyou are turning, enabling better visibility intight bends, for example.The cornering light function switches onautomatically, if:Ryou are traveling at a speed of less than25mph (40 km/h) and you switch on a turnsignal or turn the steering wheel.Ryou are traveling at a speed between25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel.

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than 3 minutes.

i If reverse gear is engaged the lamp on theopposite side of the vehicle switches oninstead.

Hazard warning lamps

G WARNINGThe rear exterior light will be covered if you:Ropen the rear doors by 90°Ropen the rear dropside.The vehicle will then be difficult for other roadusers to see or will not be seen by them at all,particularly if it is dark or visibility is poor.There is a risk of an accident.You should therefore ensure in this and simi-lar situations that the vehicle is visible fromthe rear in accordance with the relevantnational regulations, by using the warning tri-angle, for instance.

Hazard warning lamp switchX To switch on/off: press the £ hazardwarning lamp switch.

If you have indicated a turn while the hazardwarning lamps are switched on, only the turnsignal lamps on the side of the vehicle selec-ted will light up.The hazard warning lamps switch on auto-matically if:Ran air bag is deployed.Ryou brake sharply and bring the vehicle to ahalt from a speed of more than 45 mph(70 km/h).

If the hazard warning lamps have beenswitched on automatically, press the £hazard warning lamp switch to switch themoff.

i The hazard warning lamps work evenwhen the ignition is switched off.

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automaticallywith a high-pressure water jet if the "Wipewith washer fluid" function is activated(Y page 107) while the low-beam headlampsare on and the engine is running.You can find information on refilling washerfluid in the "Maintenance and care" section(Y page 255).

Exterior lighting 95

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Highbeam Assist

General notesYou can use this function to set the head-lamps to change between low beam and highbeam automatically. The system recognizesvehicles with their lights on, either approach-ing from the opposite direction or traveling infront of your vehicle, and consequentlyswitches the headlamps from high beam tolow beam.Once the system no longer detects any othervehicles, it reactivates the high-beam head-lamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGHighbeam Assist does not recognize roadusers:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, HighbeamAssistmay fail torecognize other road users who have lights, ormay recognize them too late. In this or similarsituations, the automatic high-beam head-lamps will not be deactivated or will be acti-vated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Highbeam Assist cannot take into accountroad, weather or traffic conditions. HighbeamAssist is only an aid. You are responsible foradjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevail-ing light, visibility and traffic conditions.

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe restricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-ing the sensors

Activating/deactivating HighbeamAssistX To activate: switch on the HighbeamAssist function using the on-board com-puter (Y page 192).

X Turn the light switch to theà position.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:(Y page 94).Highbeam Assist is active.

The _ or indicator lamp in themultifunction display lights up when it isdark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 22 mph (35 km/h) and no otherroad users have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h), other roadusers are recognized or the roads are ade-quately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _

or indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display remains lit.

X To deactivate: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position or movethe light switch to another position.

The _ or indicator lamp in themultifunction display goes out.

96 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Headlamps fogged up on the insideThe headlamps may fog up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.

X Switch on the low-beam headlamps anddrive off.The level of moisture diminishes, depend-ing on the length of the journey and theweather conditions (humidity and temper-ature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Interior lighting

Switching the dashboard lighting on/off

Overview

Standard interior light1 Interior light switched on2 Interior light switched off3 Automatic control system switched on

Interior lights in the overhead control panel: Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off; Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/

off= Right-hand reading lamp? Interior lightA Switches the automatic control system

on/offB Switches the interior light on/offC Left-hand reading lampIf you manually switch on the interior lightingor reading lamps on the overhead controlpanel, they switch off automatically after20 minutes.

Automatic controlThe interior light comes on if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen the driver's or the co-driver's doorRremove the key from the ignition lockThe interior light switches off again automat-ically.If a door is left open, the interior lightingswitches off after approximately 20 minutes.

Interior lighting 97

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Switching the rear compartmentlighting on/off centrally (PassengerVan)

Rear compartment lighting switch: To switch on the rear compartment light-

ing; Automatic control= To switch off the rear compartment light-

ingYou can switch the rear compartment lightingon/off centrally on Passenger Vans that areequipped with convenience control.There may also be a switch on the rear com-partment lights that allows you to switchthem on/off separately. If you switch off rearcompartment lighting=, the rear compart-ment light is switched off, regardless of theposition of its own switch.If you move the rear compartment lightingswitch to center position;, the automaticcontrol system is switched on. When youopen a door or unlock the vehicle, the rearcompartment lighting then goes on automat-ically. Once the doors are closed, it switchesoff automatically after 20 minutes.

Switching the rear/cargo compart-ment lamp on/off

Interior light with switch (example: Cargo Van)1 Automatic control2 To switch off the interior lighting3 To switch on the interior lighting

Interior light with switch (example: Passenger Vanwith rear-compartment air conditioning)1 To switch on the interior lighting2 To switch off the interior lighting3 Automatic controlFor Cargo Vans and Passenger Vans withoutconvenience control, the switch for the inte-rior lighting is on the rear interior light in thecargo compartment/vehicle interior.If you move the switch to automatic control,the rear/cargo compartment lamps go onwhen you open a door or unlock the vehicle.They switch off automatically after20 minutes, or when you close the doors.

98 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Motion detector

G WARNINGThe motion detector sends the invisible infra-red radiation emitted by LEDs (light emittingdiodes).These LEDs are classified as class 1M lasersand can damage the retina if you:Rlook directly into the unfiltered laser beamof the motion detector for an extendedperiodRlook directly into the laser beam of themotion detector using optical instruments,e.g. eyeglasses or a magnifying glass.

There is a risk of injury.Never look directly into the motion detector.

The cargo compartment lighting is alsoswitched on by the motion detector in thecargo compartment of Cargo Vans equippedwith this feature.If the motion detector detects a movement inthe cargo compartment when the vehicle isstationary, the cargo compartment lightingswitches on for approximately two minutes.The cargo compartment lighting can beswitched on by the motion detector withinfour seconds if:Rthe rear interior light switch (Y page 98) isset to automatic control.Rthe vehicle is stationary, the parking brakeis applied and the brake pedal is not beingdepressedOrRthe selector lever is in position P on vehi-cles with automatic transmission and thebrake pedal is not being depressed andRthe vehicle has not been locked from theoutside using the key

The motion detector switches off automati-cally if no change is detected in the vehicle forseveral hours, e.g. if a door is opened, if theignition key is turned, etc. This prevents thebattery from becoming discharged.

Changing bulbs

Important safety notes

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electrical con-tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work onthe Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

! Make sure the bulbs are always securelyinstalled.

If your vehicle is equipped with Bi-Xenonbulbs, you can recognize this by the following:the cone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the low-beam headlamps must beswitched on before starting the engine.The bulbs and lamps are an essential compo-nent of vehicle safety. You must thereforemake sure that these function correctly at alltimes. Have the headlamp setting checkedregularly.RAlways switch off the vehicle's lighting sys-tem before changing a bulb.This will prevent a short circuit.RDo not touch the glass tube of new bulbswith your bare hands. Always use a clean,lint-free cloth or only touch the base of thebulb when installing.Even minor contamination can burn intothe glass surface and reduce the service lifeof the bulbs.

Changing bulbs 99

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

RDo not use a bulb that has been dropped orthat has scratches on its glass tube.The bulb could explode.ROnly use bulbs in closed lamps which havebeen designed for this purpose.ROnly use spare bulbs of the same type andwith the prescribed voltageRProtect the bulbs from moisture when inuse.

If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.RHave the LEDs and bulbs of the followinglamps changed at a qualified specialistworkshop:- the additional turn signals in the exteriormirrors

- the high-mounted brake lamp- LED daytime running lamps (Bi-Xenonheadlamps)

- Bi-Xenon lamps (Bi-Xenon headlamps)- front fog lamps

If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.

Front bulbs

Overview of bulb replacement – bulbtypesThe following bulbs can be replaced. Bulbtypes can be found in the legend.

Vehicles with halogen headlamps: Turn signal: PY21W; Daytime running lamps: W21W

= Low-beam headlamps: H7 55W? High-beam headlamps: H7 55WA Parking lamps/standing lamps: W5W

Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps: Turn-signal: NAK 3457Additional turn signals in the exterior mir-ror (not for all-wheel-drive vehicles):HPC 16WY

Low-beam headlamps and high-beamheadlamps/cornering lamp

Example (halogen headlamps)X Switch off the lighting system.X Open the hood (Y page 248).X Turn housing cover: in the direction ofthe arrow and remove it.

100 Changing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

Example (halogen headlamps); Low-beam headlamp bulb holder= Bulb holder for high-beam headlamp? Bulb holder for parking lamp/standing

lamp (halogen headlamps)X Turn the corresponding bulb holder withbulb;,= or? counter-clockwise andpull it out of the lamp.

X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.X Insert the new bulb in such a way that itsbase fits into the recess of the bulb holder.

X Insert the bulb holder with the bulb into thelamp and turn it clockwise to tighten.The bulb holder engages audibly.

X Place housing cover: into the openingand turn in the opposite direction of thearrow.

X Close the hood.

Cornering light function/daytime run-ning lamps

X Switch off the lighting system.X Open the hood (Y page 248).X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand remove.

X Bi-Xenon headlamps: turn bulb holderwith bulb; counter-clockwise andremove it.Halogen headlamps: press the springcatches of the bulb holder together andremove the bulb holder with bulb;.

X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.X Press a new bulb into the bulb holder.X Bi-Xenon headlamps: insert the bulbholder with bulb; into the lamp and turnclockwise.Halogen headlamps: insert the bulbholder with bulb; into the lamp.The bulb holder with bulb; engages audi-bly.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise to thestop.The cap audibly engages.

X Close the hood (Y page 249).

Changing bulbs 101

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Turn signal lamps

X Switch off the lighting system.X Open the hood (Y page 248).X Turn bulb holder: counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn itcounter-clockwise and remove it from bulbholder:.

X Press the new bulb into bulb holder: andscrew it in clockwise.

X Insert bulb holder: into the lamp and turnit clockwise to tighten.

X Close the hood.

Rear bulbs (Cargo Van/PassengerVan)

Overview of bulb types

Lights Bulb type

: High-mounted brakelamp

LED

; Brake lamp/tail lamp P21W/5W

= Turn signal lamps PY 21 W

? Tail lamps/standinglamps

R5W

A License plate lamp W5W

B Rear fog lamps (driver'sside)

P21W

C Backup lamps P21W

102 Changing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

Tail lamps

X Switch off the lighting system.X Open the rear door.X Undo screws: and unclip the lamp lens inthe direction of the arrow.

X Pull the connector off the bulb holder.

; Retaining lugs= Brake lamps? Turn signal lampsA Standing lamp/tail lampB Backup lampsC Rear fog lamp

X Release retaining lugs; and take the bulbholder out of the tail lamp.

X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn itcounter-clockwise and remove it from thebulb holder.

X Press the new bulb into the bulb holder andscrew it in clockwise.

X Press the connector into the bulb holder.X Insert the lamp lens.To do this, clip the bulb holder into the threeholes provided at the side and tightenscrews:.

License plate lamp

X Switch off the lighting system.X Insert a screwdriver or similar implementinto recess; and carefully pry off lamplens:.

X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.X Insert a new bulb.X Align lamp lens: and clip it in so that itengages.

Changing bulbs 103

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Rear bulbs (Cab Chassis)

Overview of bulb types

Chassis (example: Cab Chassis)

Lights Bulb type

: Perimeter lamp/stand-ing lamp

R 5 W

; Tail lamps R 5 W

= Brake lamps P 21 W

? Turn signal lamps PY 21 W

A Backup lamps P 21 W

B Rear fog lamps (driver'sside)

P 21 W

C License plate lamp R 5 W

Tail lamps

: Screws; Lamp lens= Perimeter lamp/standing lamp? Turn signal lamps

A Brake lampsB Tail lampsC Rear fog lampD License plate lampE Backup lampsX Switch off the lighting system.X Undo screws: and remove lamp lens;.X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn itcounter-clockwise and remove it from thebulb holder.

X Press the new bulb into the bulb holder andscrew it in clockwise.

X Position lamp lens; and tightenscrews:.

Additional lamps

Additional turn signal lamp on the roof

Type of lamp: P 21 WX Switch off the lighting system.X Undo screws: and remove lamp lens;.X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn itcounter-clockwise and remove it from thebulb holder.

X Press the new bulb into the bulb holder andscrew it in clockwise.

X Position lamp lens; and tightenscrews: again.

104 Changing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

Perimeter lamp (Cab Chassis)

Type of lamp: W 5 WX Switch off the lighting system.X Undo screws: and remove the lamp unit.X Turn bulb holder; and remove it.X Remove the bulb from bulb holder;.X Press the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Screw bulb holder; into the lamp unit.X Carefully position the lamp housing andtighten screws:.

Courtesy lights, rear compartment

Bulb type: W5WX Press in the latching spring of courtesylight: with a suitable implement, e.g. ascrewdriver.

X Pry off courtesy light:.

X Disconnect cable connector=.X Unscrew bulb holder;.X Remove the bulb from bulb holder;.X Press the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Screw bulb holder; into courtesylight:.

X Connect cable connector=.The connector locking spring must engage.

X Align courtesy light: on the side andengage.

Interior lighting

General notes

! Have the bulbs in the overhead controlpanel replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop. You could otherwise damagethe overhead control panel.

Front interior light

Type of lamp: K 18 WX Switch off the interior lighting.X Press spring catch; in the direction of thearrow and lift off interior light:.

X Remove bulb= from the bulb holder.X Insert new bulb=.X Align interior light: on the right-hand sideand engage the spring catch.

Changing bulbs 105

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Rear interior lightInterior light with switch

Interior light with switch

Type of lamp: K 15 WX Switch off the interior lighting.X Press in the catch springs of lamp hous-ing: with a suitable object and pry offlamp housing:.

X Press the contact spring of bulb holder;outwards and remove bulb=.

X Insert a new bulb=.X Align lamp housing: on the left-hand sideand engage.i Vehicles with LED lighting: if an LED isfaulty, consult a qualified specialist work-shop.

Interior light without switch

Interior light without switch

Type of lamp: K 15 W

X Switch off the interior lighting.X Press in the catch springs of lamp hous-ing: with a suitable object and pry offlamp housing:.

X Open protective cover?.X Press the contact spring of bulb holder;outwards and remove bulb=.

X Insert new bulb=.X Fold protective cover? back into place.X Align lamp housing: on the left-hand sideand engage.i Vehicles with LED lighting: if an LED isfaulty, consult a qualified specialist work-shop.

Cargo compartment lamp

Type of lamp: W 10 WX Switch off the interior lighting.X Undo screws: and remove the lamp lens.X Press bulb; into the bulb holder andunscrew it counter-clockwise.

X Press new bulb; into the bulb holder andscrew it in clockwise.

X Position the lamp lens and tightenscrews:.

i Vehicles with LED cargo compart-ment lamp: if an LED is defective, consulta qualified specialist workshop.

106 Changing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperon/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on thewindshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating the wind-shield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

! Vehicles with rain/light sensor:Switch the wipers off in dry weather. Oth-erwise, dirt or optical effects may causeundesired windshield wiper sweeps. Thiscould then damage the windshield wiperblades or scratch the windshield.

The windshield will no longer be wiped prop-erly if the wiper blades are worn. Replace thewiper blades twice a year (Y page 108), ide-ally in spring and fall.

Combination switch

X Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock.

X Turn the combination switch in the direc-tion of arrow; to the appropriate settingdepending on the intensity of the rain.

X Single wipe: push the combination switchbriefly to the pressure point in the directionof arrow:.

X Towipewithwasher fluid: press the com-bination switch beyond the pressure pointin the direction of arrow:.

The detent positions of the combinationswitch correspond to the following wiperspeeds:0 Windshield wipers offI Intermittent wipeII Normal wipeIII Rapid wipe

i Canada only:If the windshield wipers are switched onand you stop the vehicle, the windshieldwiper speed is reduced. For example, if youhave selected level II and stop the vehicle,wiping continues with intermittent wipewhile the vehicle is stationary. If intermit-tent wipe is selected, the intervals becomelonger.Vehicles with a rain and light sensor:you can use level I as the universal setting.The rain and light sensor sets the appropri-ate wiping frequency automatically,according to the intensity of the rain. Whenyou stop the vehicle, levels III and II areswitched down to level I automatically.The windshield wiper will return to the orig-inal level when you drive faster than 5 mph(8 km/h).

You can adjust the sensitivity of the rain andlight sensor using the on-board computer(Y page 193).Information on checking the washer fluidlevel can be found in the "Maintenance andcare" section (Y page 255).

Windshield wipers 107

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch: è Rear window wiper switch2 ô To wipe with washer fluid3 I To switch on intermittent wiping4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping5 ô To wipe with washer fluidX Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock.

X Turn switch: to the corresponding posi-tion

The rear window wiper switches on automat-ically if you engage reverse gear and thewind-shield wipers are on.

Replacing the wiper blades

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Never fold awindshieldwiper armwithout awiper blade back onto the windshield/rearwindow.

Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.We recommend that you have the wiperblades replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! Only hold the wiper blade by the wiperarm. You could otherwise damage thewiper rubber.

The windshield will no longer be wiped prop-erly if the wiper blades are worn. Replace thewiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring andfall.

Front windshield wiper arm with wiper bladeX Fold wiper arm= away from the wind-shield.

X Set wiper blade: at right angles to thewiper arm.

X Press both retaining clips; together inthe direction of the arrow and swing wiperblade: away from wiper arm=.

X Pull wiper blade: up and out of theretainer on wiper arm=.

X Slide new wiper blade: into the retaineron wiper arm=.

X Press new wiper blade: onto wiper arm= until you hear retaining clips; engage.

X Foldwiper arm= back onto thewindshieldagain.

108 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The windshield wiperjams.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has switched off.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignitionlock.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch on the windshield wipers again.

The windshield wiperdoes not move at all.

There is a malfunction in the windshield wiper drive.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The washer fluid com-ing from the spray noz-zles no longer hits thecenter of the wind-shield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Windshield wipers 109

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

110

Useful information ............................ 112Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 112Operating the climate control sys-tem ..................................................... 116Adjusting the air vents ..................... 120Operating the auxiliary heatingsystem ............................................... 122Operating the cargo compartmentair vents ............................................. 133

111

Climatecontrol

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all modelsaswell as standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to systems and functionsrelevant to safety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 25).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the recommended settings on thefollowing pages. Otherwise, the windowscould fog up.Climate control regulates the temperatureand the humidity in the vehicle interior andfilters undesirable substances from the air.Climate control is only operational when theengine is running. The system only functionsoptimally when the side windows are closed.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather. In order to cool thevehiclemore rapidly, switch climate controlto air-recirculation mode briefly. This willspeed up the cooling process and thedesired vehicle interior temperature will bereached more quickly.

i The integrated filter can filter out mostparticles of dust and completely filters outpollen. A clogged filter reduces the airflowinto the vehicle interior. For this reason,you should always observe the interval forreplacing the filter, which is specified in theMaintenance Booklet. As it depends onenvironmental conditions, e.g. heavy airpollution, the interval may be shorter thanthat stated in the Maintenance Booklet.

112 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Heating control panel

: Sets the temperature (Y page 117)z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)

; K Sets the airflow (Y page 118)z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)

= e Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)? Sets the air distribution (Y page 117)

sz Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)

Information on heatingBelow, you can find a number of notes andrecommendations to help you use the heatingoptimally.RSet the temperature control to the middlelevel. Only change the temperature in smallincrements.ROnly use the defrosting function briefly,until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up as no fresh air is drawn intothe vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

Overview of climate control systems 113

Climatecontrol

Control panel for the air-conditioning system

: Sets the temperature (Y page 117)z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)

; Sets the airflow (Y page 118)K Increases the airflowI Reduces the airflow

= e Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)? x Switches the reheat function (window air dehumidification) on/off (Y page 118)A Sets the air distribution (Y page 117)

sz Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)B ¿ Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 117)C Blower setting bar display

z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)

Information on the air-conditioningsystemBelow, you can find a number of notes andrecommendations to help you use the air-conditioning system optimally.RSwitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation function. The indicator lamp abovethe rocker switch lights up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). Onlychange the temperature in small incre-ments.ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.

ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up as no fresh air is drawn intothe vehicle in air-recirculation mode.ROnly use the reheat function until the fog-ged up windows are clear again.

114 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Rear-compartment heating control panel

: i Switches the rear-compartment heating on/off (Y page 116); K Sets the airflow (Y page 118)= Sets the temperature (Y page 117)

Information on rear-compartmentheatingFor optimum climate control, set the temper-ature control to the middle level. Only changethe temperature in small increments.

Overview of climate control systems 115

Climatecontrol

Control panel for rear-compartment air-conditioning system

: Sets the airflow (Y page 118)K Increases the airflowI Reduces the airflow

; Sets the temperature (Y page 117)= Blower setting bar display? i Switches the rear-compartment air conditioning on/off (Y page 116)

Information on rear-compartment airconditioningFor optimum climate control, set the temper-ature control to the middle level. Only changethe temperature in small increments.

Operating the climate control system

Switching the climate control on/off

Important informationWhen the climate control is switched off, airintake and air circulation also stop. Only usethis setting for a brief period. Otherwise, thewindows could fog up.

Activating/deactivating climate con-trol via the control panelX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

Vehicle with heatingX To switch on: set airflow control; downto at least level 1 (Y page 114).

X To switch off: set airflow control; up tothe 0 position (Y page 114).

Vehicle with air conditioningX To switch on: press theK button.The blower speeds are shown in bars nextto the button.

X To switch off: press theI button and,after reaching the lowest blower speed,press it again.

116 Operating the climate control systemClimatecontrol

Activating/deactivating rear-compart-ment climate control via the controlpanelX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

Vehicle with rear-compartment heating/rear-compartment air conditioningX To switch on/off: press thei switch.If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,the rear-compartment heating/rear-com-partment air conditioning is switched on.

Switching the cooling with air dehu-midification function on/off

Important informationIf you switch off the "Cooling with air dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled (in warm weather) ordehumidified. Thewindows could fog upmorequickly.The cooling with air dehumidification functionis only available when the engine is running.The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehu-midified according to the temperature selec-ted.Condensation may appear on the undersideof the vehicle when in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.

Switching on/offVehicle with air conditioningX Press the¿ button.If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,cooling with air dehumidification isswitched on.

Setting the temperature

Increasing/reducing temperature inthe front compartment via the controlpanelOnly change the temperature in small incre-ments. Start at the center position, or at 72‡(22 †).X Switch on climate control (Y page 116).X Turn temperature control: clockwise toincrease or counterclockwise to reduce thetemperature (Y page 114).

Increasing/reducing temperature inthe rear compartment via the controlpanelOnly change the temperature in small incre-ments.X Switch on climate control (Y page 116).X Turn rear-compartment temperature con-trol= (Y page 115) or rear-compartmentair-conditioning system; (Y page 116)clockwise to increase or counterclockwiseto reduce the temperature.i Vehicles with additional air conditioningand heating in the rear compartment: if youset the temperature control to the centerposition, only one of the two climate con-trol systems works in the rear compart-ment and in air-recirculation mode(Y page 120).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsThe air distribution symbols have the follow-ing meanings:m Directs air through the center and

side air ventssz

Directs air to the windshield and theair vents

Operating the climate control system 117

Climatecontrol

q Directs air to the windshield, the airvents and into the footwell

r Directs air to the air vents and intothe footwell

AdjustingX Switch on climate control (Y page 116).X Set air-distribution control? for the heat-ing (Y page 113) or air-conditioning systemA (Y page 114) to the corresponding sym-bol.

Setting the airflowX Switch on climate control (Y page 116).X Vehicle with heating/rear-compart-ment heating: set airflow control; of theheating (Y page 113) or of the rear-com-partment heating (Y page 115) to thedesired level.

X Vehicle with air conditioning/rear-com-partment air conditioning: press theI button to reduce or theK buttonto increase the airflow.The blower speeds are shown in bars nextto the buttons.

Defrosting the windowsYou can use the "defrosting" function todefrost the windshield or to demist the insideof the windshield and the side windows.Only use the following settings until the win-dows are clear again.X Vehicle with window heating: switch onthe front (Y page 119) and/or rear windowdefroster (Y page 119) .

X Switch on climate control (Y page 116).Vehicle with heatingX Set temperature control: and airflowcontrol; toz (Y page 113).

X Set air-distribution control? tosz (Y page 113).

X Close the center air vents (Y page 121) andthe air outlets for the headroom and therear compartment (Y page 121).

X Direct the side air vents towards the sidewindows and open the defroster vents forthe side windows (Y page 121).

Vehicle with air conditioningX Set temperature control: toz (Y page 114).

X Press theK button until the maximumblower output is reached.All bars in the display next to the buttonlight up.

X Set air-distribution controlA tosz (Y page 114).

X Close the center air vents (Y page 121) andthe air outlets for the headroom and therear compartment (Y page 121).

X Direct the side air vents towards the sidewindows and open the defroster vents forthe side windows (Y page 121).

Clearing condensation from the win-dows

Windows fogged up on the insideYou should only select this setting until thewindows are clear again.X Vehicle with window heating: switch onthe front (Y page 119) and/or rear windowdefroster (Y page 119) .

X Switch on climate control (Y page 116).X Switch off air-recirculation mode(Y page 120).

Vehicle with heatingX Set temperature control: to a higher tem-perature (Y page 113).

X Set airflow control; to a higher blowersetting. It should be set at least to level two(Y page 113).

X Set air-distribution control? tosz (Y page 113).

118 Operating the climate control systemClimatecontrol

i If the windows still fog up, set the controlas described for defrosting (Y page 118).

Vehicle with air conditioningX Activate cooling with air dehumidification(Y page 117).

X Press the¨ button (Y page 114).The reheat function is switched on. Theindicator lamp in the switch lights up.To switch off the reheat function, press the¨ button again. The indicator lamp inthe button goes out.

Windows fogged up on the outsideYou should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.X Switch on the windshield wipers(Y page 107).

X Switch on climate control (Y page 116).X Adjust air distribution to the footwell(Y page 117).

X Close the air vents (Y page 120).

Window heating

Windshield heater

Windshield heater switch

The windshield heater consumes a lot ofpower. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the windshield is clear. The wind-shield heating otherwise switches off auto-matically after 5 minutes.

X Start the engine.X To switch on/off: press thez switch.The indicator lamp in thez buttoncomes on when the windshield heating isswitched on.

If the indicator lamp in thez windshieldheating button flashes, the on-board voltageis too low. The windshield heating hasswitched off prematurely or cannot be acti-vated.X Switch off any consumers that are notrequired, e.g. reading lamps or interiorlighting.

If enough on-board voltage is available againwithin 30 seconds, the windshield heatingautomatically switches on again. It otherwiseremains switched off.

Rear window defroster

Rear window defroster switch

The rear window defroster consumes a lot ofpower. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the window is clear. The rear windowheating otherwise only switches off automat-ically after 12 minutes.X Start the engine.X To switch on/off: press the| switch.The indicator lamp in the| buttoncomes on when the rear window defrosteris switched on.

If the indicator lamp in the| rear windowdefroster button flashes, the on-board volt-age is too low. The rear window defroster has

Operating the climate control system 119

Climatecontrol

switched off prematurely or cannot be acti-vated.X Switch off any consumers that are notrequired, e.g. reading lamps or interiorlighting.

If enough on-board voltage is available againwithin 30 seconds, the rear window heatingautomatically switches on again. It otherwiseremains switched off.

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off

Important safety notesWhen you switch on air-recirculation mode,the windows could fog up more quickly, inparticular at low outside temperatures. Onlyswitch on air-recirculation mode for a shorttime.You can deactivate the intake of fresh air ifunpleasant odors enter the vehicle from out-side. The air inside the vehicle will only becirculated.

Heating/air-conditioning systemAir-recirculation mode switches off automat-ically after about 10 to 30minutes, dependingon the outside temperature.X Switch on climate control (Y page 116).X To switch on/off: press thee switch.If the indicator lamp in thee buttonlights up, air-recirculation mode is activa-ted.

Rear-compartment heating/rear-com-partment air conditioningOn vehicles with a rear-compartment heatingand air-conditioning system, you can acti-vate/deactivate air-recirculation mode forthe rear-compartment climate control.X Switch on climate control (Y page 116).X To activate: set the temperature control ofrear-compartment heating= (Y page 115)

or rear-compartment air conditioning sys-tem; (Y page 116) to the center position.Only one of the two climate control sys-tems in the rear compartment is activatedand is in air-recirculation mode.

X To deactivate: turn the temperature con-trol of rear-compartment heating=(Y page 115) or rear-compartment air-con-ditioning system; (Y page 116) clock-wise or counterclockwise. Only change thetemperature in small increments.

Adjusting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

The center and side air vents are adjustable.On vehicles with a rear-compartment air-con-ditioning system, you can also adjust the airvents in the roof duct.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjustthe sliders of the center air vents to thecenter position.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood free ofblockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.Rnever cover the vents or the ventilationgrilles in the vehicle interior.

120 Adjusting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Setting the center air vents

: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Thumbwheel for center air vent, right? Thumbwheel for center air vent, leftX To open: turn thumbwheel= to the left orthumbwheel? to the right.

X To close: turn thumbwheel= to the rightor thumbwheel? to the left.

Setting the side air vents

Side air vent (example: right-hand side of the vehi-cle)X To open: turn thumbwheel= of side airvents: upward.

X To close: turn thumbwheel= of side airvents: downward.

i If the® symbol can be seen on thumb-wheel=, defroster vent; is open.

Adjusting air vents for the passengercompartment

Air vents (example: right-hand side of the vehicle)

You can use the air vents to ventilate thevehicle interior on the left and right, in the rearand the headroom.X To open: for the right-hand side of the vehi-cle, turn thumbwheel; to the left or forthe left-hand side of the vehicle, thumb-wheel: to the right.

X To close: for the right-hand side of thevehicle, turn thumbwheel; to the right orfor the left-hand side of the vehicle, thumb-wheel: to the left.

Adjusting the air vents in the roof duct! Always leave at least one air vent open.If the rear-compartment air conditioning isswitched on and all the air vents are closed,the air-conditioning system may be dam-aged.

Adjusting the air vents 121

Climatecontrol

Z

On vehicles with rear-compartment air con-ditioning, adjustable air vents are integratedinto the roof duct.X To adjust the airflow: open or close theair flap in air vents: as needed.

X To adjust the air distribution: turn airvent: to the desired position.

Operating the auxiliary heating sys-tem

Important safety notes

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, for example inenclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck insnow. There is a risk of fatal injury.Switch the auxiliary heating off in enclosedspaces without extraction systems, e.g. ingarages. If the vehicle is stuck in snow andyou have to leave the auxiliary heating run-ning, keep the exhaust pipe and the areaaround the vehicle free of snow. To ensure anadequate supply of fresh air, open a windowon the side of the vehicle that is not facing intothe wind.

G WARNINGWhen the auxiliary heating is switched on,parts of the vehicle can become very hot, e.g.the exhaust system.Flammable materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contactwith:Rhot parts of the exhaust systemRthe exhaust gas itselfThere is a risk of fire.

When the auxiliary heating is switched on,make sure that:Rno flammable materials come into contactwith hot vehicle componentsRthe exhaust gas can escape from theexhaust pipe unhinderedRthe exhaust gas does not come into contactwith flammable materials.

! Turn on the auxiliary heating at least oncea month for approximately 10 minutes. Theauxiliary heating could otherwise be dam-aged.

! Make sure that the flow of hot air is notblocked. The auxiliary heating will other-wise overheat and switch off.

Your vehicle may be equipped with either anauxiliary hot-water heater or an auxiliarywarm-air heater. Adjustment and operation ofthe:Rhot-water auxiliary heater is done via theon-board computer and with the auxiliaryheating button in the control panel(Y page 123) or with the remote control(Y page 125).Rauxiliary warm-air heater is done via thetimer above the overhead control panel(Y page 127).

The auxiliary heating works independently ofthe engine and supplements the climate con-trol system in the vehicle. The auxiliary heat-ing heats the air in the vehicle interior to thetemperature set.If your vehicle is equipped with a hot-waterauxiliary heater, the auxiliary heating alsokeeps the coolant warm. This way, the load onthe engine is minimized and fuel is saved.The heater booster function (Y page 130) ofthe auxiliary heating supports the climatecontrol system when the engine is runningand the outside temperature is low.You can use the auxiliary heating at an out-side temperature of up to 39 ‡ (4 †). At anoutside temperature above 39 ‡ (4 †) the

122 Operating the auxiliary heating systemClimatecontrol

auxiliary heating system and the heater boos-ter function switch off automatically.

Heating timeThe heating time when operating the auxiliaryheating with the vehicle is stationary withoutthe engine running depends on the outsidetemperature and the electrical consumersswitched on.

Outsidetempera-ture

Heatingtime

Possiblestartup proce-dures

Above23 ‡(Ò5 †)

Approx.20minutes

6

23 ‡(Ò5 †) to5 ‡(Ò15 †)

Approx.40minutes

3

Below 5 ‡(Ò15 †)

Approx.50minutes

2

You can then switch on the auxiliary heatingagain.If you do not start the engine for a while, thetotal duration of heating is limited to a maxi-mum of 120 minutes to protect the starterbattery. Switching on the auxiliary heating isthen automatically disabled. You can, forexample, switch on the auxiliary heating with-out the engine running if the outside temper-ature is Ò5 ‡ (Ò20 †) a maximum of twotimes. If you try it again, the indicator lamps inthey button (Y page 123) flash alter-nately for approximately 2 minutes to signalswitch-on interlock. The auxiliary heating can-not be switched on without starting theengine.When the condition of charge of the starterbattery is sufficient again, the switch-on inter-lock will be deactivated. To charge the starterbattery, let the engine run. The engine runtime required to reach the necessary condi-

tion of charge depends on the outside tem-perature and on the electrical consumersswitched on.

Outside tempera-ture

Engine runtime

Above 32 ‡ (0 †) at least 10 minutes

32 ‡ (0 †) to 14 ‡(Ò10 †)

at least 15 minutes

Below 14 ‡ (Ò10 †) at least 20 minutes

Before switching onX Check the fuel level and top up if necessary.The auxiliary heating is operated directlyusing the vehicle's fuel. The tankmust be atleast a quarter full to ensure that the aux-iliary heating functions.

X Switch on climate control (Y page 116).X Set the temperature control to the desiredtemperature (Y page 117).

X Set the air distribution as required(Y page 117).

X Open the center (Y page 121) and side airvents (Y page 121) and set them to themiddle position.

i The auxiliary heating automaticallyswitches to heater booster mode after theengine is started.

Operating with the button (controlpanel)

Operating the auxiliary heating system 123

Climatecontrol

Z

i Switch the heater booster function on oroff with the¢ button (Y page 130).

X To activate the auxiliary heating sys-tem: press and hold the upper section ofthey switch for longer than 2 seconds.The red indicator lamp in the button lightsup. The auxiliary heating heats or ventilatesthe interior to the temperature that youhave set. The blower switches to the firstlevel.

X To switch off auxiliary heating: press theupper section of they button.

orX Turn the key in the ignition lock to posi-tion 0.The red indicator lamp in the button goesout. The auxiliary heating operates foranother 2 minutes and then switches offautomatically.

Selecting a switch-on time

Important informationYou can use the on-board computer to defineup to three switch-on times, one of which canbe selected.The yellow indicator lamp in they buttongoes out after 30 minutes, if you:Rhave selected the switch-on time andRturn the key to position0 in the ignition lock

On-board computer without steeringwheel buttonsX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press they button.They symbol flashes in the display.

orX Press the4 menu button on the instru-ment cluster repeatedly until theysymbol flashes in the display.

X Use thef org buttons on the instrumentcluster to select the switch-on time 11 to 33.

The switch-on time selected is displayed.X Wait 10 seconds for the standard display toappear.The switch-on time is selected. The yellowindicator lamp in they button lights up.If you do not preselect a switch-on time,and --:----:-- is shown in the display, thismeans that the automatic switch-on modeis switched off. The yellow indicator lamp inthey button goes out.

On-board computerwith steeringwheelbuttons

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press they button.The Aux. heatAux. heat submenu is shown in thedisplay.If no switch-on time has been selected, theselected switch-on time is highlighted orTimer offTimer off is highlighted.i You can also access the Aux.Aux. heat.heat. sub-menu via the SettingsSettings (Y page 188)menu.

X Use theW orX button on the steer-ing wheel to select the desired switch-ontime.Use the Timer offTimer off setting to deactivateautomatic switch-on.

X Press theV button on the steeringwheel.The switch-on time is selected. The yellowindicator lamp in they button lights up.

124 Operating the auxiliary heating systemClimatecontrol

Setting the switch-on timeX Use the samemethod to select a switch-ontime as described in the "Preselecting aswitch-on time" section.

On-board computer without steeringwheel buttonsX Press the9 reset button on the instru-ment cluster.The hour display flashes.

X Use thef andg buttons on the instru-ment cluster to set the hours.

X Press the9 reset buttonThe minute display flashes.

X Use thef andg buttons to set theminutes.The switch-on time is set and selected.

On-board computer with steering wheelbuttonsX Press the9 button on the steeringwheel.The display shows the HoursHours menu.

X Use theW andX buttons on thesteering wheel to set the hours.

X Press the9 button.The display shows the MinutesMinutes menu.

X Use theW andX buttons to set theminutes.

X Press theV button.The switch-on time is set and selected.

Operation with the remote control

Important informationYou can switch the auxiliary heating on/offand set the operating duration using theremote control. You can use up to 4 remotecontrol units on the vehicle. These must besynchronized for the receiver in your vehicle(Y page 126).

The remote control has a maximum range ofapproximately 600 meters. This range isreduced by:Rsources of interferenceRsolid objects between the remote controland the vehicleRthe remote control being in an unfavorableposition in relation to the vehicleRtransmitting from an enclosed space

Overview of the remote control

: Indicator lamp; To confirm settings= To switch the remote control on/off, set

the operating duration or end or cancelsettings

Indicator lamp: lights up in various ways toshow different operating modes:

Signaling Meaning

Lights up red Remote control switchedon

Data transfer

Flashes red Auxiliary heating switchedoff

Lights upgreen

Auxiliary heating switchedon

Operating the auxiliary heating system 125

Climatecontrol

Z

Signaling Meaning

Flashes green Change operating durationactive

Flashes alter-nately red andgreen

Remote control in syn-chronizing mode

i When the remote control battery is weak,indicator lamp: flashes red rapidly.Replace the remote control battery(Y page 130).

You can find further information on the lampstatus in the "Problems with the auxiliaryheating" section (Y page 132).

Switching the remote control on/offThe remote control switches to standbymodeafter 10 seconds. Indicator lamp: goes out.X To switch on: press and hold theÜbutton until indicator lamp: lights up red.If a connection between the remote controland the receiver in the vehicle has beenestablished and indicator lamp::Rflashes red, the auxiliary heating isswitched off.Rlights up green, the auxiliary heating isswitched on.

X To switch off: press and hold theÜbutton until indicator lamp: goes out.

Switching the auxiliary heating on/offX Switch on the remote control.X To switch on: when indicator lamp:flashes red, press theb button.During data transmission, indicatorlamp: lights up red.When indicator lamp: lights up green, theauxiliary heating is switched on.

X To switch off: when indicator lamp:lights up green, press theb button.During data transmission, indicatorlamp: lights up red.

When indicator lamp: flashes red, theauxiliary heating is switched off.

Changing the operating durationX Switch on the remote control.X When indicator lamp: flashes red, pressÜ andb simultaneously.Indicator lamp: flashes green.

X Press theÜ button repeatedly until thedesired operating duration is shown.R20 minutesIndicator lamp: flashes green twice.R30 minutesIndicator lamp: flashes green threetimes.R40 minutesIndicator lamp: flashes green fourtimes.

X Press theb button.During data transmission, indicatorlamp: lights up red.If indicator lamp: emits two long, greenflashes, the selected operating duration isstored.i If no adjustment is made, indicatorlamp: flashes six times and the remotecontrol goes into standby mode.

Synchronizing the remote controlX Press they auxiliary heating button inthe control panel (Y page 123) for longerthan 10 seconds.When you press and hold they button,the red indicator lamp lights up in the but-ton.When the red indicator lamp in theybutton flashes, the receiver in the vehicle isready for synchronizing.

X Press and hold theÜ remote controlbutton until indicator lamp: lights up red.If there is an active connection between theremote control and the receiver, indicatorlamp: flashes alternately red and green.

126 Operating the auxiliary heating systemClimatecontrol

The remote control is in synchronizingmode.i If you press theÜ button again on theremote control after starting synchroniza-tion, you will only synchronize this remotecontrol unit with the receiver. Any otherremote control units that were synchron-ized will be cleared. Indicator lamp:flashes alternately red and green (veryslowly).

X Press theb button on the remote con-trol.During data transmission, indicatorlamp: lights up red.When remote control indicator lamp:emits two long green flashes, the selectedoperating time is synchronized. The indica-tor lamp in they auxiliary heating but-ton goes out.

Operation with the timer

Important safety notesThis is only for vehicles with a hot-water aux-iliary heater.

G DANGERIf a switch-on time has been selected, theauxiliary heating switches on automatically.RIf the ventilation is insufficient, poisonousexhaust gases can collect, in particular car-bon monoxide. This is the case in enclosedspaces, for example. There is a risk of fatalinjuries.RIf highly flammable substances or flamma-ble materials are nearby, there is a risk of arisk of fire and explosion.

Always deactivate the preselected switch-ontimes if you stop the vehicle in such or similarsituations.

Use the timer to:Ractivate/deactivate immediate heatingmodeRset up to three switch-on times

Rset the operating duration from 10to120 minutes or to continuous operationRset the heating level (preselected temper-ature) to a range between 10 and 30

Timer overview

Timer above the overhead control panel: Program column

G Sets preselection memory 1 – 3(Y page 129)Sets weekday (Mon. – Sun.)(Y page 128)

; Menu bary Activates/deactivates immediateheating mode (Y page 128)B Sets the program times(Y page 129)Ñ Sets the day, time and the operatingduration (Y page 128)ß Sets the heating level(Y page 129)

= Display panel for: time, heating leveland operating durationà Continuous operation mode activeß Heating level set

? Selects options in program column: ormenu bar; (forwards)Increases values

A Confirms a selection or settingB Status bar

y Heating mode activatedC Activates the timer

Cancels or ends settings in a menu

Operating the auxiliary heating system 127

Climatecontrol

Z

D Selects options in program column: ormenu bar; (backwards)Reduces values

Activating the timerThe timer switches to standby mode after10 seconds. The display goes off.X Press and hold theÜ button until themenu bar appears in the display and thetime is shown.

Setting the day, time and operatingdurationYou must reset the day, time, and defaultvalue for the operating duration:Rduring initial operationRafter a voltage supply interruption (e.g. ifthe battery has been disconnected)Rafter a malfunction.You can find further information on malfunc-tions in the "Problems with the auxiliary heat-ing" section (Y page 132).X Press theÛ orâ button until theÑ symbol in menu bar; flashes.

X Press theb button.In program column:, the day selectedflashes.

X Press theÛ orâ button to set thedesired day.

X Press theb button.The day selected is stored. The hour settingof the clock flashes.

X In the same way, set the hour and subse-quently theminutes, then confirm by press-ing theb button.The time is stored. Program column: dis-appears and the operating durationflashes.i The operating duration set is the defaultsetting for immediate heating mode. Youcan set the operating duration from 10 to120 minutes or activate continuous opera-tion.

X Using theÛ orâ button, set theminute value or select theà symbol forcontinuous operation.

X Press theb button.The operating duration is stored. The timeis shown.

Activating/deactivating immediateheating modeX To switch on: press theÛ orâ but-ton until they symbol in the menu barflashes.

X Press theb button.The operation duration flashes in the dis-play.i You can preset the default value that isshown (Y page 128).

X Using theÛ orâ button, set theminute value (10 – 120) or select theàsymbol for continuous operation.

X Press theb button.Immediate heating mode is activated. Thetime and they symbol appear.

X To switch off: press theÛ orâbutton until they symbol flashes in themenu bar, and then press theb button.Immediate heating mode is deactivated.They symbol disappears.The auxiliary heating operates for anothertwo minutes and then switches off auto-matically.i If you switch off the ignition while imme-diate heating mode (operating duration10– 120 minutes) is active, immediateheating mode is also switched off. The aux-iliary heating operates for anothertwo minutes and then switches off auto-matically.If you have set continuous operation as theoperating duration and you switch off theignition, the auxiliary heating switches offautomatically after about 15 minutes. If, inthe remaining time, the ignition is switchedon again, continuous operation of the aux-iliary heating continues.

128 Operating the auxiliary heating systemClimatecontrol

Setting the preselection time

G WARNINGThe auxiliary heating must not be operated ifthere are highly flammable substancesnearby or in enclosed spaces without anextraction system. Make sure that the auxili-ary heating is not switched on automaticallyby the timer in such places. If this possibilityexists, deactivate the respective programmedtime.

You can set three preselection times usingthe timer.Observe that when setting the preselectiontime, this does not correspond to the switch-on time but to the switch-off or departuretime. The auxiliary heating system starts upautomatically and runs for the operating dura-tion set prior to departure.Example: For a planned departure time of7:00 a.m., you should also set the preselec-tion time to 7:00 a.m. If the operating dura-tion is preset to 40 minutes, for example, theauxiliary heating starts up at 6:20 a.m.If an identical time (time and day) is set in thepreselection memory, only the last time set issaved.After a malfunction or if the battery has beendisconnected, you must set the preselectiontimes again. You can find further informationon malfunctions in the "Problems with theauxiliary heating" section (Y page 132).X Press theÛ orâ button until theB symbol in the menu bar flashes.

X Press theb button.In the program column, theG preselec-tionmemory numbers appear. The selectedpreselection memory flashes.

X Press theÛ orâ button to select thedesired preselection memory.

X Press theb button.The preselection memory is selected. Thedays are shown.

X Set the day and time as described in the"Setting the day, time and operating dura-tion" section (Y page 128).The preselection time is stored. The pro-gram column disappears. In the displaypanel, the onon message and they sym-bol appear.

X Press theb button.The operating duration flashes.

X Press theÛ orâ button to set theminute value (10 – 120).

X Press theb button.The operating duration for the preselectiontime is saved. The time and number of theselected preselection memory are shown.i The preselectionmemory that will be acti-vated next is underlined. Additionally, theday that is set appears.

Deactivating the preselection timeX Carry out the steps as described in the"Setting the preselection time" section.

If they symbol in the status bar is shown:X Press theÛ orâ button until the offoffmessage in the display panel is shown.

X Press theb button.The preselection time is deactivated. Thetime is shown.

Setting the heating levelYou can set the heating level to a rangebetween 10 and 30.The heating level corresponds to a preselec-tion temperature for the vehicle interior. Thisis a guide value and may, depending on theoutside temperature, differ from the actualvehicle interior temperature.X Press theÛ orâ button until theß symbol in the menu bar flashes.

X Press theb button.The heating level display flashes.

Operating the auxiliary heating system 129

Climatecontrol

Z

X Using theÛ andâ buttons, set thedesired heating level to a range between 10and 30.

X Press theb button.The heating level is set and they sym-bol appears.

Switching the heater booster functionon/off

Vehicles with auxiliary heating

Vehicles with heater booster function

At outside temperatures of up to 39 ‡ (4 †)the fuel-fired heater booster systemheats thevehicle interior as quickly as possible whenthe engine is running.The auxiliary heating automatically switchesto heater booster mode after the engine isstarted.At an outside temperature above 39 ‡ (4 †)the auxiliary heating system and the heaterbooster function switch off automatically.If you switch off the engine without switchingoff the heater booster function, the system

will be switched on the next time the engine isstarted (memory function).i Switch the auxiliary heating on or off withthey button (Y page 123).

X To switch on/off: press the¢ switch.If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,the heater booster function is switched on.

After switching off, the auxiliary heating oper-ates for about another 2 minutes and thenswitches off automatically.

Replacing the remote control battery

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

If the indicator lamp on the remote controlflashes red rapidly, the remote control batteryis discharged. You should replace the remotecontrol battery.You need a battery of the type CR2430, whichcan be obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop.

130 Operating the auxiliary heating systemClimatecontrol

X Remove battery cover; using a suitableimplement, e.g. a coin, by turning it coun-ter-clockwise.

X Check the seal on battery cover; fordamage and, if necessary, replace.

X Remove old batteries=.X Insert new, clean battery= into the bat-tery tray with the positive pole facingupwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

X Position battery cover; so that mark:on the raised area points between tworecesses?.

X Turn battery cover; using a suitableimplement, e.g. a coin, clockwise to thestop.

X Check all the functions of the remote con-trol (Y page 125).

Operating the auxiliary heating system 131

Climatecontrol

Z

Problems with the auxiliary heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The indicator lamp onthe remote controlflashes red rapidly.

The remote control battery is discharged. Data transmission is notpossible.X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 130).

The indicator lamp onthe remote controlflashes red and green inrapid succession.

There is no connection between the remote control and thereceiver in the vehicle.X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, e.g. hold theremote control higher or to the side.

X Move closer.If you cannot establish a connection and the auxiliary heating isswitched on, it can then only be deactivated using they button(Y page 123).or

Several remote controls are being used at the same time.X Switch on the remote control again after a short while(Y page 126).or

The remote control is not synchronized.X Synchronize the remote control (Y page 126).

The indicator lamp onthe remote controlslowly flashes red andgreen alternately.

The remote control is being synchronized.X Wait until the remote control synchronization process is com-plete (Y page 126).

The remote control forthe auxiliary heatingcannot be switched on.

The remote control battery is discharged.X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 130).

The auxiliary heatingdoes not switch on.

The outside temperature is above 39‡ (4†). The auxiliary heatingswitches off automatically.

The auxiliary heatingswitches off automati-cally and/or cannot beswitched on.

The fuel tank is less thanÕ full. The auxiliary heating switches offautomatically.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.X Then, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel linesare full.or

132 Operating the auxiliary heating systemClimatecontrol

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The low-voltage protection system integrated in the control unitswitches off the auxiliary heating because the on-board voltage isless than 10 V.X Have the alternator and battery checked.or

The fuse is blown.X Replace the fuse; see the "Fuse allocation" supplement.X Have the cause of the blown fuse determined at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.or

A malfunction has occurred.X Switch the ignition on and off twice.

If the auxiliary heating still cannot be switched on, the heatingdevice is faulty.X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The auxiliary heating isoverheated.

The coolant level is too low.X Check the coolant level and add more coolant if necessary(Y page 253).

Operating the cargo compartment airvents

If your vehicle is equipped with a roof venti-lator, you can ventilate and extract air fromthe cargo compartment.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X To activate and extract air: press theupper section of the ´ switch.The roof ventilator removes used air fromthe cargo compartment.

X To activate and ventilate: press the lowersection of the · switch.The roof ventilator feeds fresh air into thecargo compartment.

X To switch off: set the switch to the middleposition.

Operating the cargo compartment air vents 133

Climatecontrol

Z

134

Useful information ............................ 136Breaking-in notes .............................. 136Driving ............................................... 136Automatic transmission ................... 142Refueling ............................................ 145Parking ............................................... 149Driving tips ........................................ 151Driving systems ................................ 159Working mode ................................... 172Towing a trailer ................................. 173

135

Drivingandparking

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all modelsaswell as standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to systems and functionsrelevant to safety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 25).

Breaking-in notes

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)New or replaced brake pads and brake disksonly reach their optimum braking effect aftera few 100 miles (a few 100 kilometers). Untilthen, compensate for this by applying greaterforce to the brake pedal.For the service life and economy of your vehi-cle it is crucial that you break in the enginewith due care.RTherefore, protect the engine for the first1000 miles (1500 km) by driving at varyingvehicle and engine speeds.RAvoid overstraining the vehicle and highengine speeds during this period, e.g. driv-ing at full throttle. Do not exceedØ of themaximum speed for each gear.RDo not change down a gear manually inorder to brake.RTry to avoid depressing the acceleratorpedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-down).RThe shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 should only beengaged when driving slowly, e.g. whendriving in mountainous terrain.

After 1000miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and acceleratethe vehicle to full speed.

i You should also observe these notes onbreaking-in if the engine or parts of the

drive train on your vehicle have beenreplaced.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

If you park the vehicle for more thanthree weeks:Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger orRdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery orRswitch off the electrical system using thebattery main switch (Y page 137) andRdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary batteryOtherwise, you need to check the battery'scondition of charge every three weeks, sincestandby power consumption can drain thebattery. If the battery voltage is lower than12.2 V, the battery must be charged. Other-wise, the battery may be damaged by exhaus-tive discharging.Be sure to observe the notes on disconnect-ing and charging the batteries under "Battery"(Y page 258). You can obtain informationabout trickle chargers from a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

136 DrivingDrivingandparking

Battery isolating switch

Important safety notes

! Make sure that the key is in position 0 inthe ignition lock and wait at least 20 sec-onds before disconnecting or connectingthe battery isolating switch. You could oth-erwise damage electrical system compo-nents.

You can use the battery isolating switch todisconnect the power supply to all your vehi-cle's consumers. This will prevent uncontrol-led battery discharge caused by off-load cur-rent consumption.If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliarybattery in the engine compartment, you willneed to disconnect both batteries. Only thenis the electrical system fully disconnectedfrom the power supply.

i Only switch the vehicle to de-energizedusing the battery main switch if:Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthyperiodRit is absolutely necessaryAfter the power supply has been activated,you will need to reset the side windows(Y page 79).

Switching off the power supply

! When you clamp the connector under theaccelerator pedal, make sure that the con-nector does not become damaged or dirty.It may otherwise not be possible to restorethe electrical connection when the partsare reassembled.

Battery isolating switch in the driver's footwell, onthe right-hand side next to the accelerator pedalX Remove the key from the ignition lock andwait for about 20 seconds.

X Press button; in the direction of thearrow and hold.

X Pull connector: from the earth pin.X Clamp connector: under the acceleratorpedal so that it cannot make contact withthe earth pin.All starter battery consumers are discon-nected from the power supply.

Switching on the power supply

X Insert the key into the ignition lock.X Press connector: onto earth pin; untilyou feel it engage and the lock inhibitor isreleased.Connector: must be in full contact withearth pin;.All consumers are reconnected to the DCpower supply.

Driving 137

Drivingandparking

Z

Key positions

g To insert/remove the key, to lock thesteering wheel

1 To unlock the steering wheel, power sup-ply for some consumers (e.g. the radio)

2 To switch on the ignition. Power supply forall consumers, preglow and drive position

3 To start the engineOn vehicles with a battery main switch, youmust first switch on the power supply(Y page 137).

i To unlock the steering, move the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key to posi-tion 1.

Preparing for a journey

Visual check of the vehicle exteriorX In particular, check the following compo-nents on the vehicle, and on the trailer asnecessary:Rlicense plates, vehicle lighting, turn sig-nals, brake lamps and wiper blades fordirt and damageRtires and wheels for firm seating, correcttire pressure and general conditionRtrailer tow hitch for play and securityThe trailer coupling is one of the mostimportant vehicle parts with regard toroad safety. The separate instructionsissued by the manufacturer pertaining to

operation, care and maintenance shouldbe observed.

X Rectify any noticeable defects before com-mencing the journey.

Checks in the vehicle

Emergency equipment/first-aid kitX Check the equipment tomake sure that it isaccessible, complete and ready for use.

The first aid and breakdown assistance equip-ment is in the front door stowage compart-ments and behind the driver's seat.

Vehicle lightingX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Check the lighting system with the aid of asecond person.

X Replace defective bulbs (Y page 99).

Before driving off

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell may restrictthe clearance around the pedals or block adepressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper-ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so thatthey do not get into the driver's footwell.When using floormats or carpets, make surethat they are properly secured so that they donot slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not placeseveral floormats or carpets on top of oneanother.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.

138 DrivingDrivingandparking

Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

X Secure the load as per the loading guide-lines (Y page 240).

X Make sure that the floormats and carpetsare properly secured so that they cannotslip and obstruct the pedals.

X Close all doors.

Starting the engine

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

X Before starting the engine, make sure that:Rall the doors are closed.Rall the vehicle occupants are wearingtheir seat belts correctly.Rthe parking brake is applied.i If you depress the brake pedal beforestarting the engine, the pedal travel is shortand pedal resistance is high.If you depress the brake pedal again afterstarting the engine, pedal travel and resist-ance will be back to normal again.

Gearshift patternj Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveX Move the selector lever to position P.The display in the instrument cluster showsP:Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons(Y page 187)Ron vehicles without steering wheel but-tons (Y page 182)i You can also start the engine in neutralN.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.The% preglow indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up briefly.

X Once the%preglow indicator lampgoesout, turn the key to position3 in the ignitionlock and release it as soon as the engine isrunning.i You can start the engine without preglowwhen the engine is warm.The preglow system ismalfunctioning if the% preglow indicator lamp lights up forapproximately 1 minute:Rafter the ignition is switched onRwhile the engine is runningAt extremely low outside temperatures youmay then no longer be able to start theengine. Have the malfunction rectified at aqualified specialist workshop.

Driving 139

Drivingandparking

Z

i Depending on the equipment installed,the vehicle either automatically locks cen-trally after switching on the ignition or afterpulling away. The locking knobs in thedoors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.Automatic door locking can be deactivated(Y page 71).

Driving off

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! Only shift into reverse gear R when thevehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you coulddamage the transmission.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.The selector lever lock is released.

X Move the selector lever to position D or R.On vehicles with a reverse warning feature,when reverse gear is engaged a warningtone sounds to alert other road users(Y page 140).

X Release the parking brake (Y page 150).Thec indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

i After pulling away or switching on theignition, the vehicle automatically lockscentrally. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.

You can also deactivate the automatic lock-ing feature (Y page 71).

Reverse warning device

G WARNINGOther road usersmay ignore or fail to hear thewarning tone of the reverse warning feature.There is a risk of injury if you fail to ensure thatthe area in which you are maneuvering isclear.Make sure that there are no persons orobjects in the area in which you are maneu-vering. It may be necessary to enlist the helpof a second person when maneuvering.

The reverse warning feature is a systemdesigned to assist you in ensuring the safetyof other road users.A warning signal sounds to alert other roadusers when reverse gear is engaged. The vol-ume of the warning tone can be reduced fornight-time driving.X To reduce the volume of the warningtone: engage reverse gear twice in quicksuccession.The warning tone is now quieter.

i The warning tone sounds at a normal vol-ume by default. The volume of the warningtone has to be reduced each time youengage reverse gear if necessary.

140 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart.The starter motor canbe heard.

There is air in the fuel system.X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock beforeattempting to start the engine again.

X Start the engine again.Please bear in mind that lengthy and frequent starting attemptswill drain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart.The starter motor canbe heard. The reservefuel warning lamp is litand the fuel gage is at0.

The fuel tank has been run dry.X Refuel the vehicle.If you drive until the fuel tank is completely empty, air may get intothe fuel system. If the engine does not start after refueling, bleedthe fuel system as follows:X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition for approximately10 seconds.

X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds.

If the engine does not start:X Wait approximately 2 minutes.X Restart the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds.X If the engine still fails start, do not continue trying to start it.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The vehicle cannot bedriven at a speedexceeding 5 mph(8 km/h).The yellow; enginediagnostic lamp andthe yellowå DEFindicator lamp2 lightup.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment is faulty, an emission-relevantmalfunction has occurred or the DEF reserve has been used up.This malfunction or defect can damage the exhaust gas after-treatment.X Observe the messages in the display:Ron vehicles without steering-wheel buttons (Y page 200)Ron vehicles with steering-wheel buttons (Y page 211) and(Y page 211).

The engine does notstart.The starter motor can-not be heard.

The battery isolating switch is switched off.X Switch on the power supply (Y page 137).

2 Only vehicles without steering-wheel buttons.

Driving 141

Drivingandparking

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart.The starter motor can-not be heard.

The on-board voltage is too low. The battery is too weak or dis-charged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 276).

If the engine cannot be jump-started, the starter motor is faulty.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart.The starter motor can-not be heard.

The battery is discharged or faulty.X Check the battery for damage.X Charge the battery (Y page 263).

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmay roll only briefly in the neutral positionN. Prolonged rolling of the wheels, e.g.when being towed, will result in transmis-sion damage.

i Be sure to observe the instructions in the"Tow-starting and towing away" section(Y page 277).

Selector lever

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe display in the instrument cluster showsthe present selector lever position or the cur-rent shift range:Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons(Y page 187)Ron vehicles without steering wheel buttons(Y page 182)

142 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Selector lever positions

B Park positionThis prevents the vehicle from roll-ing away when stopped. Only movethe selector lever to P if the vehicleis stationary.You can only remove the key whenthe selector lever is in this position.The selector lever is locked in posi-tion P if the key is removed.The parking lock should not beused as a brake when parking.Always apply the parking brake aswell once you have parked the vehi-cle.

C Reverse gearOnly move the selector lever to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels. Releas-ing the brakes will allow you tomove the vehicle freely, e.g. bypushing.Do notmove the selector lever toNwhile driving. The automatic trans-mission could otherwise be dam-aged.If ASR is deactivated or ESP® hasmalfunctioned: only move theselector lever to N if the vehicle isin danger of skidding, e.g. on icyroads.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear itself. All forwardgears are available.You can influence the gearshiftsand shift gears yourself or limit theshift range.

Changing gearThe 5-speed automatic transmission adaptsto your individual driving style by continu-ously adjusting its shift points. These shiftpoint adjustments take into account the cur-rent operating and driving conditions. If theoperating or driving conditions change, theautomatic transmission reacts by adjustingthe gearshift program.When the selector lever is in position D, theautomatic transmission selects the individualgears automatically. This depends on:Rany restriction in the shift range(Y page 144)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

TouchshiftWhen the selector lever is in position D, youcan perform gearshifts yourself.X To shift down: press the selector lever tothe left towards D–.The automatic transmission shifts to thenext gear down, depending on the gear cur-rently engaged. The shift range is alsorestricted.i The automatic transmission does not shiftdown if you press the selector levertowards D– while traveling at too high aspeed. This protects the engine from over-revving.

X To shift up: briefly press the selector leverto the right towards D+.The automatic transmission shifts to thenext gear up, depending on the currentgearshift program. This also extends theshift range.

Automatic transmission 143

Drivingandparking

Z

X To derestrict the shift range: press andhold the selector lever towards D+ until DDappears in the display again.The automatic transmission shifts from thecurrent shift range directly to D.

X To select the optimum shift range: pressand hold the selector lever to the lefttowards D–.The automatic transmission will shift to arange which allows easy acceleration anddeceleration. To do this, the automatictransmission will shift down one or moregears.

Shift rangesWhen the selector lever is in position D youcan restrict or derestrict the shift range forthe automatic transmission.X To derestrict/restrict the shift range:press the selector lever briefly to the righttowards D+ or left towards D–.The display shows the selected shift range.The automatic transmission shifts only asfar as the relevant gear.i If the maximum engine speed for therestricted shift range is reached and youdepress the accelerator pedal, the auto-matic transmission will not shift up.

Driving situations

5 Use the braking effect of the engineon steep downhill gradients and fordriving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 Use the braking effect of the engineon extremely steep downhill gradi-ents and long downhill stretches.

Driving tips

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRlots of throttle: later upshifts

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration:X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to thenext gear down, depending on the enginespeed.

X Ease off on the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts up again.

ManeuveringManeuvering in a tight space:X Control the vehicle's speed by brakingcarefully.

X Depress the accelerator pedal slightly andevenly.

i You can shift back and forth betweendrive position D and reverse gear R at lowspeeds without applying the brakes. Thiscan help you, for example when rapidlymaneuvering the vehicle or rocking it out ofsnow or slush.

Towing a trailerX Drive at moderate engine speeds on steepuphill gradients.

X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradi-ent, shift down to a shift range adapted tothe driving situation (Y page 144), even ifcruise control is activated.

144 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The transmission mal-functions when shiftinggear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

The acceleration char-acteristics have deter-iorated noticeably.The transmission doesnot shift.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear or reverse gear R.X Stop the vehicle.X Depress the brake pedal.X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.X Depress the brake pedal.X Move the selector lever to position D or R.In position D, the transmission shifts into second gear; in posi-tion R, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Releasing the parking lock manuallyIn the event of a malfunction, it is possible tomanually release the selector lever from thelock in parking position P, e.g. to have thevehicle towed away.

X Apply the parking brake.X Remove cover:.X Slide implement; as far as it will go intothe opening.

X Push the implement in and simultaneouslymove the selector lever out of position P.The selector lever lock is released. You cannow move the selector lever freely againuntil it is returned to position P.

X Remove implement;.X Re-install cover:.

i The screwdriver from the vehicle tool kitcould function as the implement, forinstance (Y page 274).

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. Improper handling offuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creatingsparks under all circumstances. Switch off the

Refueling 145

Drivingandparking

Z

engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heatingbefore refueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGIf you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

H Environmental noteIf fuels are handled improperly, they pose adanger to persons and the environment. Donot allow fuels to run into the sewage system,the surface waters, the ground water or intothe ground.

! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles witha diesel engine. Even small amounts of gas-oline will cause damage to the fuel systemand engine.

! Do not switch on the ignition if you acci-dentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Other-wise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notifya qualified specialist workshop and havethe fuel tank and fuel lines drained com-pletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Filter the fuel before transferring it to thevehicle if you are refueling the vehicle frombarrels or containers.This will prevent malfunctions in the fuelsystem due to contaminated fuel.

Further information on fuel and on fuel gradescan be found in the "Technical data" section(Y page 318).

Refueling procedure

The fuel filler flap is on the left side of thevehicle behind the front door. It is only pos-sible to open the fuel filler flap when the frontdoor is open.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Switch off the auxiliary heating system(Y page 122).

X Open the front left-hand door first, and thenthe fuel filler flap.

X Close all vehicle doors to prevent fuelvapors from entering the vehicle.

146 RefuelingDrivingandparking

X Turn fuel filler cap; counter-clockwise,remove it and let it hang from strap:.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank and refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off. Fuel may otherwise leak out.

X Replace tank filler cap; on tank and turnclockwise.You will hear a click when the fuel filler capis closed fully.

X Open the front left-hand door first, and thenclose the filler flap.

Problems with the fuel and fuel tankIf your vehicle is losing fuel, the fuel lines orthe fuel tank are defective.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock immediately and remove it.

X Do not restart the engine under any cir-cumstances.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the fuel tank has been run dry, after refuel-ing carry out the following steps:X Before starting the engine: switch on theignition three or four times.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).The% preglow indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up briefly.

X Once the%preglow indicator lampgoesout, turn the key to position3 in the ignitionlock and release it as soon as the engine isrunning.

You can start the diesel engine without pre-glow when the engine is warm.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)

Important safety notes

H Environmental noteDispose of DEF in an environmentally respon-sible manner.

! Only use DEF in accordance withISO22241.Nevermix DEFwith additives orthin it with tapwater. The exhaust gas after-treatment may otherwise be damaged.Observe the MB Specifications for ServiceProducts, Sheet 352.0.Damage that results from the use of addi-tives or tap water leads to the loss of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

! If DEF comes into contact with a paintedor aluminum surface, wash the surface offimmediately with plenty of water.

! DEF is not a diesel additive and must notbe mixed with fuel in the tank. Even smallamounts of DEF can cause engine damage.Damage that results from the blending ofDEF will not be covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment requires areducing agent, Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF), inorder to function correctly.When opening the DEF tank filler cap at highoutside temperatures, ammonia vapors mayescape.Ammonia vapors have a pungent smell andprimarily cause irritation of the:RskinRmucous membranesReyesYou may experience a burning sensation inyour eyes, nose and throat, as well as cough-ing and watering of the eyes.Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Avoid contactwith DEF.Do not allow DEF to come into direct contactwith your skin; it is hazardous to your health.

Refueling 147

Drivingandparking

Z

Rinse any affected areas off with plenty ofclean water. Consult a doctor if necessary.

i If the DEF level has dropped below thereserve range, add at least 2.0 US gal(7.6 l) of DEF at the latest after receiving thesecond warning message (Y page 182).

i If you switch off the engine at a low out-side temperature and add DEF, restart theengine after refueling. If you leave the vehi-cle parked without restarting the engineand theDEF freezes in the DEF tank, the on-board computer will only be able to registerthe new fill level after a defrosting period ofup to 60 minutes. During this time theengine may only be operated in neutral.

You will find further information on DEF in the"Service products" section (Y page 318).

Refueling procedure

DEF filler neckNon-lockable DEF filler cap

Example: DEF filler cap in the engine compartmentX To open: switch off the ignition.X Open the hood (Y page 248).X Turn filler cap: counter-clockwise andremove it.

X To close: replace cap: on the filler neckand turn it clockwise.You will hear a click when cap: is fullyclosed.

X Close the hood (Y page 249).

Lockable filler cap

Example: DEF filler cap in the engine compartment

X To open: switch off the ignition.X Open the hood (Y page 248).X Remove tool? for unlocking tank fillercap: from the footwell on the co-driver'sside (Y page 274).

X Pull cover= up, turn 90° and release.X Insert tool? into hole; of tank fillercap:.

X Turn filler cap: counter-clockwise andremove it. Make sure that tool? remainsin tank filler cap: while doing so.

X To close: replace filler cap: and turn itclockwise until closed.

X Pull tool? out of tank filler cap: andstow with the vehicle tool kit in the footwellon the co-driver's side.

X Pull cover= up over hole; of tank fillercap:, turn and release.

X Turn tank filler cap:.If tank filler cap: turns freely, the DEFtank is closed.

148 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! A moving vehicle can lead to damage tothe vehicle or damage to the drive train.

! When the vehicle is parked, alwaysremove the key to prevent the battery frombecoming discharged.

On vehicles with a battery isolating switch,switch off the power supply if the vehicle isto be out of use for a longer period of time.

Always park your vehicle safely and accordingto legal requirements and secure it againstrolling away.To ensure that the vehicle is properly securedagainst rolling away unintentionally:Rthe parking brake must be firmly appliedRthe selector lever must be in position P andthe key must be removed from the ignitionlockRon steep uphill or downhill gradients, thefront wheels must be turned towards thecurbRthe rear axle must be secured, e.g. with awheel chock, on steep uphill or downhillgradients

Use the wheel chock (Y page 151) to do so.If you leave the vehicle parked for more thanthree weeks:Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger orRdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery orRswitch off the electrical system using thebattery main switch (Y page 137) andRdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary batteryOtherwise, you need to check the battery'scondition of charge every three weeks, sincestandby power consumption can drain thebattery. If the battery voltage is lower than12.2 V, the battery must be charged. Other-wise, the battery may be damaged by exhaus-tive discharging.Be sure to observe the notes on disconnect-ing and charging the batteries under "Bat-tery“ (Y page 258). You can obtain informa-tion about trickle chargers from a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Parking 149

Drivingandparking

Z

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-cle when the service brake is faulty. Do notapply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

The brake lamps are not illuminatedwhen youbrake the vehicle using the parking brake.As a rule, you may only apply the parkingbrake when the vehicle is stationary.

X To apply the parking brake: pull brakelever: up as far as the last possibledetent.Thec warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up if the engine is running.i On vehicles with a folding brake lever, youcan then press lever: down to the stop.

X To release the parking brake: on vehicleswith a folding brake lever, first pull brakelever: up to the stop.

X Raise brake lever: slightly and pressrelease knob;.

X Guide brake lever: down to the stop.Thec indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Exceptionally, if the service brake fails, theparking brake can be used to brake the vehi-cle in an emergency.X Emergency braking: press and holdrelease button; and carefully apply brakelever:.

Switching off the engine

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

! If the coolant temperature is very high,e.g. after driving on hilly roads, leave theengine running at idle speed for abouttwo minutes before turning it off.This allows the coolant temperature toreturn to normal.

X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

150 ParkingDrivingandparking

X Apply the parking brake.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway (Y page 149).

Wheel chockUse the wheel chock or a similar object toprevent the vehicle from rolling away, e.g.when parking or changing a wheel.

Wheel chock in the load/passenger compartmentX To remove the wheel chock on CargoVans/Passenger Vans: pull restrainingcable: down a little and remove it fromretainer;.

X Remove the chock.i When stowing the wheel chock, makesure that restraining cable: is holding itsecurely in retainer;.

Wheel chock to the rear of the chassis on the leftside of the vehicle (example)

X To remove the wheel chock on CabChassis: pull the locking springs down andremove the wheel chock.i When stowing the wheel chock, makesure that it is secured in the retainer withthe locking springs.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you park your vehicle for longer thanthree weeks:Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger orRdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery orRswitch off the electrical system using thebattery main switch (Y page 137) andRdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary batteryOtherwise, you need to check the battery'scondition of charge every three weeks, sincestandby power consumption can drain thebattery. If the battery voltage is lower than12.2 V, the battery must be charged. Other-wise, the battery may be damaged by exhaus-tive discharging.Be sure to observe the notes on disconnect-ing and charging the batteries under "Bat-tery“ (Y page 258). You can obtain informa-tion about trickle chargers from a qualifiedspecialist workshop.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than6 weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use. In this event, consult aqualified specialist workshop.

Driving tips

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe driver's attention to the roadmust alwaysbe his/her primary focus when driving. Foryour safety and the safety of others, we rec-ommend that you pull over to a safe locationand stop before placing or taking a telephone

Driving tips 151

Drivingandparking

Z

call. If you choose to use the telephone whiledriving, please use the hands-free device andonly use the telephone when road, weatherand traffic conditions permit.Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle coversa distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)every second.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

! Always observe the ground clearance ofthe vehicle and avoid obstacles. On vehi-cleswith a step, ground clearance is furtherrestricted. Obstacles can damage the vehi-cle.If youmust drive over obstacles, drive espe-cially slowly and carefully. If necessary,have another person direct you.

Drive sensibly – save fuelIn order to save fuel, observe the followingtips:X The tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof carriers when they are notneeded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases when driv-ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and inmountainous terrain.

Overrun cutoffIf you are in overrun mode and take your footoff the accelerator pedal, the fuel supply is cutoff when the engine speed is out of the idlespeed control range.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent are greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous substances in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work optimally if they aremaintained exactly in accordance with themanufacturer's specifications. Any work onthe engine should therefore be carried out byqualified and authorized technicians at aSprinter dealer.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. In addition, all spe-

152 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

cificmaintenanceworkmust be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theservice requirements of the dealer listed hereon the inside title page. Details can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.

Short journey! If the vehicle is predominantly used forshort-distance driving or is stationary forlong periods, this could lead to a malfunc-tion in the automatic cleaning function forthe diesel particle filter. This can lead toblockage of the diesel particle filter. Thiscan also result in fuel collecting in theengine oil and cause engine failure.

Therefore, if youmainly drive short distances,drive on a highway or an inter-urban road for20 minutes every 300 miles (500 km). Thisfacilitates the diesel particle filter's burn-offprocess.

Speed limiter

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

As the driver, you must find out about themaximum speed of the vehicle and the result-ing permissible maximum speed of the tires(tire and tire pressure). In particular, alsoobserve the tire approval regulations for eachcountry.You must not exceed the speed limit for thetires listed in the tire pressure tables. You canfind information on tire pressures in the"Wheels and tires" section (Y page 288).

You can permanently limit the maximumspeed of your vehicle to 55 mph (90 km/h),60 mph (100 km/h) or 75 mph (120 km/h).We recommend that you use an authorizedSprinter Dealer for the programming of themaximum speed.Before overtaking, take into considerationthat the engine speed limiter prevents thespeed increasing beyond the programmedmaximum speed.

Driving abroad

ServiceAn extensive network of authorized SprinterDealers is also at your disposal when you aretraveling abroad. Nevertheless, please bear inmind that service facilities or replacementparts may not always be immediately availa-ble. You can obtain a list of workshops at anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

FuelIn some countries, only fuels with a highersulfur content are available.Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.Information on fuel (Y page 318).

Low-beam headlampsIf you are traveling in countries where vehi-cles are driven on the opposite side of theroad to that in which the vehicle is registered,you will need to:Rhave the halogen headlamps partiallymaskedRhave the Bi-Xenon headlamps set to sym-metrical low beam

This prevents glare to oncoming traffic and nolonger illuminates the edge of the road to thesame height and distance.Have the headlamps masked or adjusted at aqualified specialist workshop before youcross the border, but as close to it as possi-ble.

Driving tips 153

Drivingandparking

Z

When you return from your journey, and asclose to the border as possible, you will needto:Rremove the adhesive surfaces from yourhalogen headlamps and clean the glass ofthe headlamps if necessaryRhave the Bi-Xenon headlamps reset toasymmetrical low beam at a qualified spe-cialist workshop

Transport by railTransporting your vehicle by rail may be sub-ject to certain restrictions or require specialmeasures to be taken in some countries dueto varying tunnel heights and loading stand-ards.You can obtain further information from anyauthorized Sprinter dealer.

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

Downhill gradients

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

On long and steep downhill gradients, youshould change down to shift range2 or1in good time. This should be observed in par-ticular when driving with a laden vehicle andwhen towing a trailer.

i You must also change the shift range ingood time when cruise control is switchedon.

You thereby make use of the braking effect ofthe engine and do not have to brake as oftento maintain the speed. This relieves the loadon the service brake and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. The brakes arecooled down more quickly in the airflow.

Wet road surfacesIf you have been driving for a long time inheavy rain without braking, there may be adelayed response when you first apply thebrakes. This may also occur after drivingthrough a car wash or deep water.

154 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

You must depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a longer distance to the vehi-cle in front.While paying attention to the traffic condi-tions, you should brake the vehicle firmlyafter driving on a wet road surface or througha car wash. This heats the brake discs, so thatthey dry more quickly, which protects themagainst corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsWhen driving on salted roads, salt may startto build up on the brake disks and brake pads.This can increase braking distances consid-erably.Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle infront.To remove any build up of salt that may haveformed:X Apply the brakes at the start of the journey,occasionally during journey and at the endof the journey. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-cle when the service brake is faulty. Do notapply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

When driving on wet roads or dirt-coveredsurfaces, road salt and/or dirt may get intothe parking brake. This causes corrosion anda reduction of braking force.In order to prevent this, drive with the parkingbrake lightly applied from time to time. Whendoing so, drive for a distance of approximately

110 yds (100 m) at a maximum speed of12 mph (20 km/h).The brake lamps are not illuminatedwhen youbrake the vehicle using the parking brake.

Driving in wet conditions

Hydroplaning

G WARNINGThere is a danger of hydroplaning occurring,even if you are driving slowly and your tireshave sufficient tread depth, depending on thedepth of water on the road. There is a risk ofan accident.For this reason, avoid tire ruts and brake care-fully.

Therefore, in heavy rain or other conditions inwhich hydroplaning can occur, drive as fol-lows:Rreduce your speedRavoid tire rutsRapply the brakes with care

Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electronic compo-nents in the engine or the automatic trans-mission. Water can also be drawn in by theengine's air suction nozzles and this cancause engine damage.

If you have to drive on stretches of road onwhich water has collected, please bear inmind that:Rthewater level of standingwater should notbe above the lower edge of the frontbumperRdo not drive faster than walking speed

Driving tips 155

Drivingandparking

Z

Driving in winter

General notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop in good time at the onsetof winter.

i Do not cover the radiator, e.g. with a win-ter cover. The measurements of the on-board diagnostic system may otherwisereturn inaccurate values. Some of thesevalues are legally prescribed and musttherefore always be exact.

Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 286).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G WARNINGThe outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmay roll only briefly in the neutral positionN. Prolonged rolling of the wheels, e.g.when being towed, will result in transmis-sion damage.

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to neutral positionN.

X Try to maintain control of the vehicle usingcorrective steering.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery roads.Avoid sudden acceleration, steering andbraking maneuvers. Do not use cruise con-trol.You can find further information on wintertires and snow chains in the "Winter opera-tion" section (Y page 286).

Driving off-road

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is arisk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

156 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

G WARNINGWhen driving off-road, your body is subject toforces from all directions, due to the unevensurface. You could be thrown from your seat,for instance. There is a risk of injury.Alwayswear a seat belt, evenwhendriving off-road.

G WARNINGIf you drive over obstacles or in ruts, the steer-ing wheel may jerk out of your grip, causinginjury to your hands.Always hold the steering wheel firmly withboth hands. When driving over obstacles, youmust expect steering forces to increasebriefly and suddenly.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contact withhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

! When driving off-road or on unpaved sur-faces, check the underside of the vehicleand the wheels and tires at regular inter-vals. In particular, remove any trapped for-eign objects, e.g. stones and branches.Such foreign objects may:Rdamage the chassis, the fuel tank or thebrake systemRcause imbalances and thus vibrationsRbe flung out when you continue drivingIf there is any damage, inform a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

When driving off-road and on constructionsites, sand, mud and water mixed with oil, forexample, may get into the brakes. This maylead to a reduction in braking performance or

total brake failure, also as a result ofincreased wear. The braking characteristicswill vary depending on the material that hasgot into the system. Clean the brakes afterdriving off-road. If you then notice reducedbraking performance or hear scraping noises,have the brake system checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Adjust your driving styleto the changed braking characteristics.Driving off-road or on construction sitesincreases the possibility of vehicle damagewhichmay in turn lead to the failure of certainassemblies and systems. Adapt your drivingstyle to the off-road driving conditions. Drivecarefully. Have any vehicle damage rectifiedat a qualified specialist workshop as soon aspossible.When driving on rough terrain, do not shift thetransmission into the neutral position. Youcould lose control when attempting to brakethe vehicle with the service brake. If yourvehicle cannot manage an uphill slope, driveback down the slope in reverse gear.When loading your vehicle for driving off-roador on a construction site, keep the vehicle'scenter of gravity as low as possible.

Checklist before driving off-roadX Check the fuel and DEF levels (Y page 181)and top up (Y page 148).

X Engine: check the oil level (Y page 250)and add oil (Y page 252).Before driving up or down steep gradients,fill the oil to the maximum level.i If you drive up or down steep gradients,the4 symbolmay appear in the display.The engine operating safety is not put atrisk if you have filled the engine oil to themaximum level before the journey.

X Vehicle tool kit: check that the jack isworking (Y page 274).

X Make sure that a lug wrench (Y page 274),wooden underlay for the jack, a robust tow

Driving tips 157

Drivingandparking

Z

cable and a folding spade are carried in thevehicle.

X Wheels and tires: check the tire treaddepth (Y page 285) and tire pressure(Y page 288).

Rules for driving off-road

! Always bear the vehicle's ground clear-ance inmind and avoid obstacles, e.g. deepruts.Obstacles may damage the following partsof the vehicle:Rthe chassisRthe drive trainRthe fuel and supply tanksFor this reason, you should always driveslowly when driving off-road. If you have todrive over obstacles, have the co-driverdirect you.

i We recommend that you additionallycarry a shovel and a recovery rope withshackle in the vehicle.REnsure that loads and items of luggage aresecurely stowed or lashed down(Y page 240).RBefore driving off-road, stop the vehicle andshift to a low gear.RIf the surface demands it, temporarily deac-tivate ASR when pulling away (Y page 58).ROnly drive off-road with the engine runningand a gear engaged.RDrive slowly and smoothly. Walking pace isnecessary in many situations.RAvoid spinning the drive wheels.RMake sure that thewheels always remain incontact with the ground.RDrive with extreme care over unknown ter-rain where you can only see for a short dis-tance. As a precaution, get out of the vehi-cle to take a look at the route to be taken inadvance.RCheck the water depth before fording.

RWatch out for obstacles (e.g. rocks, holes,tree stumps and ruts).RAvoid edges where the surface could crum-ble or break away.

Checklist after driving off-road

! If you detect damage to the vehicle afterdriving off-road, have the vehicle checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Off-road driving places a higher demand onyour vehicle than normal road operation.Check your vehicle after driving on rough ter-rain. By doing so youwill notice any damage ingood time and reduce the risk of an accidentfor yourself and other road users. Clean yourvehicle thoroughly before driving on publicroads.Observe the following points after driving off-road, on construction sites and before drivingon public roads:X Activate ASR (Y page 58).X Clean the headlamps and tail lamps andcheck them for damage.

X Clean the front and rear license plates.X Clean thewindshield, windows and exteriormirrors.

X Clean the steps, door sills and grab han-dles.This increases safety of footing.

X Clean the wheels/tires, wheel housingsand the underbody of the vehicle with awater jet.This increases road grip, especially on wetroad surfaces.

X Check the wheels/tires and wheel hous-ings for trapped foreign objects andremove them.Trapped foreign objects can damage thewheels/tires andmay be flung out from thevehicle when you continue driving.

X Check the underbody for trapped branchesor other parts of plants and remove them.Trapped branches or other parts of plantsincrease the risk of fire and can cause dam-

158 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

age to fuel lines, brake hoses and the rub-ber bellows of axle joints and drive shafts.

X Clean the brake disks, brake pads and axlejoints, particularly after operation in sand,mud, grit/gravel, water or similarly dirtyconditions.

X Check the entire floor assembly, the tires,wheels, bodywork structure, brakes, steer-ing, chassis and exhaust system for anydamage.

X Check the service brake for operatingsafety, e.g. carry out a brake test.

X If you notice strong vibrations after drivingoff-road, check the wheels and drive trainfor foreign objects again. Remove any for-eign objects which can lead to imbalancesand thus cause vibrations.

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains the speed of thevehicle for you.Use cruise control if road and traffic condi-tionsmake it appropriate tomaintain a steadyspeed for a prolonged period. You can set anyspeed from 20mph upwards in increments of1 mph.

i If you have set km/h as the unit for thedigital speedometer (Y page 190), you canset any speed from 30 km/h upwards inincrements of 1 km/h.

Cruise control should not be activated whendriving off-road or on construction sites.Cruise controlmay not be able tomaintain thestored speed on uphill or downhill gradients.If the gradient evens out and the vehicle'sspeed does not fall below 20 mph (30 km/h),the stored speed is resumed.

Important safety notesObserve the notes on braking (Y page 154).If you fail to adapt your driving style or if youare inattentive, cruise control can neitherreduce the risk of an accident nor override thelaws of physics. Cruise control cannot takeroad, weather and traffic conditions intoaccount. Cruise control is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin traffic conditions that are unsuitable fordriving at a constant speed, e.g. in heavytraffic, on winding roads or off-road.Ron slippery roads. Braking or acceleratingmay cause the drive wheels to lose tractionand the vehicle could then skid.Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow.

If there is a change of drivers, make sure thatyou inform the new driver about the set cruisespeed.

Cruise control lever

: To activate and store the current speed ora higher speed

; To activate at the last stored speed= To activate and store the current speed or

a lower speed? To deactivate cruise controlThe cruise control lever is the upper lever onthe left of the steering column.

Driving systems 159

Drivingandparking

Z

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe parking brake must be released. Thec indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter is offRyou are driving faster than 20 mph(30 km/h)Rneither the brake or clutch pedal isdepressed

i Other drive and brake systems not descri-bed in this Operator's Manual, such as aretarder, may affect cruise control. You canfind information on this in the separateoperating instructions provided by thebody manufacturer.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedX Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speedabove 20 mph (30 km/h).

X Briefly push the cruise control lever up:or down=.

X Release the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated. The currentspeed is stored.

Setting the speedIt may be a moment before the vehicle startsto accelerate or brake to the set speed. Takethis delay into account when setting thespeed.X Briefly push the cruise control lever up:to increase the speed or down= to reducethe speed.The last stored speed increases or decrea-ses in 1 mph increments (1 km/h incre-ments).

orX Press and hold the cruise control leverup: or down= until the desired speedhas been reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The current speed is stored.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-erate briefly to overtake, for example,cruise control resumes the vehicle’s speedto the last speed stored after you have fin-ished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are various ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards?.

orX Apply the brakes.The last speed set remains stored. The lastspeed stored is deleted when you switch offthe engine.Cruise control is deactivated automaticallywhen:Ryou apply the brakesRyou apply the parking brake and thecindicator lamp in the instrument clusterlights upRyou are driving slower than 20 mph(30 km/h)Ryou shift the automatic transmission toneutral position N while the vehicle is inmotionRESP® or ASR intervenesRthere is a malfunction in the ESP®, ASR orABS system

160 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Problems with cruise control

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

On vehicles with steer-ing wheel buttons, thespeed cannot be setwhen cruise control isactivated.

The display shows a high-prioritymessage. Thus a change in speedis not possible.X Proceed as instructed by the message in the display.X Deactivate cruise control

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

General notesCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST comprisesthe distance warning function and adaptiveBrake Assist.

Distance warning function

Important safety notesi Note the section on 'Important safetynotes' (Y page 57).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

OperationThe distancewarning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision witha vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of sucha collision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically. With-out your intervention, the distance warningfunction cannot prevent a collision.The distance warning function will issue awarning at speeds of around 20 mph(30 km/h) or more if:Ryou approach a vehicle ahead of you veryquickly. You will then hear an intermittentwarning tone and theÄwarning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes.

X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

If you want the distance warning function toassist you, the functionmust be activated andoperational.Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated driving conditionsmay cause thesystem to display an unnecessary warning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obsta-cles that are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.

Driving systems 161

Drivingandparking

Z

Up to a speed of about 45mph (70 km/h), thedistance warning function can also react tostationary obstacles, such as stopped orparked vehicles.If you approach an obstacle and the distancewarning function detects a risk of a collision,the system will alert you both visually andacoustically.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired in the case of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRit is snowing or raining heavilyRthere is interference from other radar sour-cesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineFollowing damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at slow speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating the distancewarning functionWhen you switch on the engine, the distancewarning function switches on after a few sec-onds.X To deactivate: press theæ button(Y page 37).Vehicles without steering wheel but-tons: theÄ warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up and the OFFOFFmessageflashes.Vehicles with steering wheel buttons:theÄ warning lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up and the Distance Warn‐Distance Warn‐ing Deactivateding Deactivated message appears.

X To activate: press theæ button again(Y page 37).Vehicles without steering wheel but-tons: theÄ warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out and the ONONmessageflashes.Vehicles with steering wheel buttons:theÄ warning lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out and the Distance Warn‐Distance Warn‐ing Activateding Activated message appears in themultifunction display.

Adaptive Brake Assist

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 57).

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRto stationary obstaclesRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

162 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Adaptive Brake Assist aids you when brakingduring hazardous situations at speeds above20 mph (30 km/h). With the help of AdaptiveBrake Assist, the distance warning signal candetect obstacles that are in the path of yourvehicle for an extended period of time.When you approach an obstacle and adaptiveBrake Assist detects that there is a risk of acollision, adaptive Brake Assist calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a collision.Should you apply the brakes forcefully, adap-tive Brake Assist will automatically increasethe braking force to the calculated level.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes function as usual again if:Ryou release the brake pedalRthere is no longer any danger of a collisionRno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.Up to the maximum vehicle speed, adaptiveBrake Assist can react to moving obstaclesthat have already been recognized as such atleast once over the period of observation.Adaptive Brake Assist does not react to sta-tionary obstacles.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRit is snowing or raining heavilyRthere is interference from other radar sour-cesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineIf adaptive Brake Assist is not available due toa malfunction in the radar sensor system, thefull brake boosting effect with the help of BASremains available.

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at slow speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

Lane Tracking package

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from speeds ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in the moni-tored area. If you then switch on the corre-sponding turn signal to change lane, you willalso receive an optical and audible collisionwarning. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assistuses sensors in the rear bumper and behindthe protective strips of the B-pillars.

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotive

Driving systems 163

Drivingandparking

Z

radar system only. Removal, tampering, oraltering of the device will void any warran-ties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Donot tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired in the case of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-ing the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRnarrow and short vehicles, e.g. motorcy-cles or bicyclesRvery wide lanesRnarrow lanesRvehicles not driving in the middle of theirlaneRbarriers or other road boundariesVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area approx-imately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle andapproximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft (3.5 m)each side of it. For this purpose, Blind SpotAssist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper

and behind the protective strips of the B-pil-lars.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if the vehicles are driving on the innerside of their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Ra clear warning situation may not occur.The yellow indicator lamp on the relevantside of the vehicle will then light up.Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, forexample trucks, for a prolonged time.

The four sensors of Blind Spot Assist are inte-grated into the rear bumper and behind theprotective strips of the B-pillars. Make surethat the bumper and protective stripping arefree of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of thesensors. The radar sensors must not be cov-ered, for example by cycle racks or overhang-ing loads.Have the function of the radar sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop:Rafter a severe impactRafter damage to the bumperRafter damage to the protective strips of theB-pillars

Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not workproperly.

Indicator and warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.

164 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampIf yellow indicator lamp: lights up:Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h)RBlind Spot Assist is deactivatedRBlind Spot Assist is malfunctioningRthere is no clear warning, depending on thesituation

Blind Spot Assist is active from a speed of20 mph (30 km/h). If a vehicle is detected inthe blind spot monitoring range, red warninglamp: on the corresponding side lights up.This warning occurswhen a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 14 mph (22 km/h).Yellow indicator lamp: goes out if reversegear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is thendeactivated.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds once. Red warning lamp:flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detec-ted vehicles are indicated by the flashing ofred warning lamp:. There are no furtherwarning tones.

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assisti Blind Spot Assist is activated when youswitch on the ignition.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 secondsand then turn yellow.

XTo deactivate: press the button inthe center console (Y page 37).The yellow indicator lamp in exterior mir-ror: first flashes and then lights up con-tinuously.

XTo activate: press the button in thecenter console again (Y page 37).The yellow indicator lamp in exterior mir-ror: flashes initially. If you exceed20 mph (30 km/h) while driving, the yellowindicator lamp in exterior mirror: goesout.

Towing a trailerIf you attach a trailer,make sure that you havecorrectly established the electrical connec-tion. This can be accomplished by checkingthe trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is deac-tivated as a result. The indicator lamp in theexterior mirrors lights up yellow.On vehicles with steering wheel buttons, theBlind Spot Assist DeactivatedBlind Spot Assist Deactivated mes-sage also appears in the display.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notesLane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of a camera atthe top of thewindshield. LaneKeepingAssistdetects lane markings on the road and warnsyou before you leave your lane unintention-ally.

Driving systems 165

Drivingandparking

Z

: Lane Keeping Assist cameraLane Keeping Assist supports you fromspeeds of approximately 40 mph(60 km/h).

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountroad, weather or traffic conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is only an aid. You are respon-sible for the distance to the vehicle in front,for vehicle speed, braking in good time and forstaying in your lane.Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi-cle in its lane.

The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rif the vehicle is incorrectly loaded(Y page 240)Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflection from other vehicles(e.g. if the road surface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRno, or several, unclear lane markings arepresent for one lane, e.g. in a constructionareaRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are highly variable shade conditionson the road

A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. In addition, awarning tone sounds and theà indicatorlamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistLane Keeping Assist is automatically activa-ted when you start the engine.X To deactivate: press thej button inthe center console (Y page 37).On vehicles without steering wheel but-tons:OFFOFF flashes briefly in the display and theà indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter flashes and then lights up continuously.On vehicles with steering wheel but-tons:

166 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The Lane Keep. Assist DeactivatedLane Keep. Assist Deactivatedmessage appears in the display and theà indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter flashes and then lights up continuously.Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated.

X To activate: press thej button in thecenter console again (Y page 37).On vehicles without steeringwheel but-tons:ONON flashes briefly in the display and theà indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter flashes and then goes out.On vehicles with steering wheel but-tons:The LaneLane Keep.Keep. AssistAssist ActivatedActivatedmes-sage appears in the display and theÃindicator lamp in the instrument clusterflashes and then goes out.Lane Keeping Assist is activated.

A Lane Keeping Assist warning is suppressedif:Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou have set the turn signal and a lanechange is detected. In this case, the warn-ings are suppressed for a certain period oftime.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown on vehi-cles with an automatic transmission.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lane quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognizes certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.Lane Keeping Assist warns you earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a free-way.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.

Warnings are given later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

PARKTRONIC

General notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid. Thesystem is equipped with ultrasonic sensors inthe front and rear bumpers to monitor thearea around your vehicle. PARKTRONIC indi-cates visually and audibly the distancebetween your vehicle and an object.Your vehicle features two separate soundemitters with different frequencies for thewarning tones. The warning ranges in front ofand behind the vehicle are indicated by dif-ferent warning tones.PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rturn the key to position2 in the ignition lockRrelease the parking brake andRmove the selector lever to D, N or RPARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). PARKTRONIC is reactiva-ted at speeds below 10 mph (16 km/h).

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is only an aid. It cannot replaceyour own awareness of the immediate sur-roundings. You are responsible for safemaneuvering, parking and pulling away.Whenmaneuvering, parking and pulling away, makesure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the maneuvering area.

! Pay particular attention to obstaclesabove or below the sensors when parking,such as flower pots or trailer towbars.PARKTRONIC does not recognize suchobjects when they are in the immediatevicinity of the vehicle. You could damagethe vehicle or objects.

Driving systems 167

Drivingandparking

Z

PARKTRONIC can suffer interference from:Rultrasonic sources such as a truck'scompressed-air brakes, an automatic carwash or a pneumatic drillRattachments to the vehicle, e.g. rearmounted racksRnumber plates (vehicle license plates)that are not affixed flat against thebumperRdirty or icy sensors

Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is nolonger required. PARKTRONIC measures theminimumdetection range to an obstacle fromthe bumper, not the ball coupling.

Range of the sensorsPARKTRONIC does not account for obstaclesthat are:Rbeneath its detection range, e.g. persons,animals or objectsRabove its detection range, e.g. overhangingloads, overhangs or truck loading ramps

The sensors must be free of dirt, ice or slush.Otherwise, they cannot function correctly.Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not toscratch or damage them (Y page 268).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 39 in(100 cm)

Corners Approx. 26 in(65 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 71 in(180 cm)

Corners Approx. 39 in(100 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 12 in(30 cm)

Front corner sen-sors

Approx. 10 in(25 cm)

Rear corner sensors Approx. 12 in(30 cm)

If an obstacle is within this range, all seg-ments of thewarning displays light up and youhear a warning tone. If the distance betweenthe vehicle and the obstacle falls below theminimum range, it is possible that the dis-tance may no longer be displayed.

168 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Warning displays

Warning display, front area

Warning display for the left-hand rear area in theleft-hand exterior mirror: Warning segments for the left front area; Warning segments for the right front area= Operational readiness symbol for the

front area? Warning display segmentsA Operational readiness symbol for the rear

areaThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensor and the obstacle.The warning display is divided into five yellowand two red segments for each side of thevehicle. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellowindicator segments= andA are lit.There is a malfunction if only the red seg-ments of the warning display light up(Y page 171).The position of the gear lever determineswhether the front and/or rear area is moni-tored.

Selector leverposition

Monitoring

D Front area

R or N Front and rear area

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment, an intermittent warningtone sounds for approximately 2 seconds.Rseventh segment, a continuous warningtone sounds. This indicates that you havenow reached the minimum distance.

Roll-back warningPARKTRONIC automatically monitors thearea behind the vehicle if the vehicle begins toroll backwards without reverse gear engaged,e.g. after stopping on an uphill gradient.If PARKTRONIC recognizes an obstacle at adistance of at most 31 in (80 cm), all the seg-ments in the warning displays light up. A con-tinuous warning tone also sounds as the vehi-cle approaches the obstacle and for a further2 seconds after the vehicle has come to ahalt.

Activating/deactivating PARKTRONIC

Driving systems 169

Drivingandparking

Z

X Press thef button.If PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the indica-tor lamp in the switch lights up.

Towing a trailerPARKTRONIC detects a coupled trailer if yourvehicle is equipped with the correspondingelectrical installations for trailer towing.PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear areawhen you establish an electrical connectionbetween your vehicle and a trailer. If you usean adapter for the socket, remove it from thesocket after detaching the trailer. Otherwise,PARKTRONIC remains deactivated for therear area.Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is nolonger required. PARKTRONIC measures theminimumdetection range to an obstacle fromthe bumper, not the ball coupling.

170 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.A warning tone alsosounds for approx-imately 2 seconds.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately 20 seconds.The indicator lamp ofthef button lightsup and the red seg-ments in thePARKTRONIC warningdisplay go out.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched itself off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

The PARKTRONICwarning displaysimplausible distances.For example, all thesegments may be liteven though there is noobstacle present.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or iced up.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 268).X Turn the key to position 2 again in the ignition lock.

The license plate or other parts attached near the sensorsmay notbe secured correctly.X Check the license plate and attachment parts near the sensorsfor correct seating.

An external radio or ultrasonic source may be causing interfer-ence.X Check PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Rear view camera

Important safety notes

! Objects that are not at ground levelappear further away than they actually are,for example:Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behindRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe tail-end of a truckRslanted posts

Only use the image from the rear view cam-era as a guide. You may otherwise damageyour vehicle and/or the object.

The rear view camera is only an aid. It cannotreplace your own awareness of the immedi-ate surroundings. You are responsible forsafe maneuvering, parking and pulling away.Whenmaneuvering, parking and pulling away,make sure that there are no persons, animalsor objects in the maneuvering area.The rear view camera is a visual parking aid.Information on operation can be found in theseparate Audio 15 supplement.

Driving systems 171

Drivingandparking

Z

The camera is in the middle of the roof abovethe high-mounted brake lamp (Y page 269).The rear view camera may show obstacles inperspectival distortion, incorrectly or not atall. The rear view camera cannot display allobjects located very near and/or under therear bumper. It does not warn you of a colli-sion, persons or objects.The area behind the vehicle is displayed in amirrored fashion, as in the rear-viewmirror orthe exterior mirrors.The function of the rear view camera may bepartially or completely impaired in the follow-ing circumstances:Rit is raining very heavily or snowing, or it isfoggy.Rthe parking space is located in a very darkplace.Rthe camera is exposed to very strong whitelight. White stripes may appear on the dis-play.Rthe surrounding area is illuminated with flu-orescent light. The display may flicker.Rif the temperature changes very quickly, forexample if you drive into a heated garage inthe winter.Rambient temperatures are very high.Rthe camera lens is dirty or obstructed.Rthe rear of the vehicle is damaged. In thiscase, have the position and settingchecked at a specialist workshop.

The rear view camera is activated when youengage reverse gear R.You can find information on cleaning the cam-era in the "Maintenance and care" section(Y page 269).

Working mode

ADR (working speed governor)

General notesWhen activated, ADR automatically increasesthe engine speed to a preset speed or a speedyou have set.

i After a cold start, the idling speed of theengine is increased automatically. If thepreset working speed is lower than theincreased idling speed, the working speedis only reached once the engine has com-pleted the warm-up phase.It is only possible to activate ADR with thevehicle stationary and the parking brakeapplied.The selector lever of the automatic trans-mission must be in position P.

Activating/deactivating ADR

X To activate: press upper section: of theE switch while the engine is running.The indicator lamp in the switch comes on.TheK indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up or the display shows thefollowing message: Operating speedOperating speedgovernor activegovernor active.

X To deactivate: press lower section; oftheE switch while the engine is run-ning.The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.

172 Working modeDrivingandparking

ADR is automatically deactivated if:Ryou release the parking brake.Rthe brake pedal is depressed.Rthe vehicle moves.Rthe control unit detects a malfunction.

Setting the working speed

X Activate ADR.X To increase: press theE button.X To decrease: press theF button.

Towing a trailer

Notes on trailer towing

Important safety notes

G WARNINGInstalling an unsuitable ball coupling mayresult in overloading of the trailer tow hitchand the rear axle. This applies especially if theball coupling in question is longer or angleddifferently. This could seriously impair thedriving characteristics and the trailer cancome loose. There is a risk of an accident.You should only ever install a ball couplingthat has the permissible dimensions and thatis designed to meet your trailer-towingrequirements. Do not modify the ball couplingor the trailer tow hitch.

G WARNINGIf you use a ball coupling that is not approvedfor your vehicle, it may cause excessive strain

on the trailer tow hitch. This can cause dam-age to the vehicle and the trailer may comeloose during the journey. The handlingmay beimpaired and the rear axlemay be overloaded.This may lead to an accident involving seriousor even fatal injury.Therefore note the following:ROnly install a ball coupling that is approvedfor your vehicle.RBefore the journey, make sure that the ballcoupling is correctly installed and secured.To do this, observe the operating instruc-tions of the ball coupling manufacturer.RDo not make any modifications to the ballcoupling or the trailer tow hitch.

You must observe the operating instructionsof the trailer tow hitch or ball coupling manu-facturer.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not correctly installedand secured, it could come loose while drivingand endanger other road users. There is a riskof an accident and injury.Install and secure the ball coupling as descri-bed in the ball coupling manufacturer's instal-lation instructions. Make sure that the ballcoupling is correctly installed and securedbefore every journey.

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle/trailer combination beginsto lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-cle/trailer combination could even rollover.There is a risk of an accident.On no account should you attempt tostraighten up the vehicle/trailer combinationby increasing the speed. Reduce vehiclespeed and do not countersteer. Apply thebrake as necessary.

Always observe the operating instructionsprovided by the manufacturers of the trailercoupling and the ball coupling.Couple and decouple the trailer carefully.When backing up the towing vehicle, make

Towing a trailer 173

Drivingandparking

Z

sure nobody is standing between the vehicleand the trailer.A trailer which is incorrectly coupled to thetowing vehicle could break away. A correctlycoupled trailer must be positioned horizon-tally behind the towing vehicle.Ensure that the following weights are notexceeded:Rthe permissible noseweightRthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible rear axle load of the towingvehicleRthe permissible gross weight of both thetowing vehicle and the trailerRthe permissible gross combination weightThe applicable permissible values that maynot be exceeded can be found:Rin your vehicle documentsRon the type plates for the trailer tow hitchRon the type plates for the trailerRon the vehicle identification plate(Y page 316).

Where the values differ, the lowest is valid.You will find values approved by the manu-facturer on the identification plates and thosefor the towing vehicle in the "Permissibletrailer loads and trailer drawbar noseweights"section (Y page 177).Your vehicle behaves differently with a trailerthan without one.The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration and gradi-ent-climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis more susceptible to strong crosswindsRrequires more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning circleThis may impair the handling characteristics.When towing a trailer, always adjust yourspeed to suit the road and weather condi-tions. Drive carefully. Maintain a safe dis-tance.

If you require any further explanation of theinformation contained in the Operator's Man-ual, please contact an authorized Sprinterdealer.

General notesRObserve the legally prescribed maximumspeed for vehicle/trailer combinations inthe relevant country, state or Canadianprovince. Before setting off, check the vehi-cle documents of the your trailer to find outthe permissible maximum speed.This reduces the risk of accidents.RInstall only an approved trailer coupling onyour vehicle. Only use a ball coupling that isapproved for your vehicle and Sprintertrailer tow hitch. More information on theavailability,mounting and installation of thetrailer electrics is available at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.RThe turn signals on the trailer are only guar-anteed to function when incandescentbulbs are used. You can obtain more infor-mation about installing the trailer electricsat any qualified specialist workshop.RThe trailer coupling is one of the mostimportant vehicle parts with regard to roadsafety. The notes on operation, care andmaintenance issued by the manufacturershould be observed.RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suita-ble for installing detachable trailer cou-plings.RDo not attach rented trailer tow hitches orother detachable trailer tow hitches to thebumper.RMinimize the risk of damage to the ball cou-pling. If you do not require the ball coupling,remove it from the ball coupling recess.

Weight information can be found in the “Per-missible trailer and drawbar noseweights”section (Y page 177).

i The height of the ball neck changesaccording to the load on the vehicle. If this

174 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

is case, use a trailer with a height-adjusta-ble trailer drawbar.

Driving tipsThe maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combination depends on the type oftrailer. Before setting off, check the vehicledocuments of the your trailer to find out thepermissible maximum speed. Observe thelegally prescribed maximum speed for vehi-cle/trailer combinations in the relevant coun-try, state or Canadian province.When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonto when driving without a trailer and it willconsume more fuel.On long, steep downhill slopes you mustselect shift range 3, 2 or 1 in good time.

i This also applies if cruise control is acti-vated.

This enables you to utilize the engine's brak-ing effect and you do not need to brake soheavily to keep the correct speed, which pro-tects the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly. If you need to brake additionally, tonot depress the brake pedal constantly, butperiodically.

Driving tipsIf the trailer begins to swing from side to side:X Do not accelerate.X Do not counter-steer.X Brake if necessary.i You can reduce the risk of the trailerswinging and rocking by retrofitting anti-roll bars or trailer stability programs. Moreinformation is available from your author-ized Sprinter Dealer.RMaintain a greater distance than you wouldwhen driving without towing a trailer.RAvoid sudden braking. Apply the brakesgently at first to allow the trailer brake to

overrun. Then, increase the brake forcequickly.RThe figures for the gradient climbing capa-bilities from a standstill refer to sea level.When driving in mountainous areas, notethat the power output of the engine, andwith it its gradient climbing capability,decrease with increasing altitude.

Coupling up a trailer! Do not connect the trailer's brake system(if featured) to the hydraulic brake systemof the towing vehicle, as the latter is equip-ped with an anti-lock brake system. Doingso will result in a loss of function of thebrake systems of both the vehicle and thetrailer.

Trailer coupled ready for useX Make sure the selector lever of the auto-matic transmission is in position P.

X Apply the parking brake of the vehicle.X Close all doors.X Position the trailer horizontally behind yourvehicle.i The height of the ball neck changesaccording to the load on the vehicle. In thiscase, use a trailer with a height-adjustabletrailer drawbar.

X Couple the trailer.X Establish all electrical and other connec-tions to the trailer. When doing so, hook thebreakaway cable of the trailer into eye-let: on the ball coupling.

Towing a trailer 175

Drivingandparking

Z

X Remove the objects that are preventing thetrailer from rolling, e.g. wheel chocks.

X Release the trailer parking brake.

i The subharness of the vehicle has a cableconnection to the brake lamp indicatorlamp.

Observe the maximum permissible trailerdimensions (width and length).Most federal states and all Canadian provin-ces require by law:Rsafety chains between the towing vehicleand the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound under the trailer drawbar. Theymustbe fastened to the vehicle's trailer cou-pling, not to the bumper or the axle.Leave enough slack in the chains. Thisallows you to drive round tight corners.Ra separate brake system for certain typesof trailer.Ra safety switch for braked trailers. Find outthe specific requirements according to theapplicable laws.If the trailer detaches from the towing vehi-cle, the safety switch applies the trailer'sbrakes.

Towing a trailerThere are numerous legal requirements con-cerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speedrestrictions. Make sure your vehicle/trailercombination complies with local laws. Thisnot only means where you live, but also any-where you are driving to. Information is avail-able from the police and local authorities.Observe the following when towing a trailer:RPractice driving around bends, stoppingand backing up at a place where there is notraffic. This enables you to gain experience

and get used to the new handling charac-teristics.RBefore driving, check:

- that the trailer tow hitch and ball cou-pling are secure

- that the safety switch for a braked traileris functioning properly

- that the safety chains are secure and notdamaged

- that the electrical connections aresecure

- that the lights are working- that the wheels are in good order and thetire pressure is correct

RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide anunobstructed view of the rear section of thetrailer.RIf the trailer has electronically controlledbrakes, pull the vehicle/trailer combina-tion away carefully. Brake manually usingthe brake controller and check that thebrakes are working.RSecure the load on the trailer according tothe applicable specifications and currentstandards on securing loads (Y page 242).RWhen driving with a trailer, check at regularintervals that the load is secured and thatthe brakes and lights are working.RBear in mind that the handling will be lessstable when towing a trailer thanwhen driv-ing without one. Avoid sudden steeringmovements.RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,accelerates more slowly and has adecreased gradient climbing capability anda longer braking distance.It is more susceptible to crosswinds andrequires cautious steering.RIf possible, do not brake suddenly, butrather moderately at first so that the trailercan activate its brakes. Then increase theforce on the brake pedal.RIf the automatic transmission repeatedlyshifts between gears when driving on

176 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

inclines, restrict the shift range. Select shiftrange 4, 3, 2 or 1.Driving in a low gear and at a low speedreduces the risk of damaging the engine.RWhendriving on a downhill gradient, shift toa low gear and take advantage of theengine's braking effect.Avoid continuous brake application as thismay overheat the vehicle brakes and, ifinstalled, the trailer brakes.RIf the coolant temperature increases dra-matically while the air-conditioning systemis switched on, switch off the air-condition-ing system.Coolant heat can also be dissipated byswitching the airflow and the temperatureof the heater/air conditioning to the maxi-mum level. Open the windows if necessary.RWhen overtaking, pay particular attentionto the extended length of your vehicle/trailer combination.Due to the length of your vehicle/trailercombination you need an additional dis-tance before you can return to your originallane.

Uncoupling a trailer

G WARNINGIf you uncouple a trailer with the overrunbrake engaged, you could trap your handbetween the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.There is a risk of injury.Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brakeis engaged.

! Do not disconnect a trailer with anengaged overrun brake. Otherwise, yourvehicle could be damaged by the rebound-ing of the overrun brake.

X Make sure the selector lever of the auto-matic transmission is in position P.

X Apply the parking brake of the vehicle.X Close all doors.

X Apply the parking brake of the trailer.X In addition, secure the trailer against rollingaway with a wheel chock or similar object.

X Remove the trailer cable and safety chainsand decouple the trailer.

Permissible trailer loads and trailerdrawbar noseweights

Weight information

! On vehicles with a permissible gross vehi-cle weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the per-missible gross combination weight is lessthan the total of the permissible gross vehi-cle weight and the permissible trailer load.Exceeding the permissible gross combina-tion weight can lead to damage to the driv-etrain, to the transmission or to the trailertow hitch.If the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, therelevant value for the permissible grossvehicle weight or the permissible trailerload is therefore lower. In this case, thetrailer or the vehicle may only be partiallyloaded.

The gross trailer weight (GTW) is calculated byadding the weight of the trailer to the weightof the load and equipment.Themaximum gross vehicle weight is vehicle-specific and equipment-dependent: 5,000 lbs(2,268 kg) or 7,500 lbs (3,402 kg).The maximum permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight on the ball coupling is 500 lbs(227 kg) or 750 lbs (340 kg). The actual nose-weight may not exceed the value given on theidentification plates of the trailer tow hitch orthe trailer. If the values vary, the lowest valuealways applies.The gross combination weight rating (GCWR)is calculated by adding the grossweight of thetrailer to the gross vehicle weight including adriver's weight of approximately 150 lbs(68 kg). The permissible Gross CombinationWeight Rating is vehicle-specific and dependson the equipment level.

Towing a trailer 177

Drivingandparking

Z

When driving with a trailer, you should notexceed the permitted Gross CombinationWeight Rating (GCWR).The permissible values, which must not beexceeded, can be found in your vehicle docu-ments and on the trailer tow hitch type platesfor the trailer and the vehicle (Y page 316).The basic values approved by the manufac-turer can also be found in the "Technical data"section (Y page 328). If the values vary, thelowest value always applies.

Loading a trailer

! Utilize the maximum permissible nose-weight as fully as possible. Do not allow theweight to fall below the minimum permis-sible noseweight, otherwise the trailer maycome loose.RYou must distribute the load on the vehicleand trailer so that the permitted maximumvalues for the gross vehicle weight (GVWR),gross trailer weight (GTW) and gross com-bined weight (GCWR) as well as permittedgross axle loads (GAWR) and noseweight(TWR) of your vehicle are not exceeded.RAdd the drawbar noseweight on the ballcoupling (TWR) to the rear axle load. Thiswill prevent you from exceeding the per-missible gross axle weight (GAWR).RAdd the drawbar noseweight on the ballcoupling (TWR) to the vehicle payload. Thiswill prevent you from exceeding the per-missible gross vehicle weight (GVWR).

Checking the vehicle and trailer weightRMake sure theweights of the towing vehicleand the trailer comply with the maximumpermissible values. Have the vehicle/trailer combinationweighed on a calibratedweighbridge. The vehicle/trailer combina-tion consists of the towing vehicle includingthe driver, passengers and load, as well asthe loaded trailer.RCheck themaximumpermissible gross axleweight rating of the front and rear axles

(GAWR), the gross trailer weight (GTW), thegross combination weight rating (GCWR)and the noseweight of the trailer drawbar(TWR).

Trailer power supply! Incorrect wiring of the connector plugcould, under certain circumstances, causemalfunctions in the vehicle's other elec-tronic systems. We therefore recommendhaving the connector plug wired at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

! You can connect accessories with a max-imum power consumption of 240 W to thepermanent power supply.You must not charge a trailer battery usingthe power supply.

Your vehicle may be equipped with variouselectrical installations for trailer towing.Depending on your trailer, you may need anadapter to connect the electrical system ofthe trailer with that of the vehicle.The trailer socket of your vehicle is equippedat the factorywith a permanent power supply.The permanent power supply is on the trailersocket pin assignment 4.Note that the permanent power supply of thetrailer is not switched off when the on-boardvoltage is low. This can completely dischargethe starter battery of your vehicle.The turn signals on the trailer are only guar-anteed to function when incandescent bulbsare used.Further information on the electrical equip-ment currently installed on your vehicle andon installing trailer electrics can be obtainedat any qualified specialist workshop.

178 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

Useful information ............................ 180Important safety notes ..................... 180Instrument cluster ............................ 180On-board computer (vehicles with-out steering wheel buttons) ............ 182On-board computer (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 184Display messages ............................. 197Indicator and warning lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 217

179

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all modelsaswell as standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to systems and functionsrelevant to safety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 25).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you are driving and reach through the steer-ing wheel to operate the adjustment knob,you could lose control of the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident and injury.Only operate the adjustment knobs when thevehicle is stationary. Do not reach through thesteering wheel when driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.The on-board computer display only showsmessages and warnings from certain sys-tems. You should therefore make sure yourvehicle is operating safely at all times. If theoperating safety of your vehicle is impaired,stop the vehicle as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Thenconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Instrument cluster

Overview

: Instrument cluster on vehicles withoutsteering wheel buttons

; Instrument cluster in vehicles with steer-ing-wheel buttons

= Adjustment buttonsf/g? Reset button9A Service button Ë (engine oil level check)B Menu button4You will find a full overview of the instrumentcluster in the "At a glance" section(Y page 34).

180 Instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

The display in the instrument cluster is acti-vated when you:Ropen the driver's doorRturn the key to position2 in the ignition lockRpress the9 reset buttonRswitch on the lightsThe display switches off automatically afterapproximately 30 seconds if:Rthe key is in position 0 in the ignition lock.Rthe vehicle lighting is not switched on.

Instrument lightingWhen the lights are switched on, you canadjust the brightness of the instrument clus-ter lighting using thef andg buttons.X To brighten: press thef button.X To dim: press theg button.

i Vehicles with automatic headlamp mode:the instrument lighting also adapts to auto-matic headlamp mode.

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

H Environmental noteAvoid driving at high engine speeds. Thisunnecessarily increases the fuel consumptionof your vehicle and harms the environment asa result of increased emissions.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.To protect the engine, the fuel supply is inter-rupted when the red band is reached.

Outside temperatureYou should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around thefreezing point.

On vehicles without steering wheel buttons(Y page 182) and on vehicles with steeringwheel buttons (Y page 187), the outside tem-perature display is in the display.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

SpeedometerThe speed can also be shown in the display.You can find information on the digital speed-ometer for vehicles without steering wheelbuttons under (Y page 182) and for vehicleswith steering wheel buttons under(Y page 187).

i In some countries, a warning soundswhen the vehicle reaches the maximumspeed limit, e.g. at 75 mph (120 km/h).

Trip odometerX To reset: make sure that the display isshowing the trip odometer if you have avehicle with steering wheel buttons(Y page 187).

X Press and hold the9 reset button until thetrip odometer is reset to 0.00.0.

Fuel gauge

: Fuel gage on vehicles without steeringwheel buttons

; Fuel gage on vehicles with steering wheelbuttons

Instrument cluster 181

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

= Fuel filler flap location indicatort: thefuel filler flap is on the left-hand side. Fuelfiller flap location indicatoru: the fuelfiller flap is on the right-hand side

? Reserve fuel warning lamp (Y page 224)

DEF gauge

Vehicles without steering wheel but-tonsIf the supply of DEF is less than 1.5 US gal(5.5 l), theå indicator lamp lights up andthe¯ dEF ChkdEF Chk display message appears.If the supply of DEF falls below the reserverange of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l), theå indicatorlamp lights up and the¯ StArtS RExxStArtS RExxdisplay message appears. In the display, xxxxcorresponds to the number of possibleremaining engine starts (1616 to 00 ).When the number of remaining engine startsis 00 the engine management prevents thevehicle being driven at a speed exceeding5 mph (8 km/h). The multifunction displayshows the StArtS IdLEStArtS IdLE message and youhear a warning tone sequence.Further information on DEF consumption canbe found in the "Service products and fillingcapacity" section (Y page 320).

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsIf the supply of DEF is less than 1.5 US gal(5.5 l), the Check Diesel Exhaust FluidCheck Diesel Exhaust FluidSeeSee Operator'sOperator's ManualManualmessage is shownin the display.If theDEF supply falls below the reserve rangeof 0.8 US gal (3.0 l), theå XX startsXX startsremainingremaining message is displayed. In the dis-play, XXXX corresponds to the number of possi-ble remaining engine starts (1616 to 00 ).When the number of remaining engine startsis 00 the engine management prevents thevehicle from being driven at a speed exceed-ing 5mph (8 km/h). Themultifunction displayshows the Idle ModeIdle Modemessage and you heara warning tone sequence.

Further information on DEF consumption canbe found in the "Service products and fillingcapacity" section (Y page 320).

On-board computer (vehicles withoutsteering wheel buttons)

Operating the on-board computer

General notesThe on-board computer is activated as soonas you turn the key to position1 in the ignitionlock.The on-board computer shows vehicle infor-mation and settings in the display.You can control the display and the settings inthe on-board computer using the adjustmentbuttons on the instrument cluster.

Standard display

: Odometer; Trip odometer= Clock? Outside temperature or digital speedom-

eterA Fuel gage (Y page 181)B Selector lever position or current shift

range with automatic transmission(Y page 142)

X To call up the standard display: turn thekey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the4 menu button for longer than1 second.The information shown in the displaychanges from the outside temperature tothe digital speedometer.

182 On-board computer (vehicles without steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

Menus in the on-board computer

OverviewIf you wish to exit a menu and go to the stand-ard display:X Press the4 menu button for longer than1 second.

orX Do not press any button for 10 seconds.The display accepts the changed settings.

Using thef,g,4 or9 adjustment but-tons, you can select the following functions:RCalling up the service due date(Y page 258)RChecking the oil level (Y page 250)RChecking the DEF supply (Y page 182)RPreselecting/setting the auxiliary heatingswitch-on time (Y page 124)RTire pressure monitor (Y page 291)RSetting the time (Y page 183)RActivating/deactivating Highbeam Assist(Y page 192)RSetting the daytime running lamps(Y page 92)

Setting the timeX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press the4 menu button repeatedly untilthe hours figure flashes.

X Press thef org button to set the hour.X Press the9 reset button.The minute display flashes.

X Press thef org button to set theminute.

i If you keep thef org button pressed,the value will change continuously.

Activating/deactivating HighbeamAssistX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press the4 menu button repeatedly untilthe _ indicator lamp flashes and the ononor OFFOFF message appears in the display.

X Use thef org button to switch High-beam Assist on/off.

Switching the daytime running lampson/offIf you switch the daytime running lamps onon,the daytime running lamps will automaticallylight up when the engine is running.For safety reasons, it is only possible tochange this setting when the vehicle is sta-tionary. The factory setting is onon in countriesin which daytime running lamp mode or day-time running lamps are mandatory.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press the4 menu button repeatedly untilthe L indicator lamp flashes and the ononor OFFOFF message appears in the display.

X Press thef org button to activate ordeactivate the daytime running lamps.

i USA only:If you turn the light switch to T or L,the corresponding light switches on. If youturn the light switch toÃ, the daytimerunning lamps remain switched on.Canada only:If you turn the light switch to L, the low-beam headlamps switch on. If you turn thelight switch to T orÃ, the daytimerunning lamps remain switched on.

On-board computer (vehicles without steering wheel buttons) 183

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

On-board computer (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons)

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

X To activate the on-board computer: turnthe key to position 1 in the ignition lock.

The on-board computer shows vehicle infor-mation and settings in the display.You can control the display and the settings inthe on-board computer with the buttons onthe steering wheel.

: Display

On-board computer operation

; W andXRSelects submenusRChanges valuesRAdjusts the volumeUsing the telephone6 Accepts a call~ Ends a call

= Scrolls from one menu to anotherV ForwardsU BackScrolls within a menu9 Forwards: Back

ControlsYou can think of the order of themenus and ofthe functions within a menu as a circle:X Press theV orU button repeatedly.The menus are displayed one after theother.

X Press the: or9 button repeatedly.The functions in the menu/submenu aredisplayed one after the other.

Several functions are combined thematicallyin the menus.The display changes when you press one ofthe buttons on the steering wheel. You canuse a function to call up information or tochange the settings for the vehicle.For example, the AUDIO menu has functionsfor controlling the radio or CD player.Unlike in othermenus, youwill find submenusin the SettingsSettings menu. For information onhow to use these submenus, see the "Set-tings menu" section (Y page 188) .The number of menus depends on your vehi-cle's equipment.

i Operation of the audio equipment usingthe steering wheel buttons andmaking set-tings using the AUDIO menu only function

184 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

with Sprinter audio equipment. If you areusing audio equipment from another man-ufacturer, the described functions may berestricted or not available at all.

On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 185

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Menu overview

Diagrams

This is what the displays look like when you scroll through the menus.

Generic termsThe illustration shows the menus on a vehiclewith Audio 15.On Sound 5/Audio 20, the on-board com-puter always shows theAUDIO and TEL (tele-phone)menus in English. This is the case evenif a different language is selected for the dis-play.

Operation

: Operation menu (Y page 186)RStandard displayRCalling up the service due date(Y page 258)RTire pressure monitor(Y page 291)RChecking the engine oil level(Y page 250)

; Audio menu (Y page 187)

= Message memory menu(Y page 198)

Operation

? Settings menu (Y page 188)

A Trip computer menu (Y page 195)

B Telephone menu (Y page 196)

i The generic terms in the tabular overviewshould make orientation easier for you.However, they are not always shown on thedisplay.

Operation menu

OverviewYou can select the following functions in theOperation menu by pressing the9or: button on the steering wheel:

186 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

RDisplaying the trip odometer and odometer(standard display) (Y page 187)RDisplaying the coolant temperature(Y page 187)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 258)RTire pressure monitor (Y page 291)RChecking the oil level (Y page 250)

Standard display

: Odometer; Trip odometer= Outside temperature or digital speedom-

eter? ClockA Selector lever position or current shift

range (Y page 142)In the basic setting, the odometer and the tripodometer are shown in the upper part of thedisplay. This is referred to as the standarddisplay.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the standard display is shown.

Displaying the coolant temperature

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the standard display is shown.

X Press the9 or: button to select thecoolant temperature.

The temperature displayed may climb to250 ‡ (120 †) when the vehicle is beingdriven in normal conditions and if the coolantcontains the correct concentration of corro-sion inhibitor and antifreeze. At high outsidetemperatures and when driving in mountain-ous terrain, the coolant temperature may riseto the end of the scale.

Audio menu

General notesUse the functions in the Audiomenu to oper-ate the audio equipment when switched on.

i Operation of the audio equipment usingthe steering wheel buttons andmaking set-tings using the AUDIO menu only functionwith Sprinter audio equipment. If you areusing audio equipment from another man-ufacturer, the described functions may berestricted or not available at all.

If no audio equipment is switched on, you willsee the message AUDIO offAUDIO off.Selecting a radio station

: Reception frequency; Waveband or wavebandwithmemory pre-

set number

On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 187

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Switch on the audio equipment (see theseparate operating instructions).

X Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the station selected appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired station.

i You can only store new stations on theaudio system itself. See the separate oper-ating instructions.You can also operate the audio equipmentin the same way as usual.

Operating the CD player

: Current CD (with CD changer); Current trackUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Switch on the audio equipment and selectthe CD player (see the separate operatinginstructions).

X Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the settings for the current CD appearin the display.

X Press the9 or: button to select aCD track.

Settings menu

IntroductionIn the Settings menu, the following optionsand submenus are available:RResetting all settingsRResetting the functions of a submenu

RInstrument cluster (Y page 189)- Units and language settings- Status bar settingsRTime(Y page 191)RLighting (Y page 192)

- Switching surround lighting on/off- Switching the daytime running lampson/off

- Setting the exterior lighting delayedswitch-off

- Activating/deactivating HighbeamAssist

RVehicle- Setting the radio station selection- Setting the windshield wiper sensitivityRStationary heating or auxiliary heating(Y page 124)RConvenience (Y page 194)

- Key-dependent settings

i For safety reasons, it is not possible toreset all of the functions while the vehicle isin motion. For example, in the LightingLightingsubmenu, the Daytime runn. lampsDaytime runn. lampsfunction remains unchanged.

Resetting all settings

Settings menu

When the SettingsSettings message is displayed,you can reset all functions of the submenu tothe factory settings.

188 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press and hold the9 reset button forapproximately 3 seconds.You will see a message in the displayprompting you to press the9 reset buttonagain to confirm.

X Press the9 reset button again.The functions in all submenus are reset tothe factory settings.

i If you want to retain the settings, do notpress the9 reset button a second time.The SettingsSettings menu appears again afterapproximately 5 seconds.

Resetting the functions of a submenuYou can individually reset the functions ofeach submenu to the factory settings.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select asubmenu.

X Press and hold the9 reset button forapproximately 3 seconds.You will see a message in the displayprompting you to press the9 reset buttonagain to confirm.

X Press the9 reset button again.All functions in the submenu are reset tothe factory settings.

i If you want to retain the settings, do notpress the9 reset button a second time.The SettingsSettings menu appears again afterapproximately 5 seconds.

Selecting submenus

You will see the collection of submenus.There are more submenus than can be dis-played at the same time.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select asubmenu.The submenu currently selected is high-lighted.

X Press the9 button to select the func-tion within a submenu.

X Change the setting by pressing theW orX button.The changed setting is saved.

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the unit for temperature

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 189

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press theW orX button to select theInst. clusterInst. cluster submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the Tem‐Tem‐perat.perat. function.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to select theunit for all messages in the display: °C°C(degrees Celsius) or °F°F (degrees Fahren-heit).

Selecting the unit for the digital speed-ometer

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theInst. clusterInst. cluster submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the Dig.Dig.speedo.speedo. function.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to select theunit for the digital speedometer: km/hkm/h ormphmph .

Selecting the unit for distance

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theInst. clusterInst. cluster submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the TripTripfunction.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to select theunit for all messages in the display: kmkm(kilometers) or milesmiles .

Selecting the language

The selected range of languages shown is justan example. The range of languages availableis specific to each country.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theInst. clusterInst. cluster submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the Lan‐Lan‐guageguage function.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to set thelanguage for all messages.

190 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

Selecting the display for the status bar

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theInst. clusterInst. cluster submenu.

X Press the9 button to select theSelect disp.Select disp. function.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to selectwhether to display the outside temperatureor the speed (digital speedometer).The selected display is then shown perma-nently in the lower part of the display.

Selecting the unit for the tire pressure

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theInst. clusterInst. cluster submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the TireTirepres.pres. function.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to select theunit for the tire pressure in the display:barbar or psipsi.

Clock/Date submenu

Setting the time

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theClock/DateClock/Date submenu.

X Press the9 button to select SetSetclockclock HoursHours or MinutesMinutes .

X Press theW orX button to set thevalues.

Selecting the time format

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 191

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press theW orX button to select theClock/DateClock/Date submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the12/24 h12/24 h function.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to select the12 h12 h or 24 h24 h clock format.

Lighting submenu

Activating/deactivating Highbeam Assist

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theLightingLighting submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the High‐High‐beam Assistbeam Assist function.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to switchHighbeam Assist OnOn or OffOff .i For safety reasons, it is not possible toreset the HighbeamHighbeam AssistAssist function to thefactory settings during a journey. You willsee the following message in the display:Setting only possible at stand‐Setting only possible at stand‐stillstill.

For further information about HighbeamAssist, see (Y page 96).

Switching the daytime running lamps on/off

If you switch the daytime running lamps func-tion to OnOn, the daytime running lamps willautomatically light up when the engine is run-ning.For safety reasons, it is only possible tochange this setting when the vehicle is sta-tionary. The factory setting is OnOn in countriesin which daytime running lamp mode or day-time running lamps are mandatory .Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theLightingLighting submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the Day‐Day‐time runn. lampstime runn. lamps function.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to switchthe daytime running lamps OnOn or OffOff.i If you turn the light switch to T or

L, the corresponding lamp switches on.If you turn the light switch toÃ, thedaytime running lamps remain switchedon.

i For safety reasons, it is not possible toreset the Daytime runn. lampsDaytime runn. lamps functionto the factory setting while the vehicle is inmotion. You will see the following messagein the display: Setting only possibleSetting only possibleat standstillat standstill.

192 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

Switching surround lighting on or off

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theLightingLighting submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the Loc.Loc.lightinglighting function.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to switchthe surround lighting OnOn or OffOff .

If you switch the surround lighting to OnOn, thefollowing lamps light up in the dark after youhave unlocked the vehicle using the key:Rthe parking lampsRthe tail lampsRthe license plate lampsRthe fog lampsThe surround lighting automatically switchesoff after 40 seconds or if you:Ropen the driver's doorRinsert the key into the ignition lockRlock the vehicle using the key

Setting the exterior lighting delayedswitch-off

In the HeadlampsHeadlamps submenu, you can setwhether and for how long you wish the exte-rior lighting to remain on after closing thedoors.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theLightingLighting submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the Head‐Head‐lampslamps function.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to selectwhether and for how long you wish theexterior lighting to remain on.

If you have set the delayed switch-off andswitch off the engine, the following remain lit:Rthe parking lampsRthe tail lampsRthe license plate lampsRthe fog lamps

i You can reactivate this function by open-ing a door within 10 minutes.If, after switching off the engine, you do notopen a door or you close an open door, theexterior lighting switches off after60 seconds.

Vehicle submenu

Setting the windshield wiper sensitivity

You can use the WipeWipe sensorsensor function to setthe sensitivity of the rain/ light sensor.

On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 193

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the WipeWipesensorsensor function.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to adjust thesensitivity of the rain/light sensor.

The levels are graded as follows:RLevel 1Level 1: high sensitivity – wiping beginseven in light rainRLevel 2Level 2: moderate sensitivityRLevel 3Level 3: low sensitivity – wiping onlybegins in heavy rain

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the BlindBlindSpot AssistSpot Assist function.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to switchBlind Spot Assist OnOn or OffOff .

For further information about Blind SpotAssist; see (Y page 163).

Heating submenu

Selecting the switch-on time for the aux-iliary heating

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theHeatingHeating submenu.

X Press the9 button to switch to theAux. heat.Aux. heat. submenu selection(Y page 124).The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to set thedesired switch-on time.Use the Timer offTimer off setting to deactivateautomatic switch-on.

X Press buttonV.The switch-on time is selected.

Convenience submenu

The KeyKey function allows you to definewhethersettings for some submenus are stored with akey dependence.

194 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

This function pertains to the Inst. clusterInst. cluster(instrument cluster) menu, the LightingLightingmenu and the VehicleVehicle menu.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the SettingsSettings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the KeyKeyfunction.The selection marker is on the current set-ting.

X Press theW orX button to activateor deactivate key dependency.

Trip computer menu

General notesYou can call up or reset statistical data for thevehicle in the Trip computer menu.

i When you call up the trip computer again,it displays the last function called up.The units of the statistical information dis-played are set permanently for each spe-cific country, and are therefore independ-ent of the units selected in the SettingsSettingsmenu.

Trip computer "After start" or "Afterreset"

Example: "After start" trip computer: Distance; Time

= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button to selectAfter startAfter start.

orX Press the9 or: button to selectAfter resetAfter reset.

The values in the After startAfter start submenurefer to the start of the journey. The values inthe After resetAfter reset submenu are calculatedfrom the last time the trip computer wasreset.The After startAfter start trip computer function isautomatically reset if:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan 4 hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The After resetAfter reset trip computer is automati-cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 miles.

i If you turn the key to position 0 in theignition lock or remove it, all the values arereset after approximately four hours.The values will not be reset if you turn thekey back to position 1 or 2 during this time.

Calling up the rangeUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button to selectAfter startAfter start.

X Press the9 or: button to selectRangeRange.The approximate distance which can becovered with the tank's current contentsand your current style of driving is shown.

i If there is only a small amount of fuel leftin the fuel tank, the7 Please refuelPlease refuelmessage is shown instead of the range.

On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 195

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Resetting the trip computerUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button to selectAfter startAfter start.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction you would like to reset.

X Press and hold the9 reset button until thevalues are reset to "0".

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements ofthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating amobile phone in the vehicle.If it is permitted to operate a mobile phonewhile the vehicle is in motion, only operate itwhen road and traffic conditions permit.If you have connected a mobile phone to theSprinter hands-free system, you can operateit using the functions in the TELTEL menu.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the sep-arate operating instructions).

X Switch on the audio equipment (see theseparate operating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connectionbetween the mobile phone and the audioequipment (see the separate operatinginstructions).

X Press theVorUbutton on the steer-ing wheel to select the TELTEL menu.

X When Please enter PIN:Please enter PIN: appears in thedisplay, enter the PIN using the mobilephone or audio equipment.Themobile phone will search for a network.The display remains blank during this time.You will see the mobile phone operationalreadiness display once the mobile phonehas found a network.

i You can obtain further information aboutsuitable mobile phones and connectingmobile phones via Bluetooth® at any quali-fied specialist workshop.

i If the mobile phone operational readinesssymbol goes out, your vehicle is outside ofthe transmission and reception range.

Accepting a callX Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.The display shows the call duration.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press~ button on the steering wheel toreject or end a call.The caller then hears the engaged tone.The display shows the mobile phone opera-tional readiness symbol again.

Dialing a number from the phone bookYou can enter new telephone numbers intothe phone book via the mobile phone (see theseparate operating instructions). If yourmobile phone is able to receive calls, you cansearch for and dial a number from the phonebook.

196 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computera

nddisplays

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Use theV orU button to select theTELTEL menu.The display shows the mobile phone opera-tional readiness symbol.

X Press the9 or: button to switch tothe phone book.The on-board computer reads the phonebook stored on the SIM card or in themobile phone. This may take more than aminute.When the message is no longer displayed,reading has ended.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To start rapid scrolling: press and holdthe9 or: button longer than 1 sec-ond.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

Using the steering wheel buttonsX To start dialing: press the6 button.The on-board computer dials the corre-sponding phone number.When a connection is established, thename of the other person and/or the callduration appear in the display.

X To exit the phone book: press the~button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Use theV orU button to select theTELTEL menu.The display shows the mobile phone opera-tional readiness symbol.

X Press the6 button.The display shows the most recently dialednumbers or names in the redial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X To start dialing: press the6 button.The on-board computer dials the corre-sponding phone number.When a connection is established, thename of the other person and/or the callduration appear in the display.

orX To exit the redial memory: press the~ button.

Display messages

Notes on display messages

Important safety notes

G WARNINGNo information will be displayed if either theinstrument cluster or the display is inopera-tive.As a result, you will not be able to see warningand indicator lamps or information about thedriving conditions, such as speed or outsidetemperature. Driving characteristics may beimpaired. Adjust your driving style and vehiclespeed accordingly.Contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

G WARNINGIf service work is not carried out correctly, theoperating safety of your vehicle may be affec-ted. This could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and cause an accident. More-over, the safety systems may no longer be

Display messages 197

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

able to protect you or others as they aredesigned to do.Always have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

i If you turn the key to position 2 in theignition, a display check is performed. Allwarning/indicator lamps (except the turnsignal indicator lamps) and the display areactivated. Before starting the journey,check that the warning and indicator lampsare operating correctly.

Vehicles without steering wheel but-tonsWarnings, malfunctions or additional infor-mation may also be shown in the display. Thefollowing tables show all the display mes-sages. A warning tone sounds with certaindisplay messages.

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsThe on-board computer showswarnings, mal-functions or additional information in the dis-play. A warning tone sounds with certain dis-play messages. Display messages of a highpriority are shown in red.Please respond in accordance with the dis-play messages and follow the additionalnotes in this Operator's Manual.You can hide low-priority displaymessages bypressing theV,U,9 or: but-ton on the steering wheel or the9 reset but-ton.You cannot hide display messages of thehighest priority. These messages will con-tinue to be shown in the display until theircause has been eliminated.The on-board computer stores certain displaymessages in the message memory(Y page 198).

Message memoryThe on-board computer only records andshows malfunctions and warnings from cer-tain systems. Therefore, make sure that yourvehicle is safe to use. You could otherwisecause an accident by driving an unsafe vehi-cle.The on-board computer stores certain displaymessages. In the Message memory menu,you can call up stored display messages.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the number of stored display mes-sages, e.g. 22 messagesmessages, appears in the dis-play.If no malfunctions have occurred, the NoNomessagesmessages message appears.

X Scroll through the stored displaymessageswith the9 or: button.

X To exit the message memory menu:press theV orU button.

When you switch off the ignition, all displaymessages are deleted from the messagememory. You can only remove the key when itis in the basic position.

198 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

NO TPMSNO TPMS The NONOmessage is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMSTPMSmessage isalso displayed after 30 seconds.The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

NO TPMSNO TPMS The NONOmessage is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMSTPMSmessage isalso displayed after 30 seconds.The tire pressuremonitor is not receiving signals from one ormorewheels because:Ra wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheelelectronics.Rthemaximum temperature on one of the wheel electronics unitshas been exceeded.Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning.X Have wheels with suitable wheel electronics units installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

— —— — TPMSTPMS The — —— —message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMSTPMSmessageis also displayed after 30 seconds.The pressure is insufficient in one or more tires, or the pressuresof the individual tires differ significantly.X Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary(Y page 291).

Display messages 199

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ErrErr flashes for 5 seconds, theà indicator lamp also flashes andthen lights up constantly.Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:RThere are no lane markings present.RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snoworfog.RThe camera cannot recognize the road markings:

- It is too dark.- The lane markings are worn or are covered, for example, bydirt or snow.

RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 149).X Clean the windshield (Y page 267), particularly in the camera'sfield of vision.If theà indicator lamp goes out, Lane Keeping Assist isoperational again.If the problem persists, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¯dEF ChkdEF Chk

In addition, the yellow; Check Engine indicator lamp and theyellowå DEF indicator lamp light up and a warning tonesounds.The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compli-ant with ISO 22241.After the first message and under normal operating conditions,you can drive on for up to approximately 50 miles (80 km). Then awarning tone sequence sounds and the engine can only be startedanother 10 times.X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialistworkshop as soon as possible.

200 Display messagesOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

¯dEF ChkdEF Chk

In addition, the yellowå DEF indicator lamp lights up and awarning tone sounds.The DEF supply has dropped below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l).After the message appears for the first time, and under normaldriving conditions, the remaining DEF supply will last for approx-imately 1000 miles (1600 km).After that, the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reservemark is reached. Awarningtone sequence sounds and the engine can then only be startedanother 16 times.X Add DEF (Y page 147).Theå DEF indicator lamp disappears after no more than20 seconds after the vehicle has stopped or you have switchedon the ignition or started the engine after refueling.

¯StArtS RExxStArtS RExx

In addition, the yellowå DEF indicator lamp lights up and awarning tone sequence sounds.After themessage appears for the first time, the engine can only bestarted another 10 times.The number of remaining engine starts XXXX (1010 to 00) is shown in themessage every time the engine is started. When the number ofremaining engine starts is 00 the engine management prevents thevehicle being driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h). TheIdle ModeIdle Mode message appears in the multifunction display.The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compli-ant with ISO 22241.X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialistworkshop as soon as possible.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emissionrelevant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect candamage the exhaust gas aftertreatment.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 201

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

¯StArtS RExxStArtS RExx

In addition, the yellowå DEF indicator lamp lights up and awarning tone sequence sounds.The DEF supply has dropped below the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reservemark.After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEFsupply will last for approximately 1000 miles (1600 km). Theengine can then only be started another 16 times.The number of remaining engine starts XXXX (1616 to 11) is shown in themessage every time the engine is started.X Add at least 2.0 US gal (7.6 l) of DEF (Y page 147).Theå DEF indicator lamp disappears after no more than20 seconds after the vehicle has stopped or you have switchedon the ignition or started the engine after refueling.

¯StArtS IdLEStArtS IdLE

If the message StArtS IdLEStArtS IdLE is displayed, you cannot drive thevehicle at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).X Add at least 2.0 US gal (7.6 l) of DEF (Y page 147).Theå DEF indicator lamp disappears after no more than20 seconds after the vehicle has stopped or you have switchedon the ignition or started the engine after refueling.

ErrErr flashes for 5 seconds, the _ indicator lamp also flashes andthen goes out.Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily not operational orHighbeam Assist is malfunctioning.Possible causes are:RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snoworfog.RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 149).X Clean the windshield (Y page 267), particularly in the camera'sfield of vision.If the _ indicator lamp goes out, Highbeam Assist is opera-tional again.If the problem persists, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

202 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Blind_ErrBlind_Err flashes for 5 seconds, the yellow indicator lamps flash in the exte-rior mirrors and then light up constantly.Blind Spot Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ErrErr flashes for 5 seconds, theÄ indicator lamp also flashes andthen lights up constantly.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 203

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages on vehicles with steering wheel buttons

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ABSABSVisit workshopVisit workshop

ABS has been deactivated due to a malfunction. ESP®, ASR andBAS, as well as cruise control, have also been deactivated as aresult.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired. Thebraking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ABSABSUnavailableUnavailable

ABS is temporarily unavailable or is deactivated due to undervolt-age. ESP®, ASR and BAS, as well as cruise control, are alsounavailable as a result.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired. Thebraking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive for a short distance at a speed of more than 13 mph(20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

204 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

:Visit workshopVisit workshop

ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction.The engine power output may be reduced.

G WARNINGThe driven wheels can spin when accelerating.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

:Visit workshopVisit workshop

BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but withoutelectronic support.The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situa-tions.There is a risk of an accident.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

:UnavailableUnavailable

ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situa-tions. The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

#Brake wear VisitBrake wear Visitworkshopworkshop

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at aqualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 205

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bBrake fluid VisitBrake fluid Visitworkshopworkshop

There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGBraking performance can be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir(Y page 254).

If the brake fluid is below the MIN mark:X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not solve the problem.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the brake fluid is above the MIN mark:X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

bBrakeBrake forceforce distri‐distri‐butionbution

EBD has been deactivated due to undervoltage.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNINGThe rear wheels could lockwhen you apply the brakes. The brakingdistance can increase in emergency braking situations.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

bBrakeBrake forceforce distri‐distri‐bution Visit work‐bution Visit work‐shopshop

EBD has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

G WARNINGThe rear wheels could lockwhen you apply the brakes. The brakingdistance can increase in emergency braking situations.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

206 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ESPESPVisit workshopVisit workshop

ESP® has been deactivated due to a malfunction. As a result,cruise control has also been deactivated.Engine power output may be reduced.

G WARNING

If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ESPESPUnavailableUnavailable

ESP® has been deactivated due to undervoltage. As a result, cruisecontrol has also been deactivated.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNING

If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible.

cParking brakeParking brakeRelease brakeRelease brake

Additionally, a warning tone sounds.You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake (Y page 150).

7Seatbelt sys.Seatbelt sys.Visit workshopVisit workshop

The belt system has malfunctioned.

G WARNINGIn the event of an accident or a rapid deceleration, the seat beltseither cannot protect you as intended.There is a risk of injury.X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible.

6Restraint systemRestraint systemVisit workshopVisit workshop

The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGIf the restraint system is malfunctioning, individual systems couldbe triggered inadvertently or might not be triggered at all in theevent of an accident.There is an increased risk of injury and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 207

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bLow beam leftLow beam left

The left-hand low beam is faulty3.X Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb as soon as possible(Y page 100).

X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshopas soon as possible.

bLow beam rightLow beam right

The right-hand low-beam headlamp is faulty3.X Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb as soon as possible(Y page 100).

X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshopas soon as possible.

bCornering lt. leftCornering lt. left

The left-hand cornering light is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 100).

bCorneringCornering lt.lt. rightright

The right-hand cornering light is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 100).

bLights on auto‐Lights on auto‐matic. Remove keymatic. Remove key

The automatic headlamp feature is active: the light switch is in theà position and you have forgotten to remove the key.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

bTurn signal leftTurn signal left

The left-hand turn signal is faulty.X Change the bulb as soon as possible in the front (Y page 102) orrear (Y page 103) indicator lamp.

bTurn signal rightTurn signal right

The right-hand turn signal is faulty.X Change the bulb as soon as possible in the front (Y page 102) orrear (Y page 103) indicator lamp.

bBrake lamp leftBrake lamp left

The left brake lamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 103).

bBrake lamp rightBrake lamp right

The right brake lamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 103).

3 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than the turnsignals.

208 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bThird brake lampThird brake lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty3. This display message willonly appear if all LEDs have failed.X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible.

bHigh beam leftHigh beam left

The left high-beam headlamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 100).

bHigh beam rightHigh beam right

The right high-beam headlamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 100).

bLicense plate lampLicense plate lamp

A license plate lamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 103).

bSwitch off lightsSwitch off lights

You have forgotten to switch off the lights when leaving the vehi-cle.X Turn the light switch to$.

bFoglamp front leftFoglamp front left

The left-hand front fog lamp is faulty.3

X Have the bulb replaced as soon as possible at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

bFoglampFoglamp frontfront rightright

The right-hand front fog lamp is faulty3.X Have the bulb replaced as soon as possible at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

bRear foglampRear foglamp

The rear foglamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 103).

bParkingParking lamplamp frontfrontleftleft

The front left parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 100).

bParkingParking lamplamp frontfrontrightright

The front right parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 100).

bReverse lampReverse lamp

A reversing lamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 103).

3 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than the turnsignals.

Display messages 209

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bTail lamp leftTail lamp left

The left-hand tail lamp is faulty.3

X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 103).

bTail lamp rightTail lamp right

The right-hand tail lamp is faulty.3

X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 103).

bPerim. lampsPerim. lamps

A perimeter lamp is faulty.3

X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 105).

Highbeam AssistHighbeam Assistinoperativeinoperative

Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Highbeam AssistHighbeam Assisttemporarilytemporarilyunavailableunavailable

Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snoworfog.RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 149).X Clean the windshield (Y page 267), particularly in the camera'sfield of vision.If the malfunction has been rectified, the Highbeam AssistHighbeam AssistNow AvailableNow Available message appears.

3 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than the turnsignals.

210 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Exhaust Filter:Exhaust Filter:Drive at highDrive at highengine speed. Seeengine speed. SeeOper. ManualOper. Manual

The automatic regeneration of the diesel particle filter is not suf-ficient or has malfunctioned.X Drive at an engine speed of above 2000 rpm until the displaymessage disappears.If the display message does not go out after approximately20 minutes, have the malfunction rectified immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

Check DieselCheck DieselExhaust Fluid SeeExhaust Fluid SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply has dropped below1.5 US gal (5.5 l).After the message appears for the first time, and under normaldriving conditions, the remaining DEF supply will last for approx-imately 1000 miles (1600 km).After that, the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reservemark is reached. Awarningtone sequence sounds and the engine can then only be startedanother 16 times.X Add DEF supply (Y page 147).After topping up, the system check takes approximately20 seconds. The display message then disappears.

Check DieselCheck DieselExhaust Fluid SeeExhaust Fluid SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

If the yellow; Check Engine indicator lamp lights up as well,the DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or not compliantwith ISO 22241.After the first message and under normal operating conditions,you can drive on for up to approximately 50 miles (80 km). Then awarning tone sequence sounds and the engine can only be startedanother 10 times.Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialistworkshop as soon as possible.

åXXXX startsstarts remainingremaining

The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply has dropped below the0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark.After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEFsupply will last for approximately 1000 miles (1600 km). Theengine can then only be started another 16 times.The number of remaining engine starts XXXX (1616 to 00) is shown in themessage every time the engine is started.X Add at least 2.0 US gal (7.6 l) of DEF (Y page 147).The display message disappears no more than 20 seconds afterthe vehicle has stopped or you have switched on the ignition orstarted the engine after refueling.

Display messages 211

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

åIdle ModeIdle Mode

The vehicle cannot be driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph(8 km/h).

The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compli-ant with ISO 22241.X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emissionrelevant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect candamage the exhaust gas aftertreatment.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

?CoolantCoolant Stop,Stop, turnturnengine offengine off

The coolant temperature is too high.If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads,the coolant warning lamp may come on when the ignition isswitched on or the engine is restarted. Such loads can be, forexample, driving in mountainous terrain or driving with a trailer.X Run the engine for approximately 1 minute at idling speed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the display messagecontinues to be shown.

*CoolantCoolant CheckCheck levellevel

The coolant level is too low.Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The enginecould overheat and be damaged.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Switch off the engine and let it cool down.X Add coolant and be sure to observe the warning notes(Y page 325).

X If you need to add coolant frequently, have the engine coolingsystem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

7ReserveReserve fuelfuel DriveDriveto a filling stat.to a filling stat.

The fuel level has fallen into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 145).

:Water in fuelWater in fuelVisit workshopVisit workshop

The water that has collected in the water separator has reachedthe maximum level.X Drain the water separator (Y page 255).

212 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

4EngineEngine oiloil AddAdd 1.01.0quart(Canada: 1.0quart(Canada: 1.0liter)liter)

The oil level is too low.X Check the oil level the next time you refuel (Y page 250), andadd oil.

4Engine oil levelEngine oil levelNot when eng. run‐Not when eng. run‐ningning

You want to check the engine oil level even though the engine isstill running.X Switch off the engine.X Check the oil level (Y page 250).

4Engine oil levelEngine oil levelReduce oil levelReduce oil level

You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damagingthe engine or catalytic converter.X Check the oil level (Y page 250).X If the oil level is too high: have the engine oil extracted at thenext qualified specialist workshop.

X If the oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified at thenext qualified specialist workshop.

4Engine oil levelEngine oil levelStop, turn engineStop, turn engineoffoff

There is not enough or no oil in the engine. There is a danger ofengine damage.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 251).X If the engine oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectifiedimmediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

X If the engine oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to aqualified specialist workshop.

4Oil sensor VisitOil sensor Visitworkshopworkshop

There is a malfunction in the engine oil level display.X Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Display messages 213

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Cruise controlCruise controlVisit workshopVisit workshop

Cruise control has been deactivated due to a malfunction.X Have cruise control checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

LaneLane Keep.Keep. AssistAssistTemporarilyTemporarilyUnavailableUnavailable

and theà indicator lamp lights up.Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:RThere are no lane markings present.RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snoworfog.RThe camera cannot recognize the road markings:

- It is too dark.- The lane markings are worn or are covered, for example, bydirt or snow.

RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 149).X Clean the windshield (Y page 267), particularly in the camera'sfield of vision.If theà indicator lamp goes out, Lane Keeping Assist isoperational again.

LaneLane Keep.Keep. AssistAssistInoperativeInoperative

Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.X Have Lane Keeping Assist checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistInoperativeInoperative

Blind Spot Assist is faulty.X Have Blind Spot Assist checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Collision Preven‐Collision Preven‐tiontion AssistAssist Inoper‐Inoper‐ativeative

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is faulty.X Have COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

214 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Recognition by the radar sensor system can be impaired in thecase of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensorsRit is snowing or raining heavilyRthere is interference from other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parkinggaragesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineX Clean the radar sensor system area.

InterventionInterventionCrosswind AssistCrosswind Assist

Thed indicator lamp also flashes in the instrument cluster.Crosswind Assist has intervened perceptibly.

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Tire pres. AdjustTire pres. Adjustpres.pres.O

The pressure is insufficient in one or more tires, or the pressuresof the individual tires differ significantly.X Check the tire pressure at the next opportunity and correct it ifnecessary (Y page 291).

Tire pres.Tire pres.monitor inopera‐monitor inopera‐tivetive

The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

Tire pres.Tire pres.monitor currentlymonitor currentlyunavailableunavailable

The tire pressure monitor function is temporarily unavailable dueto radio interference or undervoltage.X Once the causes have been remedied, the tire pressure monitoris automatically activated.

Tire pres.-Tire pres.-monitor inopera‐monitor inopera‐tive No wheel sen‐tive No wheel sen‐sorssors

The tire pressuremonitor is not receiving signals from one ormorewheels because:Ra wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheelelectronics.Rthemaximum temperature on one of the wheel electronics unitshas been exceeded.Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning.X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 215

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Check tire(s)Check tire(s)O

The pressure of one or more tires has dropped significantly. If thetire pressure monitor has detected the affected wheel, the wheelposition is also displayed.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Check the tires.X Repair or change the wheel if necessary (Y page 305).X Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary(Y page 291).The displaymessage disappears automatically after driving for afew minutes with the corrected tire pressure.

WarningWarning TireTire defectdefectO

One or more tires is losing air rapidly. If the tire pressure monitorhas detected the affected wheel, the wheel position is also dis-played.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers, paying attention to the traffic conditions as you doso.

X Repair or change the wheel (Y page 305).

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

#Battery/Alterna‐Battery/Alterna‐tor Visit workshoptor Visit workshop

The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are a defectivealternator or a torn poly-V-belt.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Check the poly-V-belt.X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult aqualified specialist workshop.

X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: have the vehicle checked assoon as possible by a qualified specialist workshop.

÷Electrical StepElectrical Step

The electrical step has retracted or extended only partially or notat all.X Make sure there is sufficient free space for the electrical step.X Open or close the sliding door again.X If the electrical step still does not extend or retract fully, pushthe step in manually (Y page 74). Before stepping out, remindthe passengers that the step is missing.

216 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

1Hood openHood open

You are already driving at walking pace, even though the hood isnot closed.X Close the hood.

9Please enter PIN:Please enter PIN:

You have not yet entered your PIN in the mobile phone.X Enter the PIN for the SIM card.

1Doors openDoors open

You are already driving at walking pace, even though not all thedoors are closed.X Close the doors.

¦Check wash. fluidCheck wash. fluidlevellevel

The washer fluid level is too low.X Add washer fluid (Y page 255).

Key

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Replace key VisitReplace key Visitworkshopworkshop

The key is no longer working.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

When switching on the ignition, some systems carry out a self-test. Some indicator and warn-ing lamps may temporarily turn on or start to flash. This is not an indication of any problem.Only when these indicator and warning lights turn on or start flashing after the engine hasstarted or during the journey has a malfunction occurred.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 217

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

d The yellow ASR/ESP® warninglamp flasheswhile the vehicleis in motion.

G WARNING

ESP® or ASR is intervening because at least one of the wheels hasreached its tire grip limit.Cruise control is deactivated for the duration of the intervention.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and traffic conditions.Do not use too much throttle.

X Drive slowly.

d The yellow ASR/ESP® warninglamp is lit whilethe engine isrunning.

ASR is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe driven wheels can spin when accelerating.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Activate ASR again. Exceptions (Y page 58).

h ! :b

The yellow ESP®, ABSand ASR/BAS indicatorlamps and the redbrake system indicatorlamp are lit while theengine is running.

EBD is malfunctioning or deactivated due to undervoltage or mal-function.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNINGThe rear wheels could lock sooner than expected when you applythe brakes. The braking distance can increase in emergency brak-ing situations.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the mes-sages in the display (Y page 197).

X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

218 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

b The red brakesystem indicatorlamp is lit whilethe engine isrunning.

There is insufficient brake fluid in the expansion tank.

G WARNINGBraking performance can be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the mes-sages in the display (Y page 197).

X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Check the brake fluid level in the expansion tank (Y page 254).X If the brake fluid is below the MIN mark: do not drive on!X Do not add brake fluid. This does not solve the problem.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

b When towing atrailer: the redbrake systemindicator lamp islit while theengine is run-ning.Additionally, awarning tonesounds.

G WARNINGThe brake force booster in the trailer is faulty.The driving and braking characteristics of your vehicle couldchange. There is a risk of the trailer overbraking and of you losingcontrol over the truck/trailer combination.There is a risk of an accident.X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the mes-sages in the display (Y page 197).

X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

: The yellow ASR/BAS indicatorlamp is lit whilethe engine isrunning.

ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction.The engine power output may be reduced.

G WARNINGThe driven wheels can spin when accelerating.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 219

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

: The yellow ASR/BAS indicatorlamp is lit whilethe engine isrunning.

BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but withoutelectronic support.The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situa-tions.There is a risk of an accident.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

: The yellow ASR/BAS indicatorlamp is lit whilethe engine isrunning.

ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNINGThe brake system is still available with the normal braking effect.The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situa-tions.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

220 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

! The yellow ABSindicator lamp islit while theengine is run-ning.

ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction or is temporarily unavail-able. ESP®, ASR and BAS, as well as cruise control, are alsounavailable as a result.Self-diagnosis may not be complete, or the battery may not becharging.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock, e.g. if thebrakes are applied with maximum force.This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired.The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situa-tions.The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive a short distance at a speed above 13 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when theindicator lamp goes out.

If the indicator lamp does not go out:X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

å The yellow DEFindicator lamp islit while theengine is run-ning.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or the currentDiesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply is limiting the vehicle range.X Observe the messages in the display.

h The yellow ESP®indicator lamp islit while theengine is run-ning.

ESP® is deactivated due to undervoltage or a malfunction. As aresult, cruise control has also been deactivated.Engine power output may be reduced.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNING

If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the mes-sages in the display (Y page 197).

X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 221

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6 The red warninglamp does notgo out approx-imately4 seconds afterthe ignition isswitched on, orit lights up again.

The restraint systems have malfunctioned.

G WARNINGIf the restraint systems are malfunctioning, individual systemscould be triggered inadvertently or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident.There is an increased risk of injury and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# The red batteryindicator lamp islit while theengine is run-ning.

The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are a defectivealternator or a torn poly-V-belt.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Check the poly-V-belt.X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: have the vehicle checked assoon as possible by a qualified specialist workshop.

# The red batteryindicator lamp islit while theengine is run-ning.

The battery is faulty.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# The yellow brakepad wear indica-tor lamp is litafter the engineis started orwhile the vehicleis in motion.

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

G WARNINGBraking performance can be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at aqualified specialist workshop.

4 The yellowengine oil levelwarning lamp islit after theengine is startedor while the vehi-cle is in motion.

The oil level has dropped to the minimum level.X Check the engine for oil loss.X If oil loss is detected: consult a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

X If no oil loss is detected: check the oil level and add engine oil(Y page 251).

222 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

4 The yellowengine oil levelwarning lampflashes and thewarning buzzersounds after theengine is startedor while the vehi-cle is in motion.

On vehicles with a diesel engine, the oil level display additionallyappears in the display, e.g. – 2.0 qts– 2.0 qts (Canada: – 2.0 ltr– 2.0 ltr).There is not enough or no oil in the engine.There is a danger of engine damage.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 251).X If the engine oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectifiedimmediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

X If the engine oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to aqualified specialist workshop.

4 The yellowengine oil levelwarning lamplights up and thewarning buzzersounds after theengine is startedor while the vehi-cle is in motion.

The engine oil level is above the maximum level.There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter.X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 251).X If the oil level is too high: have the engine oil extracted as soonas possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

X If the oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified as soonas possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

4 On vehicles witha diesel engine,the yellowengine oil levelwarning lamplights up repeat-edly during thejourney.

There is a malfunction in the engine oil level display.X Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

% The yellow cool-ant level warninglamp lights upwhile the engineis running.

The coolant level is too low.Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The enginecould overheat and be damaged.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Switch off the engine and let it cool down.X Add coolant and be sure to observe the warning notes(Y page 253).

X If you need to add coolant frequently, have the engine coolingsystem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 223

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

? The red coolantwarning lamp islit while theengine is run-ning.

The coolant temperature is too high.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

? The red coolantwarning lamp islit while theengine is run-ning.

The coolant temperature is too high.If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads,the coolant warning lamp may come on when the ignition isswitched on or the engine is restarted. Such loads can be, forexample, driving in mountainous terrain or driving with a trailer.X Run the engine for approximately 1 minute at idling speed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the display messagecontinues to be shown.

7|

The yellowreserve fuelwarning lamp ison. At the sametime, 00, appearsin the fuel tankcontent displaywhile the engineis running,although there isfuel in the fueltank.

The fuel filler cap is not closed.X Close the fuel filler cap.You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap is closed fully.

X If the malfunction continues to be displayed, have it rectifiedimmediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

; The yellowCheck Engineindicator lamp islit up or flasheswhile the engineis running.

You have used up all fuel in the tank.The engine is running in emergency mode.X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 145).X Bleed the fuel system (Y page 141).X Start the engine three to four times in succession after refueling.Emergency running mode will be canceled. The vehicle does notneed to be checked.

; The yellowCheck Engineindicator lamp islit up or flasheswhile the engineis running.

The injection control is malfunctioning.The engine is running in emergency mode.Engine power output may be reduced.X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

In some states it is legally prescribed that after the check engineindicator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialistworkshop immediately. Observe the legal requirements.

224 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

; The yellowCheck Engineindicator lamp islit while theengine is run-ning.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emissionrelevant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect candamage the exhaust gas aftertreatment.After the first message and under normal operating conditions,you can drive on for up to approximately 500 mi (800 km). Then awarning tone sequence sounds and the engine can only be startedanother 16 times.X Observe the messages in the display.X Have the exhaust gas aftertreatment checked immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

In some states it is legally prescribed that after the check engineindicator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialistworkshop immediately. Observe the legal requirements.

% If you turn thekey to position 2in the ignitionlock, the yellowpreglow indica-tor lampremains lit forapproximately1 minute. Or theyellow preglowindicator lamplights up forapproximately1 minute whilethe engine isrunning.

At extremely low temperatures, the engine may not start.There is a malfunction in the preglow system.X Have any malfunction rectified at a qualified specialist work-shop.

È The yellow air fil-ter indicatorlamp is lit whilethe engine isrunning.

The service limit for the air filter has been reached. The air filter isdirty.X Have the air filter element replaced as soon as possible at aqualified specialist workshop.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 225

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

h The yellow tirepressure moni-tor warning lampcomes on.

G WARNINGThe tire pressure monitor indicates a rapid or severe loss of pres-sure in at least one tire.X Stop the vehicle without making any extreme steering maneu-vers or braking suddenly. Pay attention to the traffic conditionswhile doing so.

X Check the tires and correct the tire pressure. If a tire continuesto lose pressure, it must be replaced. Replace damaged tiresimmediately.The warning light will go out after the flat tire has been rectifiedand you have been driving for a few minutes.

X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the mes-sages in the display (Y page 197).

h US vehiclesonly:The yellow tirepressure moni-tor warning lampflashes for60 seconds andthen remains lit.

The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

: The yellow waterseparator indi-cator lamp is litwhen the igni-tion is switchedon.

Thewater that has collected in the water separator of the fuel filterhas reached the maximum level.X Drain the water separator (Y page 255).

¦ The yellowwasher fluidlevel indicatorlamp for thewindshieldwasher/head-lamp cleaningsystem is litafter the engineis started orwhile the vehicleis in motion.

The water level is too low.X Add washer fluid (Y page 255).

226 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

7 The red seat beltwarning lamplights up contin-uously orflashes. A warn-ing tone mayalso sound.

The warning lamp is to remind you to fasten your seat belt.X Fasten seat belt (Y page 45).

b When the key isturned to posi-tion 2 in the igni-tion lock, theyellow bulbwarning lamplights up.

One of the exterior lighting bulbs is faulty, with the exception of theperimeter lamps and the trailer lighting.

i Depending on the equipment, the bulb failure indicator can failfor all lamps with the exception of the turn signal lamps.

X Replace the faulty bulb as soon as possible (Y page 99).

1 The yellow "dooropen" indicatorlamp is lit whiledriving.

The vehicle is moving without all doors or the hood being closed.X Close the doors or hood.

1 The yellow "dooropen" indicatorlamp is lit.

The electrical step has retracted or extended only partially or notat all.X Make sure there is sufficient free space for the electrical step.X Open or close the sliding door again.X If the electrical step still does not extend or retract fully, pushthe step in manually (Y page 74). Before stepping out, remindthe passengers that the step is missing.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 227

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

228

Useful information ............................ 230Stowage spaces and stowage com-partments .......................................... 230Folding table in the twin co-driver'sseat .................................................... 234Cup holder ......................................... 234Bottle holder ...................................... 235Ashtray .............................................. 235Cigarette lighter ................................ 23512 V socket ....................................... 236Mobile phone ..................................... 236Additional communications equip-ment ................................................... 237

229

Stow

ingandfeatures

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all modelsaswell as standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to systems and functionsrelevant to safety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 25).

Stowage spaces and stowage com-partments

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

In addition, observe the information in the"Loading guidelines" section (Y page 240).

Glove box

Glove box (example: glove box with a lockable lid)1 Unlocked2 Locked= Glove box handleYou can lock and unlock the glove box usingthe mechanical or folding key.X To open: unlock the glove box lid if neces-sary.

X Pull glove box handle= in the direction ofthe arrow.

? Card holderA Pen holderX To close: fold the glove box up and press ituntil it engages.

230 Stowage spaces and stowage compartmentsStow

ingandfeatures

Eyeglasses compartment in the over-head control panel

X To open: briefly press cover:.The eyeglasses compartment opens down-wards.

X To close: press the eyeglasses compart-ment into the overhead control panel untilit engages.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartmentis always closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

Dashboard stowage compartments

G WARNINGObjects protruding from the stowage com-partment above the co-driver front air bagcould obstruct or even prevent deployment ofthe co-driver front air bag. The co-driver frontair bag may then fail to provide the intendedprotection. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Do not place any protruding objects in thestowage compartment above the co-driverfront air bag.

! The right and left storage spaces may beloadedwith amaximumof 11 lb (5 kg) each.

Stowage space (example: co-driver's side)

Stowage compartment equipped with smartphoneconnections= USB port? 3.5 mm audio jack

i Depending on the vehicle equipment, aUSB port and an AUX-in connection isinstalled in the stowage compartment. AMedia Interface is a universal interface forportable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod®or MP3 player (see the separate audio sys-tem operating instructions).

Stowage spaces and stowage compartments 231

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartment in the centerconsole

Stowage compartment on the dashboard abovethe center console (example with lid)

The stowage compartments on and in thecenter console can be used to store small,light objects.X To open: pull release handle;.Lid: swings up.

X To close: close lid: and engage it.The lid of the stowage compartment mustremain closed while the vehicle is inmotionto ensure that stowed objects are con-tained safely.

Stowage space above the headliner! The entire stowage space may be loadedwith a maximum of 66 lb (30 kg).Do not place high, bulky loads in the stow-age space. You could otherwise damagethe headliner in the event of sharp braking.

On vehicles with a partition, stowagespace: can only be loaded from the cargocompartment.

Stowage space above the windshield! The right and left stowage spaces may beloaded with a maximum of 5.5 lb (2.5 kg)each.

Stowage compartment (example: driver's side): Stowage compartment

Stowage compartment under the twinco-driver's seat

Twin co-driver's seat (example: Cargo Van)

You can stow various articles in the stowagecompartment under the twin co-driver's seat.X To fold a seat cushion forwards: lift theseat cushion out of front anchorage:.

X Pull the seat cushion forwards slightly andout of rear anchorage;.

X Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion up.

232 Stowage spaces and stowage compartmentsStow

ingandfeatures

X To fold the seat cushion back: fold downthe seat cushion by the rear edge.

X Slide the seat cushion under the seat back-rest into rear anchorage;.

X Push down on the seat cushion at the frontuntil it engages in front anchorage:.

Stowage compartment under the rearbench seat

G WARNINGAlways secure the folded-up seat cushionwith the retainer loop. The seat cushion couldotherwise drop down unexpectedly andthereby cause injury to yourself or others.

G WARNINGWhen folding down the seat cushion, makesure that nobody can become trapped.

! The retainer loop is neither a grab handlefor people to use nor a securing point forloads. It may tear if used incorrectly.

For vehicles with a crewcab, you can use thestowage compartment under the rear benchseat to safely store tools and other smallitems.

X To fold up the rear bench seat: lift seatcushion: out of the front anchorage andfold it upwards in the direction of the arrow.

Retainer loops; are secured to the outerhead restraints.X Attach retainer loop; to hook= under-neath folded-up seat cushion:.

X To fold down the seat cushion: hold seatcushion: and detach retainer loop;from hook=.

X Fold down seat cushion:.The seat cushion engages automatically.

Paper holder

X To open: press the top of paper holder:.

Stowage spaces and stowage compartments 233

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

Folding table in the twin co-driver'sseat

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

X To fold down the folding table: pull fold-ing table: forward by the tab.

X Fold folding table: down in the directionof the arrow and onto the seat cushion.i The folding table is equipped with a penholder and cup holder.

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe cup holder cannot hold a container securewhilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilsttraveling, the container may be flung aroundand liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu-pants may come into contact with the liquidand if it is hot, they may be scalded. You maybe distracted from the traffic conditions and

you could lose control of the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident and injury.Only use the cup holder when the vehicle isstationary. Only use the cup holder for con-tainers of the right size. Always close the con-tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.

! Do not use the cup holder recesses asashtrays. This could damage the cup hold-ers.

Cup holders in the dashboard

Cup holder in dashboard stowage compartment(example: right-hand side of vehicle): Cup holder

i If your vehicle is equipped with a twin co-driver's seat, you will find further cup hold-ers (Y page 234) in the folding table.

Cup holders in the center console

Cup holders in the center console

234 Cup holderStow

ingandfeatures

X To open: pull out ashtray compartment:by the recess.Clamping arm; of the cup holder opensout fully.i Vehicles with the non-smoking packagehave an additional cup holder instead of theashtray.

X Place the beverage container into the cupholder and push clamping arm; againstthe container.

X To close: push ashtray compartment:into the center console until it engages.

Bottle holder

Bottle holders: in the front doors (example: co-driver's door)

Ashtray

Ashtray in the center console

Ashtray in the center console

X Pull ashtray compartment: out byrecess;.

X To open: fold cover= upwards.X To remove the insert: hold the ashtray bythe recesses on the left and right and pullthe insert out to empty it.

X To replace the insert: press it down intothe holder as shown.Make sure that the insert is inserted cor-rectly. Otherwise you will not be able toclose ashtray compartment:.

Ashtrays in the passenger compart-ment

Ashtrays on the left and right in the side trim panelsX To open: fold out the ashtray.X To remove the insert: press retainingclip: down and remove the ashtray fromthe trim.

X To replace the insert: insert the ashtraydown into the trim and close it.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.

Cigarette lighter 235

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

X To use the cigarette lighter: turn the keyto position 1 in the ignition lock.

X Press in cigarette lighter:.The cigarette lighter will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

X Pull the cigarette lighter out of the socketby its handle.

12 V socket

Socket on the lower section of the center console: 12 V socket (25 A)

The 12 V sockets for accessories are:Ron the lower section of the center console(12 V, 25 A)Ron the inside of the driver's seat frame(12 V, 15 A)Rin the respective corner trim next to therear doors in the passenger compartment(12 V, 15 A)Rin the cargo compartment next to the leftrear door (12 V, 15 A)

You can use the 12 V sockets (15 A) foraccessories with a maximum power con-sumption of 180 W. You can connect acces-sories with a maximum power consumptionof 300 W to the 12 V socket (25 A) on thelower section of the center console.

i The sockets are supplied with power evenwhen the key is removed from the ignitionlock. If accessories, e.g. a coolbox, remainconnected while the engine is not running,the battery will discharge.

Mobile phone

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating mobile phones.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

236 Mobile phoneStow

ingandfeatures

You and others can suffer health-related dam-age through electromagnetic radiation. Byusing an exterior antenna, a possible healthrisk caused by electromagnetic fields, as dis-cussed in scientific circles, is taken intoaccount. Only have the exterior antennainstalled by a qualified specialist workshop.We recommend the use of an approved exte-rior antenna for operating the mobile phone.Only in this way can optimal mobile phonereception quality in the vehicle be ensuredand mutual interference between the vehicleelectronics and mobile phones minimized.Observe the legal requirements for each indi-vidual country.

Mobile phone pre-installationThe mobile phone pre-installation includes ahands-free system integrated into the vehi-cle. The microphone for the hands-free sys-tem is installed in the overhead control panelor in the overhead stowage compartmenttogether with the front interior light.In order to use the hands-free system, youwillneed a special bracket. The Sprinter acces-sories include brackets for various mobilephone models.

i Mobile phone brackets which are availa-ble from various manufacturers on theopen market are not compatible with theSprinter telephone system. You can recog-nize suitable holders for your mobile phoneby the imprinted star and the B6 spare partnumber on the back of the bracket.

Detailed instructions for use can be found inthe operating instructions for the mobilephone bracket and in the separate operatinginstructions for the mobile phone pre-instal-lation.

i The mobile phone battery is chargeddepending on the condition of charge andthe position of the key in the ignition lock.The mobile phone display indicates thecharging process.

Additional communications equip-ment

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating mobile communicationequipment.Please remember, a navigation system doesnot supply information on the load-bearingcapacity of bridges or the overhead clearanceof underpasses. The driver remains responsi-ble for safety at all times.You and others can suffer health-related dam-age through electromagnetic radiation. Byusing an exterior antenna, a possible healthrisk caused by electromagnetic fields, as dis-cussed in scientific circles, is taken intoaccount. Only have the exterior antennainstalled by a qualified specialist workshop.You will find information on installing electri-cal or electronic equipment in the “Vehicleelectronics” section (Y page 316).

Installation for PNDmobile navigationdevicesYou can secure a personal navigation device(Personal Navigation Device PND) using acommercially available adapter.

Additional communications equipment 237

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

PND connector (on the side behind the instrumentcluster)= USB port? 3.5 mm audio jack for the PND audio sig-

nal (voice announcements)X Connecting the PND: connect the PNDports to the appropriate jacks in the vehi-cle.i You can also use USB port= and 3.5mmaudio jack? for external audio sources.

The voice announcements are heard throughthe radio speakers when you start navigation.The audio source played until this point isthen muted for the duration of the voiceannouncements.

i If you use audio devices or personal nav-igation devices which have been recom-mended by Mercedes-Benz, you can use allof the functions available, such as themutefunction.

You can obtain further information from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

238 Additional communications equipmentStow

ingandfeatures

Useful information ............................ 240Loading guidelines ............................ 240Load distribution ............................... 242Securing loads .................................. 242Carrier systems ................................. 245

239

Transportin

gloads

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all modelsaswell as standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to systems and functionsrelevant to safety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 25).

Loading guidelines

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAs a result of improperly placed or unevenlydistributed loads, the center of gravity of theload being transported may be too high or toofar back. This can significantly impair handlingas well as steering and braking characteris-tics. There is a risk of an accident.Always make sure that the center of gravity ofthe load is:Rbetween the axlesandRas low as possible, near the rear axle.

G WARNINGWhen objects are unsecured or inadequatelysecured, they can slip, turn over or be thrownabout, striking vehicle occupants. This alsoapplies to:Rluggage or loadsRa rear bench seat which has been removedand is being transported in the vehicle in anexceptional case.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of braking maneuvers or abruptchanges in direction.Always stow objects in such a way that theycannot be tossed about. Before traveling,secure objects, luggage or loads to prevent

them slipping or tipping over. If you remove arear bench seat, it is advisable to store it out-side the vehicle.

G WARNINGWhen the permissible wheel loads, axle loadsand/or the maximum permissible gross vehi-cle weight are exceeded, driving safety iscompromised. The handling as well as steer-ing and braking characteristics may be signif-icantly impaired. Overloaded tires may over-heat, causing them to burst. There is a risk ofan accident.When transporting a load, always observe thepermissible wheel loads, axle loads and themaximum permissible gross vehicle weightfor the vehicle (including occupants).

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

! If you are using a roof carrier, observe themaximum roof load and maximum roof car-rier load.

You will find information about the maximumroof load in the "Technical data" section(Y page 328) and information about roof car-riers in the "Carrier systems" section(Y page 245).RDo not stack luggage or loads higher thanthe backrests.RStow objects preferably in the cargo com-partment.RWhen transporting luggage, always use thecargo tie-down rings and a parcel net, ifpresent.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastenerswhich are suitable for theweight and size ofthe load.

240 Loading guidelinesTransportin

gloads

Always observe the operating instructions ofthe respective manufacturer when using suit-able load securing aids or tie downs. In par-ticular, the information on service life.Load securing aids and tie downs may not beused, for example, if:Ridentification marks are missing or illegibleRthere are yarn breakages, damage to bear-ing seams or other signs of tearingRthere are signs of shearing, deformation,pinching or other damageRthere is damage to clamping or connectingelements

Such load securing aids and tie downs areworn; they should not be used and must bereplaced. If you use load securing aids or tiedowns which are worn, the load may not besufficiently secured and could cause damageto property.After an accident, the following must bechecked at a specialist workshop:RCargo compartment floorRLoad surfaceRCargo tie-down ringsRTie downsOtherwise, the load may not be correctlysecured the next time anything is stowed.Even if you follow all loading guidelines, theload increases the risk of injury in the event ofan accident. Observe the tips in the "Securingluggage/loads" (Y page 242) and "Load dis-tribution" (Y page 242) sections.

Before loading! The anti-slip mats cannot be used forsecuring goods andmust be replacedwhenthey show signs of:RPermanent deformation and crushingRCrack formationRCuts

X Tire pressure: check the tire pressure andcorrect if necessary (Y page 288).

X Cargo compartment floor: clean thecargo compartment floor.The cargo compartment floor must be freefrom oil and dust, dry and swept clean toprevent the load from slipping.

X Place non-slip mats (anti-slip mats) on thecargo compartment floor if necessary.

During loading! On passenger van versions with maxi-mum seating layout, the permissible rearaxle load would be exceeded if the full pay-load were to be loaded in the cargo com-partment.

X Observe the gross axle weight rating andpermissible gross vehicle weight for yourvehicle.Take into account that your vehicle's curbweight is increased if accessories oroptional equipment are installed. The max-imum payload is thus reduced.

X Observe the notes on load distribution(Y page 242).The overall center of gravity of the loadshould always be as low as possible, cen-tered and between the axles near the rearaxle.

X Secure the load (Y page 242).Observe the legal requirements of thecountry in which you are currently driving.

Checks after loading

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases, such as carbonmonoxide. If the slidingdoor or rear door is open when the engine isrunning, exhaust gases can enter the vehicleinterior, especially during the journey. Thereis a risk of poisoning.

Loading guidelines 241

Transportin

gloads

Z

Always switch off the engine before openingthe sliding door or rear door. Never drive thevehicle when the sliding door or rear door isopen.

X Securing loads: check that the load issecure before every journey and at regularintervals during a long journey, and correctif necessary.

X Doors: close the sliding doors and reardoors.

X Tire pressure: adjust the tire pressuresaccording to the vehicle load (Y page 288).

X Driving style: adapt your driving styleaccording to the vehicle load.

Load distribution

General notes! Excessive loads on individual points of thecargo floor or on the load surface impairvehicle handling characteristics and couldcause damage to the floor covering.

The overall center of gravity of the load shouldalways be as low as possible, centered andbetween the axles near the rear axle.On Cargo Vans/Passenger Vans:X Always transport loads in the cargo com-partment.

X Always place the load against the backrestsof the rear bench seat.

X Move large and heavy loads as far towardsthe front of the vehicle as possible againstthe rear bench seat. Stow the load flushwith the rear bench seat.

X Always additionally secure the load withsuitable load-securing aids or tie downs.

Observe the following notes:RDo not stack loads higher than the upperedge of the backrests.RTransport loads behind seats that are notoccupied.RIf the rear bench seat is not occupied, insertthe seat belts crosswise into the buckle ofthe opposite seat belt.

Securing loads

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you attach the tie-down incorrectly whensecuring the load, the following may occur inthe event of abrupt changes in direction, brak-ing maneuvers or an accident:Rthe cargo tie-down rings may becomedetached or the tie-down may tear if thepermissible load is exceededRthe load may not be restrained.This may cause the load to slip, tip over or betossed about, striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always tension the tie-downs in the propermanner and only between the describedcargo tie-down rings. Always use tie-downsdesigned specifically for the loads.

G WARNINGYou may not transport anyone in the cargocompartment or on the load surface. Never letmore people ride in the vehicle than there areseat belts available. Make sure everyone rid-ing in the vehicle is correctly restrained with aseparate seat belt. Never use a seat belt formore than one person at a time.

! Observe the information on the maximumloading capacity of the individual cargo tie-down points.If you use several cargo tie-down points tosecure a load, you must always take the

242 Securing loadsTransportin

gloads

maximum loading capacity of the weakestcargo tie-down point into account.If you brake hard, for example, the forcesacting could be up to several times theweight force of the load. Always use multi-ple cargo tie-down points in order to dis-tribute the force absorption. Load theanchorages evenly.

Spread the load evenly between the cargo tie-down points or tie-down rings.Please also refer to the notes about qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 25).Always observe the operating instructions orthe notes of the lashing strap manufacturerfor the operation of the lashing strap.Information about the maximum loadingcapacity of the cargo tie-down points can befound in the "Technical data" section(Y page 327).As the driver, you are responsible for ensuringthat:RThe applicable requirements and guide-lines relating to load-securing practicesmust be met.If this is not the case, this may constitute apunishable offense, depending on local leg-islation and any ensuing consequences.You should therefore observe the respec-tive legal requirements for the relevantcountry.

Make sure that the load is secure before everyjourney and at regular intervals during a longjourney. Correct an incorrectly or inade-quately secured load if necessary.You can obtain information about securingthe load correctly from the manufacturer ofthe load securing aids or tie down for securingthe load.X Fill spaces between the load and the cargocompartment walls or wheel housings(form-locking). Use rigid load securing aids,such as wedges, wooden fixings or pad-ding.

X Attach secured and stabilized loads in alldirections. Use the cargo tie-down points

or cargo tie-down rings and the loading railsin the cargo compartment or on the cargoarea.Only use tie downs, such as lashing rods orlashing nets and lashing straps, that havebeen tested in accordance with currentstandards (e.g. DIN EN).Always use the cargo tie-down rings closestto the load to secure it and pad sharp edgesfor protection.Loads, and heavy loads in particular, shouldpreferably be secured using the cargo tie-down rings.i Tie downs tested in accordance with cur-rent standards (e.g. DIN EN) are available atany qualified specialist workshop.

Cargo tie-down point (example: Passenger Van): Cargo tie-down rings

Securing loads 243

Transportin

gloads

Z

Cargo tie-down point (example: Cargo Van withoutloading rails): Cargo tie-down rings

Cargo tie-down point (example: Cargo Van withloading rails): Cargo tie-down rings; Load railsSecure loose loads with a tested lashing netor a tarpaulin.X Always fasten the lashing net or tarpaulin toall available cargo tie-down points. Makesure that the retaining hooks are securedagainst accidental opening.

If your vehicle is equipped with loadingrails; in the floor, you can place lashing rodsdirectly in front of and behind the load. Thelashing rods directly absorb the potentialshifting forces.

Securing loads on the cargo compartmentfloor by lashing them down is only recom-mended for lightweight loads. Place non-slipmats (anti-slip mats) under the load toincrease load security.

Installing/removing cargo tie-downrings for the load rails

G WARNINGIf the cargo tie-down ring is not properlyinstalled, it may slip or become detached inthe event of abrupt changes in direction, brak-ingmaneuvers or an accident. This may causeobjects, luggage or the load to slip, tip over orbe tossed about, striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury.Before using the cargo tie-down rings, alwaysmake sure they are properly installed andcannot be moved.

X To install: slide the cargo tie-down ringthrough a recess in the loading rail close tothe load until locking mechanism:engages in the recess.i When you pull locking mechanism: upand out of the recess, the cargo tie-downring is able to move within the loading rail.Make sure that locking mechanism: isalways engaged in a recess.

X Check the cargo tie-down ring for firm seat-ing.

X To remove: pull locking mechanism: upand pull the cargo tie-down ring towards

244 Securing loadsTransportin

gloads

the locking mechanism and out of the load-ing rail through a recess.

Carrier systems

Roof carrier

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

You can find information about the maximumroof load in the "Technical data" section(Y page 328).

! Make sure that:Rthe screws for the roof carrier are tight-ened in the sliding blocks to a torque of6.0 – 7.4 lb-ft (8 – 10 Nm)Rthe bolts, when tightened, do not touchthe rails.Rthe slot nuts are not located in the area ofthe plastic caps.Rthe slot nuts have the right cross-section.Rthe mounting rails in the interior are freeof dirt.Rthe screws are retightened evenly afterapproximately 300 miles (500 km).

We recommend that you only use roofracks tested and approved by Sprinter.These help avoid vehicle damage.

! If you want to retrofit securing rails, haveit done at a qualified specialist workshop.You could otherwise damage the vehicle.

: Securing railsIt is possible to install a roof carrier if yourvehicle is equipped with securing rails on theroof. Special mounting elements (groovedplates) are available as accessories.Thesemounting elements are available at anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

Ladder carrier

Example: ladder rack on Chassis Cab: Front ladder rack; Rear ladder rackPay attention to the important safety notes inthe "Loading guidelines" section(Y page 240).You can find information about the maximumladder rack load in the "Technical data" sec-tion (Y page 245).You will find information about cleaning andcare in the "Notes on care" (Y page 265) and"Power washers" (Y page 266) sections.

Carrier systems 245

Transportin

gloads

Z

246

Useful information ............................ 248Engine compartment ........................ 248Vehicle interior ................................. 256Maintenance ...................................... 256Battery ............................................... 258Care .................................................... 265

247

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all modelsaswell as standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to systems and functionsrelevant to safety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 25).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.

If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe fuel injection system operates with a highvoltage. If you touch the live components, youcould receive an electric shock. There is a riskof injury.Never touch components of the fuel injectionsystem when the ignition is switched on.

The live components of the fuel injection sys-tem are, for example, the injectors.

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

If you have to carry out work in the enginecompartment, only touch the following com-ponents:RHoodROil dipstickREngine oil filler neck capRWasher fluid reservoir capRCoolant expansion tank cap

Opening the hood

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

248 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Hood release lever in the driver's footwell

Observe the safety notes when you open thehood.X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic aspossible on level ground.

X Switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

X Pull release handle: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap and push lever; on thehood catch up.

X Swing the hood upwards until support strut= engages and the hood is supported.

Closing the hood

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it could tip forwardduring rapid deceleration of the vehicle andhit persons or objects within its path. There isa risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, always make sure that the hood isclosed and locked completely before drivingoff.

If the hood is not locked and you are alreadydriving at walking pace:Rthe yellow1 indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes on for vehicleswithout steering-wheel buttons.Rthe1 Hood openHood open display appears forvehicles with steering-wheel buttons.

! When you press the support strut back,make sure that you do not press it againstthe detent position and cause it to bend.

! Do not use your hands to push the hooddown. You could damage it otherwise.

X Lift the hood slightly.X Press support strut= towards the back.X Lower the hood and allow it to fall withmomentum from a height of approximately1 ft (30 cm).The hood locks audibly.

X Check that the hood is correctly locked.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. If the hood is not cor-rectly engaged, open the hood again. Letthe hood fall with a little more momentum.

Engine compartment 249

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Overview of the engine compartment

Example: engine: Coolant expansion tank cap

(Y page 253); DEF filler neck cap4 (Y page 148)= Engine oil filler neck cap (Y page 250)? Brake fluid expansion tank cap

(Y page 254)A Washer fluid reservoir cap (Y page 255)Regularly check the fluid level and the assem-bly for leaks. If you detect fluid loss, e.g. oilflecks on the vehicle parking space, consult aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

Engine oil

General notes

! Engine oil gets dirty in the course of oper-ation and its quality and volume are gradu-ally diminished. Regularly check the oillevel, and top up or have it replaced as nee-ded.

Observe the information on engine oils and oilconsumption in the "Technical data" section(Y page 322).You can check the oil level in the engine:Ron the display of the on-board computerRwith the oil dipstick

Checking the oil level shown in the dis-playIf at extremely low temperatures no engine oillevel is displayed after 5 minutes, repeat theengine oil level check after another5 minutes.If an oil level reading is still not displayed,check the engine oil level with the dipstick(Y page 251). Have the engine oil levelchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Only check the oil level when the engine is atnormal operating temperature.X Park the vehicle on a level surface.X Switch off the engine.X Wait 5 minutes.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.The display is activated.

X Vehicles without steering wheel but-tons: press the4 menu button on theinstrument cluster (Y page 34) repeatedlyuntil the display shows the1 symbol.The --:----:-- display message appears in thedisplay while the engine oil level measure-ment is running.

X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons:press the Ë service button on the instru-ment cluster (Y page 34).The4 EngineEngine oiloil levellevel MeasuringMeasuringin progressin progress display message appears inthe display while the engine oil level meas-urement is in progress.

Display message for vehicles withoutsteering-wheel buttons: the display mayshow the followingmessages after the engineoil level measurement.

1 Action

OKOK X Do not add oil.

4 For Cargo Van/Passenger Van only

250 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

– 1.0 qts– 1.0 qts X Add the amount of oilshown (Y page 252).

X Check the engine oil levelagain after a fewminutes.

– 1.5 qts– 1.5 qts– 2.0 qts– 2.0 qtsHIHI The oil level is too high.

X Have excess oil removed.

Measurement units in the display:Rqtsqts USA onlyRltrltr Canada onlyDisplay message for vehicles with steer-ing-wheel buttons: the display may showthe following messages after the engine oillevel measurement.

1 Action

EngineEngineoil leveloil levelOKOK

X Do not add oil.

EngineEngineoil Addoil Add1.0 quart1.0 quart

X Add the amount of oilshown (Y page 252).

X Check the engine oil levelagain after a fewminutes.EngineEngine

oil Addoil Add1.51.5 quartsquartsEngineEngineoil Addoil Add2.02.0 quartsquartsEngineEngineoil leveloil levelReduceReduceoil leveloil level

The oil level is too high.X Have excess oil removed.

Eng. oilEng. oillev. Turnlev. Turnignitionignitionon foron forlevellevel

X Turn the key to position 2in the ignition lock.

ObserveObservewait.wait.periodperiod

X Repeat the engine oilmeasurement after about5 minutes if the engine isat normal operating tem-perature.

X Repeat the engine oilmeasurement after about30minutes if the engine isnot at normal operatingtemperature.

EngineEngineoil leveloil levelNot whenNot wheneng. run‐eng. run‐ningning

X Switch off the enginewhen it is at normal oper-ating temperature andwait approximately5 minutes before measur-ing the engine oil level.

Measurement units in the display:Rqtsqts USA onlyRltrltr Canada onlyChecking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

Example: 4-cylinder diesel engine

Engine compartment 251

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Example: 6-cylinder diesel engine

For vehicles with a red oil dipstick, only checkthe oil level when the engine is at normaloperating temperature:X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic aspossible on level ground.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

X Switch off the engine.X Wait 5 minutes.

For vehicles with a yellow oil dipstick, onlycheck the oil level when the engine is cold.X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic aspossible on level ground.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

X Open the hood (Y page 248).X Pull out oil dipstick:.X Wipe oil dipstick: using a lint-free cloth.X Insert oil dipstick: back into the guidetube as far as it will go and remove it again.If the level is between minimum mark=and maximum mark;, the oil level is cor-rect.

X If the oil level has dropped to or below min-imum mark=, open cap? and addengine oil (Y page 252).The difference in quantity betweenmarks; and= is approximately2 US quarts (2 liters).

X Insert the oil dipstick into the guide tube asfar as it will go.

X Close the hood (Y page 249).

OM651 4-cylinder diesel engine:At outside temperatures between 32 ‡(–0 †) and 86 ‡ (30 †), the oil level can bechecked when the engine is cold.Measuring the engine oil when the engine iscold is less precise than measuring when theengine is at normal operating temperature.When the appropriate warning is shown in thedisplayX Add engine oil (Y page 252)orX Have engine oil siphoned off.

Add engine oil

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

! The alternator is located below the engineoil filler neck. If engine oil spills onto thealternator, there is a danger of alternatordamage. Be very careful when addingengine oil.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

X Open the hood (Y page 248).X Unscrew and remove cap?.X Add engine oil.

252 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

X Replace cap? on the filler neck andtighten.When doing so, make sure that the capengages correctly.

X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick(Y page 251) or on the display(Y page 250).

X Close the hood.

Coolant

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized, par-ticularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

Only check the coolant level and/or fill thecoolant if the vehicle is on a level surface andthe engine has cooled down. The coolant tem-perature must be below 122 ‡ (50 †).

! Check the engine cooling and heating sys-tem regularly for leaks.If a large quantity of coolant is lost, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGCoolant contains glycol and is therefore toxic.Do not swallow the coolant. See a doctorimmediately if you swallow coolant.Make sure that coolant does not come intocontact with skin, eyes or clothing. In case ofcontact with eyes, rinse immediately withplenty of clean water. Clean affected areas ofskin and clothing with soap and water imme-diately. Change any affected clothing imme-diately.

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Take care not to spill any coolant on pain-ted surfaces. You could otherwise damagethe paintwork.

Example: cap and coolant expansion tankChecking the coolant levelX Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic aspossible on level ground.

X Switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

X Open the hood (Y page 248).X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap: further and remove it.X Check the coolant level.If the coolant reaches the maximum markon coolant expansion tank;, there isenough coolant in coolant expansiontank;.

Engine compartment 253

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Adding coolantX If the coolant drops under the minimummark on coolant expansion tank;, addcoolant to the maximum mark.Observe the information on coolant mix-ture ratio and water quality in the "Techni-cal data" section (Y page 325). To preventdamage to the engine cooling system, useonly approved corrosion inhibitor/anti-freeze that comply with theMercedes-BenzSpecifications for Service Products.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise totighten.

X Start the engine.X After approximately 5 minutes, switch offthe engine and allow it to cool down.

X Check the coolant level again and add cool-ant if necessary.

X Close the hood.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

Brake fluid is hazardous to health. Alsoobserve the safety notes in the "Service prod-ucts and capacities" section (Y page 318).

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.

You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic andrubber. If paint, plastic or rubber has comeinto contact with brake fluid, rinse withwater immediately.

Have the brake fluid renewed every 2 years ata qualified specialist workshop. Observe theinformation on brake fluid in the "Technicaldata" section (Y page 324).

Check the brake fluid level regularly, e.g.weekly or when refueling.Checking the brake fluid levelX Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic aspossible on level ground.

X Switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

X Open the hood (Y page 248).X Check the brake fluid level.The brake fluid level is correct if the level isbetween the MIN mark and MAX mark onbrake fluid reservoir:.

X Close the hood.

! If the brake fluid level in the brake fluidreservoir has fallen to the MIN mark orbelow, check the brake system immedi-ately for leaks. Also check the thickness ofthe brake linings. Visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.Do not add brake fluid. This does not cor-rect the malfunction.

254 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Washer fluid

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

Example: washer fluid reservoir

Add windshield washer concentrate to thewasher fluid all year round. Observe the infor-mation onwasher fluid in the "Technical data"section (Y page 326).Adding washer fluidX Mix thewasher fluid to the appropriatemix-ing ratio in a container beforehand.

X Open the hood (Y page 248).X Pull cap: on the washer fluid reservoirupwards at the tab.

X Add the premixed washer fluid.X Press cap: onto the filler neck until itengages audibly.

X Close the hood.

Fuel system

Draining the fuel filter

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. Improper handling offuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creatingsparks under all circumstances. Switch off theignition and auxiliary heating before carryingout work to the fuel system. Always wear pro-tective gloves.

H Environmental noteDispose of the water-fuel mixture in an envi-ronmentally responsible manner.

! When the: indicator lamp lights up,drain the fuel filter with water separatorimmediately. Otherwise, the enginemay bedamaged.

If the: indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes on, drain fuel filter with waterseparator= immediately.i We recommend that you have this main-tenance work carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Park the vehicle safely and secure it fromrolling away.

X Switch off the auxiliary heating system .X Switch off the engine.X Open the hood (Y page 248).X Place a suitable receptacle under drainhose:.

Engine compartment 255

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Open drain plug; immediately until thewater/fuel mixture flows out of drainhose:.

X Screw in drain plug; as soon as approx-imately 0.2 US quarts(0.2 liters) of thewater/fuel mixture have been collected.The electrical fuel pumpautomatically haltsthe flow of the water/fuel mixture after30 seconds.

X After draining, turn the key back to posi-tion 0 in the ignition lock.

X Dispose of the collected water/fuel mix-ture in an environmentally responsiblemanner, e.g. at a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Check drain plug;. The drain plug mustbe closed.When the engine is running and drainhose; is open, fuel is lost through drainhose:.

X Close the hood (Y page 249).

If the: indicator lamp does not go outafter draining:X Drain the fuel filter again.X If the: indicator lamp does not go outafter draining for the second time, have thecause checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Vehicle interior

Air filter for the rear-compartment airconditioning! Regularly check the air filters for visibledirt. Clean or replace a dirty filter mat. Thedirt may otherwise lead to damage to theair-conditioning system.

Filter magazine, located on the roof in the rearcompartment

An increased amount of sand or dust maycollect in the air filter of the rear-compart-ment air conditioningwhen you drive on dustyor sandy roads.X To remove the filter mat: carefully prycover: out of recesses; and remove.

X Remove the filter mat from the air duct.X To clean the filter mat: wash the dirty fil-ter mat with clear water.

X Leave the filter mat to dry.i The filtermatmust not be cleanedor driedin a machine.

X To install the filter mat: insert the filtermat into the air duct.

X Replace and engage cover:.

Maintenance

General notes

H Environmental noteObserve measures to protect the environ-ment when working on the vehicle. You mustobserve the legal requirements when dispos-ing of service products, e.g. engine oil. Thisalso includes all components, e.g. filters,which have come into contact with serviceproducts. Any qualified specialist workshopcan provide information about this.Dispose of empty containers, cleaning clothsand care products in an environmentally

256 MaintenanceMaintenance

andcare

responsible manner. Comply with the instruc-tions for use of the care products.Do not run the engine for longer than neces-sary when the vehicle is stationary.

Before having maintenance and repairs per-formed, it is essential to read the materialsrelated to the maintenance and repairs:Rthe applicable sections of the technicaldocumentation, e.g. the Operator's Manualand workshop information.Rregulations such as industrial safety regu-lations and accident prevention regula-tions.

While working under the vehicle, you mustsecure the vehicle on jack stands with suffi-cient load capacity.Never use the jack as a substitute. The vehi-cle's jack is intended only to raise the vehiclefor a short time when changing a wheel. It isnot suited for performing maintenance workunder the vehicle.Please also refer to the notes about qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 25).The scope and regularity of the inspectionand maintenance work primarily depend onthe often diverse operating conditions. Spe-cialist knowledge beyond the scope of thisOperator's Manual is required when carryingout testing and maintenance work. This workshould only be carried out by trained staff.The vehicle Maintenance Booklet describesthe scope and frequency of maintenancework and contains additional notes on theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty and on serviceproducts.Maintenance services must be carried out inaccordance with the provisions and recom-mendations in the Maintenance Booklet. Notdoing so could void the warranty claim andlead to refusal of goodwill gestures after themanufacturer has submitted a damagereport.

i Observe the information on Sprinter orig-inal parts in the "Technical data" section(Y page 27).

Service interval display

General notesA service that is due is displayed in the serviceinterval display about 1 month in advance. Amessage is then displayed while the vehicle isin motion or when the ignition is switched on.

i The service interval display does not pro-vide information about the engine oil level.The service interval display should there-fore not be confused with the5 engineoil level display.

The service due date is displayed in days ormiles (kilometers), depending on the totaldistance driven.The symbols or letters on the service displayshow the type of service that is due.¯ or AA for a minor service° or BB for a major service

Service due date displayVehicles with steering wheel buttons: thefollowing messages may be displayed.R¯ Service A due in ... daysService A due in ... daysR¯ Service A due in ... miService A due in ... mi (kmkm)R¯ Service A Carry out nowService A Carry out nowVehicles without steering wheel buttons:the following messages may be displayed.R¯ for service AR° for Service BAdditionally, you will see the remaining dis-tance in miles (mimi) or kilometers (kmkm) or theremaining time in days (dd).

Maintenance 257

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Service due date has been exceededVehicles with steering wheel buttons: ifyou have missed the service due date, one ofthe followingmessages appears in the displayand warning tone also sounds.R¯ Service A overdue by ... daysService A overdue by ... daysR¯ ServiceService AA overdueoverdue byby ...... kmkm (kmkm)Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:if you have missed the service due date, the¯ or° symbol for the service flashesfor 10 seconds after the ignition is switchedon. A minus sign also appears in front of theservice due date.

Calling up the service due dateX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.The display is activated.

Vehicles without steering wheel buttonsX Press the4 menu button on the instru-ment cluster repeatedly until the¯ or° symbol for the service appears in thedisplay.Additionally, you will see the remaining dis-tance in miles (mimi) or kilometers (kmkm) or theremaining time in days (dd).

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsX Press theVorUbutton on the steer-ing wheel until the standard display(Y page 187) appears in the display.

X Press the&or*button on the steer-ing wheel repeatedly until the service mes-sage appears in the display, for example:R¯ Service A due in ... daysService A due in ... daysR¯ Service A due in ... kmService A due in ... km (kmkm)

Battery

Important safety notesWork on the battery, e.g. removing or instal-ling, requires specialist knowledge and theuse of special tools. Therefore, always have

work on the battery carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®(Electronic Stability Program). The operatingsafety of your vehicle may be restricted. Youcould lose control of the vehicle, for example:RbrakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuverand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Further information can be found under "ABS"(Y page 57) and under "ESP®" (Y page 59).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The flammable gas mix is produced when thebattery is charged or when the vehicle isjump-started.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery are electrostatically charged. Electro-static charging results, for example, from:Rwearing synthetic clothingRfriction between clothing and the seat

258 BatteryMaintenance

andcare

Rdragging or pushing the battery across car-pet flooring or any other synthetic materi-alsRrubbing the battery with cloths or towels.Comply with the following safety precautionsand take protective measures when handlingbatteries.

Risk of explosion. Explosive oxy-hydrogen is produced when bat-teries are being charged. Onlycharge batteries in well-ventilatedareas.Fire, open flames and smoking aretherefore prohibited when work-ing on the battery. Avoid creatingsparks.Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-tactwith the skin, eyes or clothing.Wear acid-proof protective gloves.If skin or clothes are splashedwithacid, neutralize the splashesimmediately with soapy water oran acid neutralizer, and then cleanthe affected areas with water.Consult a doctor if necessary.Wear eye protection. Whenmixingwater and acid, the liquid cansplash into your eyes. Rinse acidsplashes to the eyes immediatelywith clean water and contact adoctor immediately.Keep children at a safe distance.Children are not able to assess thedangers posed by batteries andacid.When handling batteries, observethe safety precautions and specialprotective measures contained inthis Operator's Manual.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separately

and recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

Observe the following notes:RRecharge the battery more frequently, ifyou:- predominantly drive short distances- predominantly drive at low outside tem-peratures

- park the vehicle longer thanthree weeks

In order for the batteries to achieve theirmaximum possible service life, they mustalways be sufficiently charged.RWhen you park the vehicle, remove the keyif you do not require any electrical consum-ers. The vehicle will then use very littleenergy, thus conserving battery power.RWhen replacing a battery, only use batter-ies that are recommended for use inSprinter vehicles.RHave the battery removed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.RIf you leave your vehicle parked your vehi-cle longer than three weeks:- consult a qualified specialist workshopor

- switch off the power supply using thebattery main switch (Y page 137) or

- disconnect the batteries (Y page 260).Otherwise, you need to check the battery'scondition of charge every three weeks,since standby power consumption candrain the battery. If the battery voltage islower than 12.2 V, the battery must becharged. Otherwise, the battery may bedamaged by exhaustive discharging.

Battery 259

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Be sure to observe the notes on chargingthe batteries (Y page 263).

Installation locationsYour vehicle may be equipped with three bat-teries, depending on the equipment version:Ra starter battery in the battery case in thedriver's footwellRadditional battery in the engine compart-mentRauxiliary battery under the driver's seatHave the auxiliary battery removed at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Installing/removing the floor cover-ing (starter battery)

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X To remove: remove screws= and take offtrim;.

X Remove floor covering:.X To install: place floor covering: in thedriver's footwell.

X Slide floor covering: underneath the car-rier of the accelerator pedal and align it atthe base of the driver's seat and at the doorsill.Make sure that the floor covering does notobstruct the accelerator pedal.

X Put trim; in place and screw screws=back in.

Disconnecting/connecting thestarter battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

Disconnecting the starter battery

! Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition lock before you loosen ordisconnect the terminal clamps. You may

260 BatteryMaintenance

andcare

otherwise destroy electronic componentssuch as the alternator.Always disconnect the starter battery in thebattery case in the driver's footwell first.

! Always disconnect the battery inthe order described below. Never swap theterminal clamps. You may otherwise dam-age the vehicle electronics.

If the vehicle is expected to be out of use forover 3 weeks, disconnect the batteries. Thiswill prevent battery discharge caused by off-load current consumption.

Battery cover in the driver's footwellX Switch off all electrical consumers.X Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition lock.

X Remove the floor covering in the driver'sfootwell (Y page 260).

X Loosen screws; and slide batterycover: in the direction of the arrow.The screws must protrude beyond thelarger recesses.

X Remove battery cover: upwards.

Starter battery in the driver's footwellX First loosen and remove the negative ter-minal clamp so that it is no longer in contactwith the terminal.

X Remove the cover from the positive termi-nal.

X Loosen the positive terminal clamp and foldit up to the side together with the pre-fusebox.

Reconnecting the starter battery

! Always connect the battery in the orderdescribed below. Never swap the terminalclamps. You may otherwise damage thevehicle electronics.

X Fold the positive terminal clamp with thepre-fuse box down to the terminal.

X Connect the positive terminal clamp.X Attach the cover to the positive terminal.X Connect the negative terminal clamp.X Position battery cover: so that screws;are positioned over the large recesses.

X Slide battery cover: in the direction oftravel into the smaller recesses.

X Tighten screws;.X Install the floor covering in the driver's foot-well (Y page 260).

Carry out the following work after connectingthe battery:X Reset the side windows (Y page 79).

Battery 261

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Removing/installing the starter bat-tery

Removing the starter battery

X Disconnect the battery (Y page 260).X Pull breather hose with connectorbracket; from connection: on thedegassing cover.

X Loosen the bolts holding retainer=, whichprevents the battery from moving around.

X Pull retainer= upwards.X Slide the battery from its anchorage in thedirection of travel.

X Fold the bar of the battery upwards andremove the battery from the battery case.

Installing the starter batteryX Insert the battery into the battery case.X Fold down the bar of the battery.X Slide the battery into its anchorage in theopposite direction to the direction of travel.

X Insert retainer=.X Tighten the bolts on retainer= whichholds the battery in place.

X Attach breather hose with connectorbracket; to connection: of the venti-lation cover.

X Connect the battery (Y page 260).

Disconnecting and connecting theadditional battery (engine compart-ment)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.

262 BatteryMaintenance

andcare

RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

Disconnecting the additional battery

! Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition lock before you loosen ordisconnect the terminal clamps. You mayotherwise destroy electronic componentssuch as the alternator.Always disconnect the starter battery in thebattery case in the driver's footwell first.

! Always disconnect the battery inthe order described below. Never swap theterminal clamps. You may otherwise dam-age the vehicle electronics.

Additional battery in the engine compartmentX Switch off all electrical consumers.X Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition lock.

X Open the hood (Y page 248).X First loosen and remove the negative ter-minal clamp so that it is no longer in contactwith the terminal.

X Remove the cover from the positive termi-nal.

X Loosen and remove the positive terminalclamp.

Connecting the additional battery

! Always connect the battery in the orderdescribed below. Never swap the terminalclamps. You may otherwise damage thevehicle electronics.

X Connect the positive terminal clamp.X Attach the cover to the positive terminal.X Connect the negative terminal clamp.X Close the hood.

Carry out the following work after connectingthe battery:X Reset the side windows (Y page 79).

Installing and removing the additionalbattery (engine compartment)

Removing the additional batteryX Disconnect the battery (Y page 262).X Loosen the bolts holding the retainer thatprevents the battery from moving around.

X Remove the battery holder and take out thebattery.

Installing the additional batteryX Insert the battery into the battery case.X Insert the battery holder.X Tighten the bolts holding the retainer thatprevents the battery in the engine com-partment from moving around.

X Connect the battery (Y page 262).

Charging

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

Battery 263

Maintenance

andcare

Z

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light upin the instrument cluster when temperaturesare low, it is probably because the dischargedbattery has frozen. Should this be the case, donot jump-start the vehicle or charge the bat-tery. The service life of a thawed battery maybe shorter. Start-up behavior may deterio-rate, in particular at low temperatures. Havethe thawed battery checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

! Only charge the installed battery with abattery charger that has been tested andapproved by the distributor named on theinside of the front cover. This device allowsthe battery to be charged when it is instal-led in the vehicle. The vehicle's electronicsmay otherwise be damaged.

A battery charger unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested andapproved byMercedes-Benz is available as anaccessory. Only this device permits thecharging of the battery in its installed posi-tion. Only charge the installed battery with abattery charger that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz, using the jump-start connection point in the engine compart-ment. Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter for information and availability. Read

the operating instructions for your chargerbefore charging the battery.The additional battery can not be chargedfrom the jump-starting connection point.Recharge the battery more frequently if youuse the vehicle mainly for short trips and/ordrive at low outside temperatures.X Charge the battery. Observe the notes inthe operating instructions for your batterycharger.

X If necessary, install battery. Observe thenotes on reconnecting the battery.

i Recharge uninstalled, out of service bat-teries every three months. This will counterself-discharging and prevent battery dam-age.

Care! Dirty battery clamps and battery surfacescause leak currents which lead to the bat-teries discharging.

! Do not use cleaning agents containingfuel. Cleaning agents containing fuel cor-rode the battery housing.

! If dirt gets into the battery cell, batteryself-discharge will increase and the batterymay be damaged.

The following points on battery care must beobserved:X Regularly check the battery terminals andthe fastening of the negative cable to thechassis to ensure that they are firmlyseated.

X Always keep the battery terminals and bat-tery surfaces clean and dry.

X Lightly grease the undersides of the batteryterminals with acid-resistant grease.

X Only clean the battery casing with a com-mercially available cleaning product.

264 BatteryMaintenance

andcare

Care

Notes on care

G WARNINGIf you use openings in the bodywork ordetachable parts as steps, you could:Rslip and/or fallRdamage the vehicle and cause yourself tofall.

There is a risk of injury.Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suita-ble ladder.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

H Environmental noteOnly clean your vehicle at specially designedwash bays. Dispose of empty containers andused cleaning products in an environmentallyresponsible manner.

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents rec-ommended and approved for Sprinter vehi-cles.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatic car wash issuitable for the size of the vehicle.Before washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash, fold in the exterior mirrors andremove any additional antennas. Other-wise, the exterior mirror, antenna or thevehicle itself could be damaged.Make sure that the exteriormirrors are fullyfolded out again and that any additionalantennas are re-installed when you leavethe automatic car wash.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the roof are com-pletely closedRthe climate control blower is switched offRthe windshield wiper switch is at position0

Care 265

Maintenance

andcare

Z

The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehi-cle in an automatic car wash.After putting the vehicle through an auto-matic car wash, wipe off wax from:Rthe rear view camera lens (Y page 269)Rthe windshieldRthe windshield wiper bladesThis will prevent smears and reduce wipingnoises caused by residue on the wind-shield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements of the coun-try you are currently in when washing byhand.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft car sponge.X Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. a car sham-poo approved for use with Sprinter vehi-cles.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlets.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agents dry on thepaintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Under no circumstances use power wash-ers in the vehicle interior. The pressurizedwater and associated spray produced bythe power washer could cause extensivedamage to the vehicle.

! Observe the minimum distance to bemaintained between the nozzle of thepower washer and object to be cleaned, asoutlined below:Rapproximately 2.2 ft(70 cm) when usinground-jet nozzlesRapproximately 1 ft (30 cm) when using25°flat-spray jets and dirt blasters

Keep the water jet moving while cleaning.To avoid causing damage, do not point thewater jet directly at:Rdoor jointsRbrake hosesRelectrical componentsRelectrical connectionsRsealsRdrive train, especially not at the inter-mediate bearing of the propeller shaftRrear view camera (camera lens andmicrophone opening on the bottom)Keep a minimum distance of1.6 ft(50 cm).

Cleaning the engine

! Water must not enter intake or ventilationopenings. When cleaning with high pres-

266 CareMaintenance

andcare

sure water or steam cleaners, the spraymust not be aimed directly at electricalcomponents or the terminals of electricallines.Preserve the engine after the engine hasbeen cleaned. Protect the belt drive systemfrom exposure to the preservative agent.

Also observe the information under "Powerwashers" (Y page 266).

Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused by inade-quate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.X Remove impurities immediately, wherepossible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not fold the windshield wipers awayfrom the windshield unless the hood isclosed. Otherwise, you could damage thehood.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of thewindows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.There is otherwise a risk of damaging thewindows.

Before cleaning the windshieldX Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock or remove it.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield until you feel them engage.Before switching the ignition on again, foldthe windshield wipers back into position.

Cleaning the windowsX Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaningagent that is recommended and approvedfor Sprinter vehicles.

Exterior

Cleaning the wheels

! Do not use any acidic or alkaline cleaningagents. They can cause corrosion on thewheel bolts (wheel nuts) or the retainersprings for the wheel-balancing weights.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs and

Care 267

Maintenance

andcare

Z

brake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

If you clean the wheels with a power washer,observe the safety notes for the powerwasher (Y page 266). You could otherwisedamage the tires.

Cleaning the wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not fold the windshield wipers awayfrom the windshield unless the hood isclosed. Otherwise, you could damage thehood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock or remove it.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield until you feel them engage.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold back the wiper arms before switchingon the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic covers of the exteriorlighting with a damp sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo forSprinter vehicles, or with cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signal

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the sensors

! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths anddo not scrub. You will otherwise scratch ordamage the sensors.If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher or steam cleaner, observe the infor-mation provided by the manufacturerregarding the distance to be maintainedbetween the vehicle and the nozzle of thepower washer.

PARKTRONIC sensors (example: front bumper, leftside of vehicle)

268 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Clean all sensors: in the front and rearbumpers with water, shampoo and a softcloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths anddo not scrub. Otherwise, you will scratch ordamage the lens of the rear-view camera.If you clean the vehiclewith a high-pressureor steam cleaner, maintain a distance of atleast 1.650 cm from the rear-view camera.Do not aim directly at the rear-view cameraor at themicrophone opening on the under-side of the rear-view camera. You couldotherwise damage the rear-view camera.

Rear view camera in the middle of the roof abovethe high-mounted brake lamp: Camera lens; Microphone openingsX Clean camera lens:with clean water anda soft cloth.

Make sure that you do not apply any wax tocamera lens: when waxing the vehicle. Ifnecessary, remove the wax using water,shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the sliding doorX Remove foreign objects from the vicinity ofthe contact surfaces and contact pins ofthe sliding door.

X Clean the contact surfaces and contactpins with a mild cleaning agent and a softcloth.

Do not oil or grease the contact plates andcontact pins.

Steps

Cleaning the electrical stepClean the electrical step at least once amonth. Make sure that no dirt accumulates inthe housing or on the step.X Extend the electrical step (Y page 73).X Close the sliding door until the door lockengages.The electrical step remains extended forcleaning.

X Clean the electrical step and the housingwith a power washer.

X After cleaning, spray the step guides oneach side with silicone spray when thehousing and electrical step are dry.Do not use oil or grease as a lubricant.

X Retract the electrical step.

Access step in the bumper

Example: access step in the bumper

Pay attention to the important safety notes inthe "Notes on care" (Y page 265) and "Powerwashers" (Y page 266) sections.Keep step in the bumper: free from dirt,such as:RmudRclayRsnowRice

Care 269

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Clean access step in the bumper: with apower washer.

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

! Do not clean the ball coupling with apower washer. Do not use solvents.

! Observe the notes on care in the Opera-tor's Manual for the trailer tow hitch andthe ball coupling manufacturer.

You can also have the maintenance work onthe ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch car-ried out by a qualified specialist workshop.

Interior

Cleaning with power washers

! When using liquids to clean the vehicleinterior, observe the following points:RUnder no circumstances use powerwashers.RMake sure that no fluids enter or remainin gaps and cavities.REnsure sufficient ventilation when clean-ing.RMake sure that the vehicle interior iscompletely dry after cleaning.

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-lowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household clean-ing agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-ble damage to the display.

X Switch off the audio equipment and let thedisplay cool down.

X Clean the display surface with a commer-cially available microfiber cloth and cleanerfor TFT/LCD displays.

X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-fiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim and the cockpit with adamp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use amild detergent or careproducts and cleaning agents recommen-ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the steering wheel and selec-tor leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth.

Cleaning the trim elements

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-

270 CareMaintenance

andcare

ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk ofdamaging the surface.

X Wipe the trim elements with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care products andcleaning agents recommended andapproved for Sprinter vehicles.

Cleaning the seat covers

! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean arti-ficial leather covers. If used often, a micro-fiber cloth can damage the cover.

! Clean:Rartificial leather covers with a clothmois-tened with a solution containing 1%detergent, e.g. dish washing liquid.Rcloth coverswith amicrofiber clothmois-tened with a solution containing 1%detergent, e.g. dish washing liquid. Wipeentire seat sections carefully to avoidleaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dryafterwards. Cleaning results depend onthe type of dirt and how long it has beenthere.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

Remove any stains or dirt immediately. Thiswill avoid residue or damage.X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-tion.

Cleaning the headlinerX Use a soft brush or dry shampoo to removeheavy soiling.

Cleaning the curtains

! The curtains must not be washed. Wash-ing could cause the curtains to shrink andlose their fire-retardant properties. Alwayshave the curtains dry-cleaned.

Care 271

Maintenance

andcare

Z

272

Useful information ............................ 274Where will I find...? ........................... 274Flat tire .............................................. 276Jump-starting .................................... 276Tow-starting and towing away ........ 277Electrical fuses ................................. 280

273

Roadside

Assistance

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all modelsaswell as standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to systems and functionsrelevant to safety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 25).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe vehicle tool kit is in the stowage com-partment in the footwell on the co-driver'sside.The vehicle tool kit consists of:Ra towing eyeRa screwdriver with Torx, Phillips and slottedbits

If your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheelbracket and a jack, the vehicle tool kit addi-tionally contains:Ra wheel wrenchRa spannerRa pump lever rod

Stowage compartment in the co-driv-er's footwell

Unlocking and removing the coverX Turn quick-release fastener: counter-clockwise or clockwise2.

X Slightly raise and pull out the cover.

Removing the vehicle tool kit and the jackX Remove vehicle tool kitA.X Pull up quick-release lever= and unhookthe retaining strap of jack?.

X Lift jack? upwards out of the holder.i When stowing away the jack, place it inthe holder as shown in the illustration.Make sure that the retaining strap of thejack is hooked in and tensioned.

Inserting and engaging the coverX Slide in the cover and fold it down.X Press down quick-release fastener: untilit engages.

274 Where will I find...?Roadside

Assistance

Warning triangle and warning lamp

Removing the warning lamp

X Turn the quick-release fasteners to position2.The cover is unlocked.

X Lift up the cover.X Take warning lamp= out of the retainer.X Fold the cover up and turn the quick-release fasteners to position1.The cover is locked.

Removing the warning triangle

Warning triangles at the back of the driver's seatbaseX Lift warning triangle: up and out of thebracket.

First-aid kit

Removing the first-aid kit

X Turn the quick-release fasteners to position2.The cover is unlocked.

X Lift up the cover.

Where will I find...? 275

Roadside

Assistance

X Take first-aid kit= out of the retainer.X Fold the cover up and turn the quick-release fasteners to position1.The cover is locked.i Check the expiration date on the first-aidkit at least once a year. Replace any expiredor missing contents.

Fire extinguisher

Removing the fire extinguisher

Fire extinguisher at the front of the base of the co-driver's seatX Pull tabs; upwards.X Take fire extinguisher: out of its holder.Please read the instructions on fire extin-guisher: carefully and familiarize yourselfwith its operation. Have fire extinguisher:refilled after each use and checked every oneor two years. It may otherwise fail in an emer-gency.Observe the legal requirements for each indi-vidual country.

Flat tire

Information on breakdown assistance in thecase of a flat tire can be found in the chapter"Wheels and tires" (Y page 305).

Jump-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

Do not use a rapid charging device to start thevehicle. If your vehicle's battery is dis-charged, the engine can be jump-started fromanother vehicle or from a donor battery usingjumper cables. For this purpose, the vehiclehas a jump-starting connection point in theengine compartment.The additional battery in the engine compart-ment is not suitable for jump-starting opera-tions. If your vehicle requires jump-starting,or if you use it to jump-start another vehicle,use the jump-starting connection point in theengine compartment.When jump-starting, observe the followingpoints:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles.If the other vehicle's battery is not acces-sible, jump-start the vehicle using a donorbattery or a jump-starting device.RDo not start the engine if the battery is fro-zen. Let the battery thaw first.RJump-starting may only be performed frombatteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.

276 Jump-startingRoadside

Assistance

ROnly use jumper cables that have a suffi-cient cross-section and insulated terminalclamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, attach thebattery of another vehicle for a fewminutesbefore attempting to start. This charges theempty battery a little.RMake sure that the two vehicles do nottouch.

Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rbare parts of the terminal clamps do notcome into contact with other metal partswhile the jumper cables are connected tothe battery.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into con-tact with parts such as the V-belt pulley orthe fan. These parts move when the engineis started and while it is running.

i Jumper cables and further informationregarding jump starting can be obtained atany qualified specialist workshop.

Before connecting the jumper cablesOn vehicles with a battery main switch, checkwhether the battery main switch is switchedon (Y page 137).X Apply the parking brake.X Move the selector lever of the automatictransmission to position P.

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g.audio equipment, blower.

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock and remove it (Y page 138).

X Open the hood (Y page 248).

Tow-starting and towing away

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Information on the gross vehicle weight canbe found on the vehicle identification plate(Y page 316).

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

Tow-starting and towing away 277

Roadside

Assistance

Z

! Observe the following points when towingwith a tow rope:RSecure the tow rope on the same side onboth vehicles.REnsure that the tow cable is not longerthan legally permitted. Mark the towcable in the middle, e.g. with a whitecloth (30 x 30 cm). This will make otherroad users aware that the vehicle is beingtowed.ROnly secure the tow cable to the towingeye.RObserve the brake lamps of the towingvehicle while driving. Always maintain adistance so that the tow rope does notsag.RDo not use steel cables or chains to towyour vehicle. You could otherwise dam-age the vehicle.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

When towing away, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.It is preferable to have the vehicle transpor-ted on a transporter or trailer instead of tow-ing it.The automatic transmission selector levermust be in the N position when towing thevehicle.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock toposition 2Rcannot move the selector lever to positionN on vehicles with automatic transmission

Before the vehicle is towed, switch off theautomatic locking feature (Y page 71). Youcould otherwise lock yourself out of the vehi-cle when pushing or towing away the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

The fixture for the front towing eye is located in thebumper.

Rear towing eye under the bumper, attached to thechassis

Your vehicle may be equipped with rear tow-ing eye;. If you tow or tow-start a vehicle,attach the towing device to rear towingeye;.If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer towhitch, attach the towing device to the trailertow hitch (Y page 173).Installing the front towing eyeX Take the towing eye and screwdriver fromthe vehicle tool kit (Y page 274).

X Press cover: and remove cover: fromthe opening.You will see the fixture for the towing eye.

X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to thestop.

X Insert screwdriver into the towing eye andtighten it.

278 Tow-starting and towing awayRoadside

Assistance

Removing the front towing eyeX Remove the screwdriver from the vehicletool kit.

X Insert the screwdriver into the towing eyeand turn the screwdriver counter-clock-wise.

X Unscrew the towing eye.X Insert cover: with the lug at the bottomand press it in at the top until it engages.

X Place the towing eye and screwdriver backin the vehicle tool kit.

Towing away in the event of malfunc-tions

With transmission damage

! Always use new bolts when installing thepropeller shafts.

i Only have the propeller shafts fitted/removed by qualified, skilled personnel.

If the vehicle has transmission damage, havethe propeller shaft removed before towingaway.

Towing with the front or rear axleraised

General notes

! The ignition must be switched off if thevehicle is being towed with the front or rearaxle raised. Otherwise, ESP®may interveneand damage the brake system.

! Always use new bolts when installing thepropeller shafts.

i Only have the propeller shafts fitted/removed by qualified, skilled personnel.

Observe the following before towing a vehiclewith a raised front or rear axle:Rthe information on towing in the event ofmalfunctions (Y page 279) andRthe important safety notes (Y page 277).

If the front axle is damaged, raise the vehicleat the front axle and if the rear axle is dam-aged, raise the vehicle at the rear axle.

TowingIf the front axle is raised, the vehicle may betowed a maximum of 30 miles (50 km). For atowing distance of over 30 miles (50 km), thepropeller shafts to the driven axles must beremoved.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignitionlock and leave it in this position.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 95).

X If the front axle is raised, do not exceed thetowing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) and thetowing distance of 30 miles (50 km).

Towing the vehicle with both axles onthe ground

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

! Do not exceed a towing speed of 31 mph(50 km/h). You could otherwise damagethe transmission.

! Always use new bolts when installing thepropeller shafts.

Tow-starting and towing away 279

Roadside

Assistance

Z

i Only have the propeller shafts fitted/removed by qualified, skilled personnel.

Before towing the vehicle, observe the fol-lowing:Rthe information on towing in the event ofmalfunctions (Y page 279) andRthe important safety notes (Y page 277).

TowingYou may only tow the vehicle a maximum dis-tance of 30 miles (50 km). For a towing dis-tance of over 30 miles (50 km), the propellershafts to the driven axles must be removed.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 95).

X Do not exceed the towing speed of 30 mph(50 km/h) and the towing distance of30 miles (50 km).

Recovering a vehicle that is stuck! When recovering a vehicle that hasbecome stuck, pull it as smoothly andevenly as possible. Excessive tractivepower could damage the vehicles.

If the drive wheels get trapped on loose ormuddy ground, recover the vehicle with theutmost care. This is especially the case if thevehicle is laden.Never attempt to recover a vehicle with atrailer attached.

Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible,using the tracks it made when it becamestuck.

Transporting the vehicle! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)

Vehicles with automatic transmission

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. You could other-wise damage the automatic transmission.

You can find information on jump-startingunder "Jump-starting“ (Y page 276).

Electrical fuses

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Sprinter vehicles and that have therequired fuse rating for the systems con-cerned. Components or systems could oth-erwise be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle switch off defectivepower circuits. If a fuse blows, all the com-ponents on the circuit and their functions willcease to operate.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and fuse rating. Observe the infor-

280 Electrical fusesRoadside

Assistance

mation about fuse rating in the fuse allocationchart.If a new fuse blows again, have the causedetermined and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.The fuse allocation chart and other informa-tion on the fuses can be found in the "Fuseallocation chart" supplement.

Electrical fuses 281

Roadside

Assistance

Z

282

Useful information ............................ 284Important safety notes ..................... 284Operation ........................................... 284Operation in winter ........................... 286Tire pressure ..................................... 288Loading the vehicle .......................... 295What you should know aboutwheels and tires ................................ 299Flat tire .............................................. 305Changing wheels ............................... 305Wheel and tire combination ............. 311Spare wheel ....................................... 312

283

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all modelsaswell as standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific variations arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the described functions.This also applies to systems and functionsrelevant to safety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 25).

Important safety notes

G WarningA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.do not drive with a flat tire. Immediatelyreplace the flat tire with your spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsContact an authorized Sprinter dealer if yourequire information on tested and recommen-ded wheels and tires for summer and winterdriving. Advice on purchasing and caring fortires is also available there.Information on tire andwheel dimensions andtypes as well as the recommended tire pres-sure for your vehicle can be found in the "Tirepressure" section (Y page 294).This data can also be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar.Modifications to the brake system or wheelsare not permitted. The use of wheel spacersor brake dust shields is not permitted. Thisinvalidates the general operating permit forthe vehicle.

i Further information on wheels and tirescan be obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop.

Operation

Information for a journeyIf the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tirepressures, and correct them, if necessary(Y page 288).While driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteristics,e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate thatthe wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-pect that a tire is defective, reduce yourspeed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soonas possible to check the wheels and tires fordamage. Hidden tire damage could also becausing the unusual handling characteristics.If you find no signs of damage, have the tiresand wheels checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

284 OperationWheelsandtires

When parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb orother obstacles. If it is necessary to drive overcurbs, speed humps or similar elevations, tryto do so slowly and not at a sharp angle. Oth-erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,can get damaged.

Regular wheel and tire checks

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Check the wheels and tires of your vehicle fordamage regularly, i.e. at least every twoweeks, as well as after driving off-road or onrough roads. Damaged wheels can cause aloss of tire pressure. Pay particular attentionto damage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 285). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notinstall anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved for your vehicle by dealers listed onthe inside of the front cover. Do not install anyother valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressuremonitor systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tires,particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure if necessary (Y page 288).

The service life of tires depends on variousfactors, including the following:Rdriving styleRtire pressureRmileage

Tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Marker: shows the location where the barindicator (arrow) for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.Tread wear indicators (TWIs) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned over the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depth is

Operation 285

Wheelsandtires

Z

approximatelyá in (1.6 mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and renewingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds forthe first 65 miles (100 km).RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after 6 years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to thespare wheel.

Operation in winter

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Prior to the onset of winter, ensure that snowchains are stowed in the vehicle(Y page 287).Also observe the notes in the "Changing awheel" section (Y page 305).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehi-cle to M+S tire. Using summer tires at verycold temperatures could cause tears to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently. Wecannot accept responsibility for this type ofdamage.

M+S tires

G WARNINGWheel and tire dimensions as well as the typeof tire can vary between the spare wheel andthe wheel to be replaced. When the sparewheel is mounted, driving characteristics maybe severely affected. There is a risk of an acci-dent.In order to reduce risks:Ryou should therefore adapt your drivingstyle and drive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheelthat differs from the wheel to be replaced.Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from thewheel to be replaced for a short time.Rdo not deactivate ESP®.Rhave a spare wheel that differs from thewheel that has been changed replaced atthe nearest qualified specialist workshop.You must observe the correct wheel andtire dimensions as well as the wheel type.

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

Use winter tires or all-season tires at temper-atures below 45 ‡ (+7 †). Both types of tireare identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-ditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety sys-tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti-mally in winter. These tires have been devel-oped specifically for driving in snow.For safe driving, use M+S tires of the samemake and tread pattern on all wheels.

286 Operation in winterWheelsandtires

Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.If youmountM+S tires that have a lowermax-imum permissible speed than that of the vehi-cle, affix a corresponding warning label in thedriver's field of vision. You can obtain this at aqualified specialist workshop.Once you have mounted the winter tires:X Check the tire pressure (Y page 288).X Reactivate the tire pressure moni-tor* (Y page 293).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf you drive too fast with snow chains moun-ted, they may snap. As a result, you couldinjure others and damage the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident.Observe the maximum permissible speed foroperation with snow chains.

When driving with snow chains installed, donot exceed the maximum permissible speedof 30 mph (50 km/h). Observe the country-specific laws and regulations for operationwith snow chains.

! Check the snow chains for damage beforemounting them. Damaged or worn snowchains may snap and damage the followingcomponents:RwheelRwheel housingRwheel suspensionFor this reason, you must use only snowchains that are free of defects. Observe themanufacturer's mounting instructions.

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if youmount snow chains on steel wheels, youmay damage the hub caps. Remove the hubcaps from the relevant wheels beforemounting the snow chains.

Snow chains increase traction on roads inwintry conditions.For reasons of safety we only recommendusing snow chains or traction aids that areapproved for the Sprinter. The snow chains ortraction aids must be of class U or meet theSAE type U specification. Information onsnow chains is available at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.When mounting snow chains, please bear thefollowing points in mind:RSnow chains cannot be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. When mountingthe snow chains, note the permissible tireand snow chain dimensions.RMount snow chains only in pairs and only tothe rear wheels. On vehicles with twin tires,mount the snow chains to the outer wheels.Observe the manufacturer's mountinginstructions.ROnly use snow chains when the road is cov-ered by a layer of snow. Remove the snowchains as soon as possible when you cometo a road that is not snow-covered.RThe use of snow chains may be restrictedby local regulations. Observe the appropri-ate regulations before mounting snowchains.RWhen driving with snow chains installed, donot exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).RCheck the tension of the chains after a dis-tance of approximately 0.5 miles (1.0 km).

You can deactivate ASR (Y page 58) whenpulling away with snow chains mounted. Thisallows the wheels to spin in a controlled man-ner, achieving an increased driving force (cut-ting action).

Operation in winter 287

Wheelsandtires

* optional Z

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The specifications shown on the sampleTire and Loading Information placard andtire pressure table are examples. Tire pres-sure data are vehicle-specific andmay devi-ate from the data illustrated here. The tirepressure data applicable to your vehiclecan be found on the Tire & Loading Infor-mation placard or tire pressure plate ofyour vehicle.

H Environmental noteCheck the tire pressure regularly, at leastevery 14 days.

General notesYou will find information on tire pressure forthe vehicle's factory-mounted tires on theplates described here.You will find a table of recommended tirepressure on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard5 or on the tire pressure table on theB-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.Further information on tire pressure can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

Tire and Loading Information placard5

The Tire and Loading Information placard ison the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehi-cle (Y page 295).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains recommended tire pressures: for coldtires. Recommended tire pressures: arevalid for the maximum permissible load andup to the maximum permissible speed of thevehicle.

5 Only for vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).

288 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Tire pressure plate

Tire pressure plate

The tire pressure table is located on theB-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 295).The tire pressure table contains recommen-ded tire pressures: for cold tires. Recom-mended tire pressures: apply to the maxi-mum permissible load and up to the maxi-mum permissible speed of the vehicle.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitor, the tirepressure can be checked using the on-boardcomputer.

The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-ent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sure when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours without direct sunlight on thetires, andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

Tire temperature changes depending on theambient temperature, driving speed and tireload. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡(10 †), the tire pressure changes by approx-imately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take thisinto account when checking the pressure ofwarm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if itis too low for the current operating condi-tions. If you check the tire pressure when thetires arewarm, it results in a higher value thanwhen the tires are cold. This is normal. Do notunder any circumstances release the air inorder to adjust the pressure to the prescribedvalue for cold tires. The tire pressure wouldotherwise be too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard6 on the B-pillar on the driver's side orRon the tire pressure table on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of the vehicle

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires:

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.

6 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).

Tire pressure 289

Wheelsandtires

Z

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires can:Rfail from being overheatedRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires can:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRadversely affect ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Maximum permitted tire pressure (exam-ple)

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. When adjusting the tire

pressures always observe the recommendedtire pressure for your vehicle (Y page 288).

i The actual values for tires are specific toeach vehicle and may deviate from the val-ues in the illustration.

Tire valve (snap-in valve)

G WARNINGTire valve that are not approved for your vehi-cle by the distributor named on the insidecover page may result in a loss of tire pres-sure. This may affect road safety. There is arisk of an accident.Only use tire valve that are approved for yourvehicle by the distributor named on the insidecover page. Always make sure you have thecorrect tire valve type for the tires on yourvehicle.

! Do not screw additional weights (checkvalves, etc.) onto the tire valves. The elec-tronic components could thus be damaged.

Only for vehicles without a tire pressure mon-itor:For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use tire valves that havebeen tested for use on your vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure manuallyIn order to determine and adjust the tire pres-sures, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire youwish tocheck.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it withthe recommended value on the loadinginformation table or the tire pressure table(Y page 288).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it tothe recommended value.

290 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air bypressing down the metal pin in the valve.Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then,check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat the steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressurelabel on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard or the tire pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire pressure forthose tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Underinflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stop-ping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the mounting of incompatiblereplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmal-function telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to function prop-erly.

Vehicles with a tire pressure monitor areequipped with sensors in the wheels thatmonitor the tire pressure of all four tires. Thetire pressure monitor monitors the pressurein all four tires; you set this pressurewhen youactivate the tire pressure monitor. The tirepressure monitor warns you when the pres-sure drops in one or more of the tires. The tirepressure monitor only functions if the corre-sponding sensors are installed on all wheels.You should always adjust the tire pressureaccording to the vehicle load. Restart the tirepressure monitor if you change the tire pres-sure.The tire pressuremonitor does not warn you ifa tire pressure is incorrect. Observe the noteson the recommended tire pressure(Y page 288).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. follow-ing penetration by a foreign object. In thisevent, brake the vehicle until it comes to a

Tire pressure 291

Wheelsandtires

Z

standstill. Do not carry out any sudden steer-ing maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellowhwarning lamp in the instrument cluster forindicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA)or pressure loss (Canada). Depending on howthe warning lamp flashes or lights up, anunderinflated tire or a malfunction in the tirepressure monitor is displayed:Rif thehwarning lamp is lit continuously,the tire pressure on one or more tires issignificantly too low. The tire pressuremon-itor is not malfunctioning.RUSA only: if theh warning lamp flashesfor 60 seconds and then remains lit con-stantly, the tire pressure monitor is mal-functioning.

Only vehicleswith steeringwheel buttons: theon-board computer displays information ontire pressure. After a few minutes of driving,the current tire pressure of each tire is shownin the on-board computer.USA only: if the tire pressure monitor is mal-functioning, it may be more than 10 minutesbefore the malfunction is shown. Thehtire pressure warning lamp flashes for60 seconds and then remains lit. When themalfunction has been rectified, theh tirepressure warning lamp goes out after a fewminutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gage.The tire pressures shown by the on-boardcomputer refer to those measured at sealevel. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-ues indicated by a pressure gage are higherthan those shown by the on-board computer.In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.If radio transmitting equipment (e.g. wirelessheadphones, two-way radios) is operatedinside the vehicle or in the vicinity of the vehi-cle, this can interferewith the operation of thetire pressure monitor.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-cally (vehicles with steering wheel but-tons)

Tire pressure display

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the standard display is shown(Y page 187).

X Press the9 or: button repeatedlyuntil the current pressure of the individualtires is shown in the display.

If the vehicle is parked for longer than20 minutes or you then drive at less than18 mph (30 km/h), the Tire pres. dis‐Tire pres. dis‐played after driving for severalplayed after driving for severalminutesminutes message appears.i The tire pressure value shown in the dis-play may differ from those measured at agas station using a pressure gage. The on-board computer will generally give you amore exact value.

Tire pressure loss warning system

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsIf the tire pressure monitor detects a signifi-cant pressure loss on one or more tires, theon-board computer displays a warning mes-sage. Theh tire pressure loss warninglamp in the instrument cluster (Y page 226)lights up.The tire pressure is shown in 2 red rectangles.The pressure of the tire concerned is shown inone of the two rectangles (Y page 197). Addi-tionally, a warning tone sounds.

292 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Each tire that is affected by a significant lossof pressure is highlighted in the pressure dis-play.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor,the currently set tire pressure are taken asreference values for monitoring.In most cases, the tire pressure monitordetects the new reference values automati-cally, e.g. after you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged wheels or tiresRinstalled new wheels or tiresHowever, you can also define reference val-ues manually as described here.Before restarting the tire pressure moni-tor:X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-mended on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard or the tire pressure table onthe B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 288).Observe the notes on tire pressure whendoing so (Y page 288).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

Restarting the tire pressure monitor(vehicles without steering wheel but-tons):X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press the4 menu button on the instru-ment cluster repeatedly until the displayshows the following message:+CAL- TPMS+CAL- TPMS

X Press thef button on the instrument clus-ter.The display shows:OK TPMSOK TPMSThe tire pressure monitor activation proc-ess has begun. The tire pressures meas-ured for the individual wheels are stored as

the new reference values, provided that thetire pressure monitor considers them to beplausible.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press theg button or the4menu buttonon the instrument cluster.The activation process is canceled auto-matically if 30 seconds elapse withoutinput.

Restarting the tire pressure monitor(vehicles with steering wheel buttons):X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press theVorUbutton on the steer-ing wheel until the standard display(Y page 187) appears in the display.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel repeatedly until the current pres-sure of the individual tires is displayed orthe display shows the following message:TireTire pres.pres. displayeddisplayed afterafter drivingdrivingfor several minutesfor several minutes

X Press the9 reset button on the instru-ment cluster.The display shows the following message:Monitor current tire pressure?Monitor current tire pressure?

X Press theW button on the steeringwheel.The display shows the following message:Tire pres. monitor reactivatedTire pres. monitor reactivatedThe tire pressure monitor activation proc-ess has begun. The tire pressures meas-ured for the individual wheels are stored asthe new reference values, provided that thetire pressure monitor considers them to beplausible.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press theX button on the steeringwheel.

Tire pressure 293

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire pressure tableFront axle tire pressure values: the following tire pressure values only apply to vehicles witha permissible front axle load of 3970 lbs (1801 kg), 4080 lbs (1851 kg) or 4410 lbs (2000 kg).

Tires/disc wheel Front axle load

3970 lbs(1801 kg)

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

205/75 R 16 C 110/108R6.5Jx16 ET627

— 400 kPa(4.0 bar/58 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

LT 215/85 R 16 115/112N5.5Jx16Half distance between centers:4.94 in (125.5 mm)

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

LT 215/85 R 16 115/112Q5.5Jx16Half distance between centers:4.94 in (125.5 mm)

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

LT 245/75 R 16 120/116N6.5J x 16Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

320 kPa(3.2 bar/47 psi)

— —

235/65 R 16 C 121N (118R)6,5Jx16Spare wheel, Vehicles withSuper Single tires.

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

7 Vehicles with Super Single tires.

294 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Rear axle tire pressure values: the following tire pressure values only apply to vehicles witha permissible rear axle load of 5360 lbs (2431 kg), 7060 lbs (3202 kg) or 7720 lbs (3502 kg).

Tires/disc wheel Rear axle load

5360 lbs(2431 kg)

7060 lbs(3202 kg)

7720 lbs(3502 kg)

LT 215/85 R 16 115/112N5.5Jx16Half distance between centers:4.94 in (125.5 mm)

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

LT 215/85 R 16 115/112Q5.5Jx16Half distance between centers:4.94 in (125.5 mm)

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

LT 245/75 R 16 120/116N6.5J x 16Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

480 kPa(4.8 bar/70 psi)

— —

285/65 R 16 C 128/126N (121 R)285/65 R 16 C 128/126 N (123R)8

8.5J x 16 ET 63

— 450 kPa(4.5 bar/65 psi)

—

235/65 R 16 C 121N (118R)6,5Jx16Spare wheel, Vehicles withSuper Single tires.

— 520 kPa(5.2 bar/75 psi)

—

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

The Tire and Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar

8 Super Single tires.

Loading the vehicle 295

Wheelsandtires

Z

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) Only for vehicles with a gross weight of

less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg):Tire and Loading Information placard:is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Tireand Loading Information placard:shows the permissible number of occu-pants and the maximum permissible loadof the vehicle. It also contains details ofthe tire sizes and corresponding pres-sures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is locatedon the base of the driver's seat. The vehi-cle identification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-pants, the fuel and the cargo. You canalso find information about themaximumGross AxleWeight Rating on the front andrear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Do notexceed the maximum gross vehicleweight or themaximumgross axle weightrating for the front or rear axle.

Tire and Loading Information placard

General notesOnly vehicles with a gross weight of less than10,000 lbs (4,536 kg) have a Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

: Maximum number of seats; Maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight ratingX Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight; is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The gross weight ofoccupants and luggage must not exceedXXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,cargo, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The details on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard illustration are only anexample. The maximum permissible grossvehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific andmay differ from that which is illustrated.You can find the valid maximum permissi-ble gross vehicle weight rating for yourvehicle on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

296 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Number of seats

: Maximum number of seats; Maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight ratingMaximumnumber of seats: determines themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The details on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard illustration are only anexample. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the detailsshown. The number of seats in your vehiclecan be found on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard.

Determining the maximum load

Individual stepsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 inaccordance with the "National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be trav-eling in your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150 pound passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1400 Ò 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. For reasons of safety, that weightmust not exceed the available cargo andluggage cargo capacity calculated in step4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If you intend to towa trailer behind your vehicle, the load on thetrailer is transferred to your vehicle. Pleaseconsult the Tire and Loading Informationplacard, to determine how this reduces theavailable cargo and luggage load capacityof your vehicle.

Loading the vehicle 297

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: Steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples of how to calculate total load and cargo capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure youare using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard .

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 2 Number of people inthe vehicle (driverand occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

298 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 3 Permissible cargoand trailer load/noseweight (maxi-mum gross vehicleweight rating fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placardminus the grossweight of all occu-pants)

1500 lbs(680 kg)Ò750 lbs(340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)Ò540 lbs(245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)Ò150 lbs (68 kg)= 1350 lbs(612 kg)

The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 177).

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details aboutthis can be found on the vehicle identificationplate on the driver seat frame of your vehicle(Y page 316).Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight ofthe vehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailerload/noseweight (if applicable) must notexceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.Gross axleweight rating: themaximumper-missible load that can be carried by one axle(front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (gross vehi-cle weight and maximum gross axle weightrating), have your loaded vehicle (includingdriver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load ifapplicable) weighed on a suitable vehicleweighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,the trailer load/noseweight is included in theload along with occupants and luggage. The

trailer load/noseweight is usually approx-imately 10% of the gross weight of the trailerand its load.

What you should know about wheelsand tires

Tire labeling

Overview

: DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 302)

; Maximum tire load (Y page 301)

What you should know about wheels and tires 299

Wheelsandtires

Z

= Maximum tire pressure (Y page 290)? ManufacturerA Tire material (Y page 302)B Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-

city and speed index (Y page 300)C Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tirein addition to the tire name (sales designa-tion) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load bearing indexand speed index

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Design standard; Tire width= Nominal aspect ratio in %? Tire codeA Rim diameterB Load bearing indexC Speed indexGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wall

may not contain any letters or may containone letter: that precedes the size descrip-tionIf "LT" precedes the size description (asshown above): these are light truck tiresaccording to U.S. manufacturing standards.If "C" precedes the size description: these arecommercial motor vehicle tires according toEuropean manufacturing standards.Tire width: tire width; shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Aspect ratio: aspect ratio= is the size ratiobetween the tire height and tire width and isshown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcu-lated by dividing the tire width by the tireheight.Tire code: tire code? specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires. "D" representsdiagonal tires, "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Rim diameter: rim diameterA is the diam-eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of therim flange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexBis a numerical code that specifies the maxi-mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 295).Example:The load-bearing index 120 indicates a max-imum load of 3,042 lb (1,380 kg) for the tire.If two load-bearing capacity indices are speci-fied (as shown above), the first number statesthe load-bearing capacity for single tires, thesecond number the load-bearing capacity fortwin tires. For further information on themax-imum tire load in kilograms and pounds, see(Y page 301).For further information on the load-bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 301).

300 What you should know about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Speed rating: speed ratingC specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.Regardless of the speed index always observethe speed limits. Drive carefully and adaptyour driving style to the traffic conditions.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Index Speed rating

F up to 50 mph (80 km/h)

G up to 56 mph (90 km/h)

J up to 62 mph (100 km/h)

K up to 68 mph (110 km/h)

L up to 74 mph (120 km/h)

M up to 80 mph (130 km/h)

N up to 87 mph (140 km/h)

P up to 93 mph (150 km/h)

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R over 106 mph (170 km/h)

i Not all tires that have the M+S identifica-tion offer the driving characteristics of win-ter tires. In addition to the M+S marking,winter tires also have thei snowflakesymbol on the tirewall. Tireswith thismark-ing fulfill the requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC)regarding the tire traction on snow. Theyhave been especially developed for drivingon snow.

Further information on the reading of tireinformation can be obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, load rat-ing:may be imprinted after the letters thatidentify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire(Y page 300).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Maximum tire load

Maximum tire load: is the maximum per-missible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and

What you should know about wheels and tires 301

Wheelsandtires

Z

Loading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 295).

i The actual values for tires are specific toeach vehicle and may deviate from the val-ues in the illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations stipulate that every tiremanufacturer or retreader must imprint a TINin or on the sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retread-ers to inform purchasers of recalls and othersafety-relevant matters. It makes it possiblefor the purchaser to easily identify the affec-ted tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi-cation code;, tire size=, tire type code?and manufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.Manufacturer identification code: manu-facturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.Further information about retreaded tires(Y page 284).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.

Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers in sidewall:and under tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Definitions for tires and loading

Tire structure and characteristicsDescribes the number of layers or the numberof rubber-coated belts in the tire tread andthe tire wall. These consist of steel, nylon,polyester, and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

302 What you should know about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe United States Department of Transporta-tion.

Average weight of vehicle occupantsThe number of occupants for which the vehi-cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftires with regard to tread quality, traction andtemperature characteristics. The qualitygrading assessment is made by the manufac-turer following specifications from the U.Sgovernment. The quality grade of a tire isimprinted on the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressures are thepressures specified for the tires mounted onthe vehicle at the factory.The tire and load information table9 containsthe recommended tire pressures for coldtires, the maximum permissible load and themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended tire pressure for cold tires under var-ious operating conditions, i.e. loading and/orspeed of the vehicle.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installedon the vehicle or not.

Wheel rimThe part of the wheel on which the tire ismounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rat-ing. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. The

Gross Axle Weight Rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the driver seatframe (Y page 316).

Speed indexThe speed index is part of the tire identifica-tion. It specifies the speed range forwhich thetire is approved.

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)GTW is the total of weight of a trailer and theweight of the load, accessories etc. on thetrailer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-gage and the drawbar noseweight if applica-ble. The gross vehicle weight may neverexceed the gross vehicle weight rating(GVWR) specified on the vehicle identificationplate at the base of the driver's seat(Y page 316).

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permitted grossweight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of thevehicle including all accessories, occupants,fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight ifapplicable). The Gross Vehicle Weight Ratingis specified on the vehicle identification plateon the driver seat frame (Y page 316).

Maximum weight of the laden vehicleThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa are theequivalent of 1 psi. Another tire pressure unit

9 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4536 kg).

What you should know about wheels and tires 303

Wheelsandtires

Z

is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva-lent of 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load bearing index, a loadindex can be stamped onto the sidewall of thetire. It specifies the load-bearing capacity ofthe tire more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standard equip-ment including the maximum filling capacityof fuel, oil, and coolant. It also includes theair-conditioning system and optional equip-ment if these are installed on the vehicle, butdoes not include passengers or luggage.

Maximum tire loadThe maximum tire load in kilograms orpounds is the maximum weight for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (Pounds per square inch)Standard unit of measurement for tire pres-sure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and width inpercent.

tire pressurePressure inside the tire applying an outwardforce to every square inch of the tire's sur-face. Tire pressure is specified in pounds persquare inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.Tire pressure should only be corrected whenthe tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours without direct sunlight on thetires, andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

Tire treadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

Tire beadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thetire bead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, a roof rack or a high-performancebattery, are not included in the curb weightand the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)A unique identification number which can beused by a tire manufacturer to identify tires,for example for a product recall, and thusidentify the purchasers. The TIN is composedof the manufacturer identification code, tiresize, tiremodel code andmanufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

304 What you should know about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

TWR (permissible trailer drawbar load)The TWR is the maximum permissible weightthat may act on the ball coupling of the trailertow hitch.

Wear indicatorNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread islevel with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Distribution of the vehicle occupantsThe distribution of vehicle occupants overdesignated seat positions in a vehicle.

Maximum permissible payload weightNominal load and goods/luggage load plus68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number ofseats in the vehicle.

Flat tire

General notesIf your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheel,the spare wheel is under the rear of the vehi-cle (Y page 312).Information about installing a wheel can befound in the "Wheel change" section(Y page 306).When you replace a tire, we recommend thatyou also replace the tire valve. Please observethe safety-relevant information on tire valve(Y page 290).

Changing wheels

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.

Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage the elec-tronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 306).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to the inter-vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty bookin your vehicle documents. If no warrantybook is available, the tires should be rotatedevery 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Donot change the direction of rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated.Check the tire pressure and reactivate the tirepressure monitor if necessary.

Diagram showing tire rotation for single and dualtires

Changing wheels 305

Wheelsandtires

Z

Single tires: if the tires are of identicaldimensions, you can rotate both wheels onboth the front and rear axles so that the tires'original direction of rotation ismaintained.Onunidirectional tires, an arrow on the sidewallshows the prescribed direction of rotation ofthe tire.Twin rear tires: if the tires are of identicaldimensions, you can rotate the wheels on thefront axle and the inner wheels on the rearaxle in pairs such that the original direction oftire rotation is retained. With unidirectionaltires, you may rotate the outside wheels atthe rear axle from one side to the other.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben-efits if the correct direction of rotation isobserved.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.You may mount a spare wheel against thedirection of rotation. Observe the timerestriction on use as well as the speed limi-tation specified on the spare wheel.

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from contact with oil, grease and fuel.

Mounting a wheel

Vehicle preparationX Stop the vehicle as far away as possiblefrom traffic and on a level, firm and non-slipsurface.

X If your vehicle poses a risk to approachingtraffic, switch on the hazardwarning lamps.

X Apply the parking brake.

X Turn the front wheels to the straight-aheadposition.

X Move the selector lever of the automatictransmission to position P.

X Switch off the engine.X Passengers should leave the vehicle. Makesure that the passengers are not endan-gered as they do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while the wheel is being changed. Any-one who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Place the warning triangle or warning lampat a suitable distance.Observe legal requirements.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.i Observe the safety notes on parking in thesection on "Driving and parking"(Y page 149).

X On level terrain: place chocks or othersuitable objects under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel to be changed.

X On slight inclines: place chocks or othersuitable objects under the wheels on thefront and rear axles opposite the wheel tobe changed.

X Take the vehicle tool kit and the jack fromthe footwell on the co-driver's side(Y page 274).

X Remove the spare wheel from the sparewheel bracket (Y page 313). Observe thesafety notes in the "Spare wheel" section(Y page 312).

X On wheels with wheel bolts, remove thehub caps.

306 Changing wheelsWheelsandtires

X Assemble the lug wrench extension usingthe middle rod and the rod with the largestdiameter from the three-piece jack pumplever.

X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lugwrench extension as far as it will go ontothe lug wrench.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the wheelbolts/wheel nuts on the wheel to bechanged by about one full turn. Do notunscrew the wheel bolts/nuts completely.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

G WARNINGOn uphill and downhill slopes, the jack couldtip over with the vehicle raised. There is a riskof injury.Do not change wheels on uphill or downhillgradients. Notify a qualified specialist work-shop.

! Only position the jack on the jackingpoints intended for this purpose. You couldotherwise damage the vehicle.

Observe the following when raising the vehi-cle:RWhen raising the vehicle, only use the jackwhich Mercedes-Benz has specificallyapproved for your vehicle.RThe vehicle's jack is intended only to raisethe vehicle for a short time when changinga wheel. It is not suited for performingmaintenance work under the vehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Never disen-gage the parking brake while the vehicle israised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, load-bearing underlay must be used.On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlaymust be used, e.g. rubber mats.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in(3 cm).RNever place your hands or feet under theraised vehicle.RNever lie under the raised vehicle.RNever start the engine when the vehicle israised.RNever open or close a door when the vehi-cle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

! Only use the jack pump lever middle rodand the rod with the largest diameter as alug wrench extension. Only slide themiddlerod as far as it will go onto the lug wrench.The rods may otherwise bend and be dis-torted to such an extent that they can nolonger be used as a pump lever for the jack.

! Do not place the jack on the leaf spring orthe differential case.

Changing wheels 307

Wheelsandtires

Z

Hydraulic jackPreparing the hydraulic jackX Insert the third rod of jack pump lever:into the lug wrench extension.Jack pump lever: is assembled.

X Close pressure release screw;.X To do this, use the flattened section onpump lever: to turn pressure releasescrew; clockwise to the stop.i Do not turn pressure release screw;more than 1 or 2 full turns. Hydraulic fluidcould otherwise escape.

X Insert pump lever: into the recess on thejack and secure by turning it clockwise.

X Place the jack vertically beneath the jack-ing points described below.

Jacking point, front axleJacking point at the front axleX Place the jack under the longitudinal mem-ber in front of the front axle.

Jacking point, rear axle (example: vehicle type2500)

Jacking point, rear axle (example: vehicle type3500)Jacking point at the rear axle on vehicletypes 2500 and 3500X Place the jack under the longitudinal mem-ber in front of the rear axle.

Jacking point, rear axle (example: Cab Chassis)Jacking point at the rear axle on chassisversionsX Place the jack next to the front leaf springsupport beneath the jacking point.

308 Changing wheelsWheelsandtires

Removing a wheel

! Do not place the wheel bolts or the wheelnuts in sand or dirt. The threads of thewheel bolts andwheel nuts could otherwisebe damaged when being tightened.

X Unscrew the wheel bolts or nuts.X On front wheels with wheel nuts, removethe wheel nut cover.

X Remove the wheel.

Installing the adapter

G WARNINGIf you tighten the adapter bolts when the vehi-cle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is arisk of injury.Make sure that the vehicle is properly pre-pared for a wheel change. Tighten the adapterbolts with particular care and attention.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 305).

G WARNINGIf you do not tighten the bolts of the adapter tothe specified tightening torque, the adaptermay come loose with the spare wheel. Thereis a risk of an accident.Tighten the bolts of the adapter to the speci-fied tightening torque. Have the spare wheelreplaced with a complete wheel and an extra-wide tire at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

! Vehicles with Super Single tires: if youinstall the spare wheel, do not exceed themaximum speed of 40 mph (60 km/h) anddo not drive further than 65miles(100 km).The transmission could otherwise be dam-aged by the difference in wheel rotationspeeds.

On vehicles with Super Single tires, you mustattach the narrow sparewheel to the rear axlebymeans of an adapter. The adapter is boltedto the spare wheel using the adapter bolts fortransportation.

The handling characteristics of your vehicleare affected when driving with a spare wheelinstalled. After changing a wheel, drive to thenearest specialist workshop and have thespare wheel replaced with a wheel and tireassembly that has a Super Single tire.X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Unscrew the six adapter bolts on the sparewheel and remove the adapter.

X Tighten the adapter with the six adapterbolts evenly in a crosswise pattern throughthe outer holes on the wheel hub.

X Tighten the six adapter bolts on the wheelhub to a tightening torque of 177 lb-ft(240 Nm).

X Push thewheel onto the adapter and attachit.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 305).Only use wheel bolts or wheel nuts that havebeen designed for the wheel and the vehicle.For safety reasons, we recommend that youonly usewheel bolts or wheel nuts which have

Changing wheels 309

Wheelsandtires

Z

been approved for Sprinter vehicles and therespective wheel.

! For a steel wheel, only use the short wheelbolts to mount the steel spare wheel. Usingother wheel bolts to mount the steel sparewheel could damage the brake system.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage the elec-tronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

: Wheel bolt for alloy wheel; Wheel bolt for steel wheelX Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Vehicleswith Super Single tires: first attachthe adapter for the narrow spare wheel tothe wheel hub (Y page 309).

X Slide the new wheel onto the wheel hub oronto the adapter for the spare wheel andpush it on.

Wheels with centering by wheel bolts:X Vehicles with alloy wheels: take the shortwheel bolts that secure the steel sparewheel out of the vehicle tool kit.

X Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten themlightly.

For wheels with wheel nuts:X Front wheels with wheel nut covers: pressthe wheel nut covers onto the wheel nuts.

X Screw in the three wheel nuts over the fix-ing discs of the wheel nut cover.

X Turn the wheel so that the wheel bolts arein the middle of the holes.

X Screw on the rest of the wheel nuts.X Slightly tighten all the wheel nuts.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

! Only use the jack pump lever middle rodand the rod with the largest diameter as alug wrench extension. Only slide themiddlerod as far as it will go onto the lug wrench.The rods may otherwise bend and be dis-torted to such an extent that they can nolonger be used as a pump lever for the jack.

! Vehicles with Super Single tires: if youinstall the spare wheel, do not exceed themaximum speed of 40 mph (60 km/h) anddo not drive further than 65miles(100 km).The transmission could otherwise be dam-aged by the difference in wheel rotationspeeds.

310 Changing wheelsWheelsandtires

Tightening torque pattern:—B Wheel bolts or wheel nutsX Using the pump lever, slowly turn the low-ering screw on the jack through approx-imately one revolution and carefully lowerthe vehicle (Y page 307).

X Put the jack aside.X Pull the rod with the smallest diameter offthe pump lever.The shortened pump lever serves as a lugwrench extension.

X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lugwrench extension as far as it will go ontothe lug wrench.

X Using the extended lug wrench, tighten thewheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern inthe sequence indicated (: toB).Tighten the wheel bolts to the followingtightening torques:RSteel wheel 177 lb-ft (240 Nm)RAlloy wheel 133 lb-ft (180 Nm)Tighten the wheel nuts to a tightening tor-que of 133 lb-ft (180 Nm).

X Push the piston on the hydraulic jack inagain and close the pressure releasescrew.

X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicletools in the vehicle again.i You can now install the hub caps on steelwheels with wheel bolts. The installing pro-cedure depends on whether the hub capacts as a trim that covers the whole wheel,or just covers the center.

X Wheel with hub cap: position the openingfor the tire valve in the hub cap over the tirevalve.

X Push the edge of the hub cap with bothhands against the wheel until it clicks intoplace. Make sure the hub cap retainingcatches engage on the steel wheel.

X Wheel with central hub cap: position theretaining lugs of the central hub cap overthe wheel bolts.

X Hit themiddle of the hub cap to engage it onthe wheel.

X Secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheelbracket (Y page 313).

X Vehicles with Super Single tires: transportthe defective rear wheel in the load area.The rear wheel is too large for the sparewheel bracket.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 288).

X Retighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts tothe specified tightening torque after thevehicle has been driven for 30 miles(50 km).

When using a wheel/spare wheel with a newor newly painted wheel rim, have the wheelbolts/nuts retightened again after approx-imately 600 to 3,000 miles (1,000 to5,000 km). Observe the specified tighteningtorque.

i Vehicles with the tire pressure monitorsystem: all mounted wheels must be equip-ped with functioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combination

General notes! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended for Sprinter vehicles, since pre-vious damage cannot always be detectedon retreaded tires. We can therefore notguarantee driving safety. Do not mount

Wheel and tire combination 311

Wheelsandtires

Z

used tires if you have no information abouttheir previous usage.

The recommended tire pressures can befound:Ron the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard10 on the B-pillar on the driver's sideRon the tire pressure table on the B-pillar onthe driver's side

The recommended tire pressure can also befound in the "Tire pressure table" section inthis Operator's Manual (Y page 294). Thewheel/tire combination for your vehicle canbe found on the tire pressure table. Furtherinformation on wheel/tire combination canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop.Check tire pressures regularly and only whenthe tires are cold. Observe the notes on therecommended tire pressure (Y page 288).Follow the maintenance recommendations inthe tire manufacturer's warranty book in yourvehicle documents.Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle:Rwith tires of the same size across an axle(left/right)Rwith the same type of tires on all wheels ata given time (summer tires, winter tires)

Tires that have been specially designed andapproved for your vehicle are marked withMO or MO1 (Mercedes-Benz Original). Youcan find this identification on the tires them-selves and in the following table.

i Not all wheel/tire combinations can beinstalled at the factory in all countries.

Spare wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWheel and tire dimensions as well as the typeof tire can vary between the spare wheel and

the wheel to be replaced. When the sparewheel is mounted, driving characteristicsmaybe severely affected. There is a risk of an acci-dent.In order to reduce risks:Ryou should therefore adapt your drivingstyle and drive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheelthat differs from the wheel to be replaced.Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from thewheel to be replaced for a short time.Rdo not deactivate ESP®.Rhave a spare wheel that differs from thewheel that has been changed replaced atthe nearest qualified specialist workshop.You must observe the correct wheel andtire dimensions as well as the wheel type.

When using a spare wheel of a different size,do not exceed the maximum speed of80 km/h.

General notes! Check the spare wheel regularly to seethat it is secure and has the prescribed tirepressure.

The procedure for mounting the spare wheelis described in "Mounting a wheel"(Y page 306).The following should be checked regularly,particularly prior to long journeys:Rthe tire pressure of the spare wheel, whichshould then be corrected if necessary(Y page 288).Rthe fastenings of the spare wheel bracket.The spare wheel is located in a spare wheelbracket under the rear of the vehicle.Replace the tires after 6 years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to thespare wheel.

10 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).

312 Spare wheelWheelsandtires

i If you have mounted a spare wheel, thetire pressure monitor (Y page 291) will notfunction for this wheel. The spare wheel isnot equipped with a sensor for monitoringtire pressure.

Removing and installing the sparewheel

Cargo Van/Passenger Van

Bolt covers for the safety catches (example: CargoVan)RemovingX Open the rear doors.X Place a screwdriver into recesses; andthen pry off covers:.

X Using the lug wrench from the vehicle toolkit (Y page 274), unscrew the now visiblebolts counter-clockwise by approximately20 turns.

Spare wheel carrier under the vehicle

X Slightly raise spare wheel bracketA andunhook left-hand retaining hook=.

X Assemble the pump lever for the jack andslide it into sleeve? on spare wheelbracketA.

X Raise spare wheel bracketA with thepump lever and unhook right-hand retain-ing hook=.

X Slowly lower spare wheel bracketA downto the ground.

X Lift spare wheel bracketA slightly and pullthe pump lever out of sleeve?.

Spare wheel in the spare wheel carrierX Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheelbeyond the rear edge of the spare wheelcarrier.

X Carefully remove the spare wheel fromspare wheel bracketA.The spare wheel is heavy. When the sparewheel is removed, the center of gravitychanges due to the heavy weight of thewheel. The sparewheelmay slip downor tipover.

InstallingX Carefully place the spare wheel onto sparewheel bracketA.The spare wheel is heavy. When you placethe spare wheel onto spare wheel bracketA, the center of gravity changes due to theweight of the wheel. The spare wheel mayslip down or tip over.

X Slide the pump lever for the jack intosleeve? on spare wheel bracketA.

Spare wheel 313

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Raise spare wheel bracketA with thepump lever and attach right-hand retaininghook=.

X Slightly raise spare wheel bracketA andattach left-hand retaining hook=.

X Pull the pump lever out of sleeve?.X Using the lug wrench, tighten the retaininghook bolts by turning them clockwise.

X Replace and engage covers:.X Close the rear doors.

Cab Chassis version

RemovingX Loosen fender nuts= manually and thenremove them.

X Loosen nuts; as far as the thread end.X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket? andunhook left-hand retaining hook:.

X Assemble the pump lever for the jack andslide it into the sleeve on the right-handside of spare wheel bracket?.

X Raise spare wheel bracket? with thepump lever and unhook right-hand retain-ing hook:.

X Slowly lower spare wheel bracket? downto the ground.

X Lift spare wheel bracket? slightly and pullthe pump lever out of the sleeve.

X Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheelbeyond the rear edge of spare wheelbracket?.

X Carefully remove the spare wheel from thebracket.The spare wheel is heavy. When the sparewheel is removed, the center of gravitychanges due to the heavy weight of thewheel. The sparewheelmay slip downor tipover.

InstallingX Carefully place the spare wheel onto sparewheel bracket?.The spare wheel is heavy. When you placethe spare wheel onto spare wheelbracket?, the center of gravity changesdue to the weight of the wheel. The sparewheel may slip down or tip over.

X Raise spare wheel bracket? with thepump lever and attach right-hand retaininghook:.

X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket? andattach left-hand retaining hook:.

X Pull the pump lever out.X Tighten nuts;.X Put fender nuts= in place and tightenthem.

314 Spare wheelWheelsandtires

Vehicle electronics ........................... 316Identification plates ......................... 316Service products and capacities ..... 318Vehicle data ....................................... 327

315

Technicaldata

Vehicle electronics

Tampering with the engine electron-ics

G WARNINGAlways have work on the engine electronicsand related components carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehi-cle's operating safety could be affected.

! Only have engine electronics and the cor-responding parts, such as control units,sensors or connector leads, serviced in aqualified specialist workshop. Otherwise,the vehicle parts may wear more quickly.This can lead to loss of the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Installing electrical or electronicequipment

G WARNINGYou and others may damage your health dueto excessive electromagnetic radiation. Byusing an external antenna, the possible healthrisks of electromagnetic fields, which areunder discussion among the scientific com-munity, should be largely prevented.Therefore, only have the exterior antennainstalled at a qualified specialist workshop.

Electrical and electronic devices may have adetrimental effect on both the comfort andthe operating safety of the vehicle. If equip-ment of this kind is installed, its electromag-netic compatibility must be checked and veri-fied.If these devices are linked to functions asso-ciated with resistance to interference, theymust have type approval. This applies to thedevice or its interfaces to the vehicle elec-tronics, e.g. charging brackets.A telephone or two-way radio to be installed inthe vehicle must be approved. Further infor-mation can be obtained from any SprinterDealer.

For operation of mobile phones and two-wayradios, Mercedes Benz recommends connec-tion to an approved exterior antenna. This isthe only way to ensure optimum receptionquality inside the vehicle and to minimizemutual interference between the vehicle elec-tronics, mobile phones and two-way radios.The transmission output of the mobile phoneor two-way radio may not exceed the follow-ing maximum transmission output (PEAK):

Frequency range Maximum trans-mission output(PEAK)

Shortwave(f < 50 MHz)

100 W

4 m waveband 30 W

2 m waveband 50 W

Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W

70 cm waveband 35 W

GSM/UMTS/LTE 10 W

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

Vehicle identification plate for vehicles or chassison the base of the driver's seatX Open the driver’s door.You will see vehicle identification plate:with the vehicle identification number

316 Identification platesTechnicaldata

(VIN), the paint code and the permissibleweight data.

Example: vehicle identification plate (US vehicles)

Example: chassis identification plate (US vehicles)

Example: chassis identification plate (vehicles forCanada); VIN= Paint code

Engine compartment? VIN (stamped on the rear wall of the

engine compartment)A Engine number (stamped on the crank-

case)B Emission Control Information and engine

oil11 instruction labelsX Open the hood (Y page 248).

Example: Emission Control Information label

i Such data is vehicle-specific and may dif-fer from that shown. Always observe thespecifications on your vehicle's identifica-tion plate.

Engine numberThe engine number is stamped on the crank-case. More information may be obtained atany qualified specialist workshop.

11 Also observe the notes on engine oil for diesel engines in the "Technical data" section.

Identification plates 317

Technicaldata

Z

Service products and capacities

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuels, e.g. dieselRAdditives for the exhaust gas aftertreat-ment, e.g. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)RLubricants, e.g. engine oil, transmission oilRCoolantRBrake fluidRWasher fluidRClimate control system refrigerantsApproved service products comply with thehighest quality standards and are listed in theMB Specifications for Service Products. Onlyuse service products approved for the vehi-cle. This is an important condition for the war-ranty.You will recognize the approved service prod-ucts by the inscription on the container: MBApproval (e.g. MB Approval 228.5)Other identifications and recommendationsrefer to quality level or a specification accord-ing to an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 228.5).They are therefore not necessarily approved.Further information can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.Additives for approved service products areneither required nor permitted. Approved fueladditives are the exception. Additives can

cause engine damage andmust therefore notbe added to the service products.The use of additives is always the responsi-bility of the vehicle operator. The use of addi-tives may result in the restriction or loss ofyour Limited Warranty entitlements.

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. Improper handling offuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creatingsparks under all circumstances. Switch off theengine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heatingbefore refueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Whenhandling, storing and disposing of fuels,please observe the relevant regulations.

318 Service products and capacitiesTechnicaldata

Tank contentsDepending on equipment, the total capacityof the fuel tank may vary.

Total capacity

25003500

Approx-imately

26.4 US gal(100 l)

of which reserve fuel

Models with a total capacityof approximately26.4 US gal (100 l)

Approx-imately

5.3 US gal(20 l)

Diesel

Fuel gradeG WARNINGIf you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

! Filter the fuel before transferring it to thevehicle if you are refueling the vehicle frombarrels or containers.This will prevent malfunctions in the fuelsystem due to contaminated fuel.

! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil-ter: in countries where only diesel fuel witha high sulfur content is available, you willneed to carry out your vehicle's oil changeat shorter intervals. Further information onoil change intervals can be obtained at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Sprinter diesel engineYou will damage the diesel engine if you donot refuel with ultra-low sulfur diesel or use

a diesel fuel with a sulfur content greaterthan 15 ppm.

! Do not use the following:RMarine dieselRHeating oilRBio-dieselRVegetable oilRGasolineRParaffinRKeroseneDo not mix such fuels with diesel fuel anddo not use any special additives. This canotherwise lead to engine damage. Thisdoes not include flow improver additives.For further information, see "Flow improv-ers".

You will generally find information about thefuel grade on the filling pump. If there is noidentification on the filling pump, consult agas station attendant.For more information about refueling(Y page 145).

Diesel at very low outside temperaturesG WARNINGIf you heat fuel system components, e.g. witha hot-air gun or open flame, these compo-nents could be damaged. This can cause fuelto escape and ignite. Depending on the typeof damage, fuel may also not escape until theengine is running. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Never heat fuel system components. Contacta qualified specialist workshop to rectify themalfunction.

Refill only with commercially availableULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL (ULSD, maxi-mumsulfur content 15 ppm), which fulfills theASTM D975 standard.The flow properties of diesel may be inade-quate at low outside temperatures due toparaffin separation.

Service products and capacities 319

Technicaldata

Z

i Malfunctions resulting from paraffin sep-aration can only be rectified by heating theentire fuel system. Park the vehicle in aheated garage, for example.

To prevent operating problems, diesel withbetter flow qualities is available during thewinter months. You can obtain information atthe gas station or from your fuel supplier.Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheat-ing system. This improves the flow propertiesof the diesel by approximately 46 ‡ (8 †).ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL can be usedwithout risk of malfunction down to an out-side temperature of approximately 14 ‡(Ò10 †).

Fuel additives! Do not add gasoline or kerosene to dieselfuel to improve its flow characteristics.Gasoline or kerosene impairs the lubricat-ing properties of the diesel fuel. This canresult in damage to the fuel injection sys-tem, for example.

Information on fuel consumption

H Environmental noteCO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-tists believe to be principally responsible forglobal warming (the greenhouse effect). Yourvehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related tofuel consumption and therefore depend on:Refficient use of the fuel by the engineRdriving styleRother non-technical factors, such as envi-ronmental influences, road conditions ortraffic flow

You can minimize your vehicle's CO2 emis-sions by driving carefully and having it serv-iced regularly.

Fuel consumption depends on:Rthe vehicle versionRthe style of driving

Rthe operating conditionsRthe type or quality of the fuel usedThe vehiclewill usemore fuel than usual in thefollowing situations:Rat very low outside temperaturesRin city trafficRduring short journeysRon mountainous terrainRwhen towing a trailerTo keep fuel consumption low, observe theadvice in the "Protection of the environment"section (Y page 23).The following components of the differentvehicle versions influence fuel consumption:Rtire sizes, tire tread, tire pressure, tire con-ditionRbodyRtransmission ratios for the drive assem-bliesRadditional equipment (e.g. air-conditioningsystem, auxiliary heating system)

For these reasons, the actual consumptionfigures for your vehicle may deviate from theconsumption figures determined accordingto EU Directive 80/1268/EEC.Data concerning fuel consumption are recor-ded in the on-board computer; use the steer-ing wheel buttons to call up the Trip com-puter menu (Y page 195).

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)

General notes! Only use DEF in accordance withISO22241. The exhaust gas aftertreatmentsystem may otherwise be damaged.Observe the MB Specifications for ServiceProducts, Sheet No. 352.0.Damage caused by the use of other reduc-ing agents will invalidate the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

320 Service products and capacitiesTechnicaldata

! If DEF comes into contact with a paintedor aluminum surface, wash the surface offimmediately with plenty of water.

High ambient temperaturesWhen opening the DEF tank filler cap at highoutside temperatures, ammonia vapors mayescape. Ammonia vapors have a pungentodor and are particularly irritating for yourskin, respiratory organs and eyes. This mayresult in burning eyes, nose and throat, aswell as coughing and watering eyes. Do notinhale ammonia vapors.If DEF heats up, e.g. in direct sunlight, in theDEF supply reservoir for some time to over122 ‡ (50 †), ammonia vapor will develop.

Low ambient temperaturesDEF freezes at a temperature of approx-imately 12‡ (Ò11†). The vehicle is equippedwith a DEF preheating system at the factory.Winter operation is therefore also guaranteedat temperatures under 12 ‡ (Ò11 †).

Additives and tap water! Do not mix DEF with any additives and donot dilute DEF with tap water. Otherwise,the exhaust gas aftertreatment may bedamaged.Observe the MB Specifications for ServiceProducts, Sheet No. 352.0.Damage that arises through the use of addi-tives or tap water will invalidate the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

Storage! Containers made of aluminum, copper,copper alloys as well as unalloyed orgalvanized steel are not suitable for storingDEF. If stored in these types of containers,DEF could cause constituents of thesemet-als to dissolve and cause irreparable dam-age to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.Damage caused by such impurities in theDEF will invalidate the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Only store DEF in containers made of high-alloy Cr‑Ni steel or Mo‑Cr‑Ni steel in accord-ance with DIN EN 10 088‑1/2/3 or plasticcontainers made of polypropylene or poly-ethylene.

Purity! Impurities in DEF (e.g. caused by otherservice products, cleaning agents, dust,etc.) result in increased emissions, mal-functions, catalytic converter damage orengine damage.

The purity of DEF is essential to prevent mal-functions in the exhaust gas aftertreatment.If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g.during repair work, the same liquid must notbe used to refill the tank. Its purity is no longerguaranteed.

DisposalObserve country-specific laws and regula-tions when disposing of DEF.% Environmental noteDispose of DEF in an environmentally respon-sible manner.

DEF supply reservoir contentDepending on equipment, the DEF supply res-ervoir content may vary.

Tank contentsDiesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)12

Approximately 4.7 US gal (18.0 l)

DEF consumptionFor vehicles with a 4-cylinder, in-lineengine (OM651), the DEF consumption ofthe vehicle is:Ras a Cargo Van/Passenger Van, approx.2322 MPG (0.2 l/100 km)Ras a Cab Chassis, approx. 1720 MPG(0.35 l/100 km)

12 DEF according to ISO 22241. Observe MB Specifications for Service Products, Sheet 352.0.

Service products and capacities 321

Technicaldata

Z

For vehicles with a 6-cylinder, in-lineengine (OM642), the DEF consumption ofthe vehicle is:Ras a Cargo Van/Passenger Van, approx.2322 MPG (0.10 l/100 km)Ras a Cab Chassis approx. 1720 MPG(0.14 l/100 km)

In each case, the stated consumption figure isa mean value between urban and extra-urbandriving cycles. The consumption figure doesnot refer to a specific vehicle, but is providedfor the purposes of comparison between dif-ferent vehicle types.DEF consumption, like fuel consumption, isvery dependent on the driving style and theoperating conditions. Thismeans that the realconsumption figures during operation of yourvehicle may deviate from those stated.

Engine oil

General notes

! The bottles of the various engine oil typesare marked with ACEA (Association desConstructeurs Européens d'Automobiles)and/or API (American Petroleum Institute)classifications. Only use approved engineoils that conform to the following MB Spec-ifications for Service Products and the pre-scribed ACEA and/or API classifications.Using engine oils of another quality is notpermitted andmay invalidate theNewVehi-cle Limited Warranty.The use of other, non-approved engine oilsfor diesel engines can cause damage to thediesel particle filter (DPF).

Use only engine oils that have been approvedfor your vehicle according to the MB Specifi-cations for Service Products.

The MB Specifications for Service Productsare valid for your vehicle13

R228.51R229.31R229.51These are high quality engine oils which havea positive effect on:Rengine wearRfuel consumptionRexhaust gas emissionsMulti-grade engine oils of the prescribed SAEclass (viscosity) may be used all year round,taking the outside temperatures intoaccount.

Engine oil viscosity

! If the SAE viscosity class of the engine oilused does not cover the outside tempera-ture range in which you are operating thevehicle, it must be changed in good time, inparticular before the cold season commen-ces. Using an engine oil that does not haveadequate temperature characteristics canlead to engine damage.The temperature range information of theSAE classification always refers to that offresh oil. The temperature characteristicsof the engine oil may deteriorate signifi-cantly due to aging in use, especially at lowoutside temperatures.We recommend that you change the engineoil before the cold season commences. Usean approved engine oil of the specified SAEclass.

13 If the quality grade is not available for diesel, you may also add engine oils meeting the requirements in MBSheet No. 228.5, 229.3 or 229.5. The quantity to be added is then limited to a maximum of 1 qt (1 l).

322 Service products and capacitiesTechnicaldata

Engine oil SAE classification

Viscosity indicates the flow characteristics ofa fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, thismeans that it is thick; a low viscosity meansthat it is thin.Depending on the respective outside temper-atures, select an engine oil according to SAEclassification (viscosity). The table displaysthe SAE classification to be used. The lowtemperature characteristics of engine oilscan noticeably deteriorate during operation,e.g. from aging, soot and fuel accretion. Forthis reason, regular oil changes using anapproved engine oil from the suitable SAEclassification are urgently recommended.

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Miscibility of engine oils

! Mixing oils reduces the benefits of usinghigh grade engine oils.

We recommend that you only add engine oil ofthe same quality grade and SAE class as usedwhen the engine oil was last changed.If, in exceptional cases, oil of the type in theengine is not available, top up using anotherapproved mineral or synthetic engine oil.If the quality grade is not available for dieselengines, you may also add engine oils meet-ing the requirements in MB Sheet Number228.5, 229.3 or 229.5. The quantity to be

added is then limited to a maximum of 1 qt(1 l).Engine oils are differentiated according to:Rengine oil brandRquality grade (sheet number)RSAE class (viscosity)Subsequently have the engine oil changed atthe earliest possible opportunity.

Interval for oil changeThe on-board computer automatically showsthe date for the next oil change as an eventmessage in the display.Only by using engine oil with a particularlyhigh quality grade, e.g. according to SheetNumber 228.51 of the Mercedes-Benz Spec-ifications for Service Products, can the maxi-mum interval for oil change be achieved.We recommend having the oil changed at aqualified specialist workshop.Engine oil for diesel engines

Product name/number

See the Maintenance Booklet.MB Sheet Number 228.51, 229.31, 229.51

Capacities

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

Oil change including oil filter

Vehicles Engine oil

4-cylinder Approximately3 US gal (11.5 l)

6-cylinder Approximately3.3 US gal (12.5 l)

Service products and capacities 323

Technicaldata

Z

Information about oil consumption

! If the vehicle is predominantly used forshort-distance driving, this could lead to amalfunction in the automatic cleaning func-tion for the diesel particle filter. As a result,fuel may accumulate in the engine oil andcause engine failure.Therefore, if you mainly drive short distan-ces, you should drive on a highway or onrural roads for 20 minutes every 310 miles(500 km). This ensures sufficient regener-ation of the diesel particle filter.

Depending on the driving style, the vehicleconsumes a maximum of 1.0 US qt (1.0 l) ofengine oil over a distance of 620 miles(1000 km).Oil consumption may be higher if:Rthe vehicle is new.Ryou mainly operate the vehicle under ardu-ous operating conditions.Ryou frequently drive at high engine speeds.Regular maintenance is one of the precondi-tions for moderate rates of consumption.You can only estimate the oil consumptionafter you have driven a considerable distance.Check the engine oil level on a regular basis,e.g. weekly or each time you refuel(Y page 250).

Transmission and power steering oil

Automatic transmissionService product: automatic transmissionfluid

Product name/number Maintenanceinterval

Shell ATF 3403/M-115MB Sheet No. 236.10

—

Fuchs/Shell ATF 3353MB Sheet No. 236.12

Further information can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Rear axleService product: transmission oil

Product name/number Maintenanceinterval

BP Energear Hypo DC80W-90MB Sheet No. 235.20

—

Mobil Delvac SyntheticGear Oil 75W-90MB Sheet No. 235.8

Further information can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

SteeringService product: power steering fluid

Product name/number Maintenanceinterval

Mobil ATF‑D,Exxon Mobil Corporationor equivalentMB Sheet No. 236.3

—

The steering is maintenance-free. Furtherinformation can be obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGBrake fluid is hazardous to health. Do notswallow brake fluid. See a doctor immediatelyif you swallow brake fluid.Make sure that brake fluid does not come intocontact with skin, clothing or eyes. Rinseaffected areas with plenty of clean water andconsult a doctor if necessary.

324 Service products and capacitiesTechnicaldata

Always wear gloves and eye protection whentopping up brake fluid.Store brake fluid only in the original closedcontainer and keep it out of the reach of chil-dren. Comply with safety regulations whenhandling brake fluid.

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic andrubber. If paint, plastic or rubber has comeinto contact with brake fluid, rinse withwater immediately.

Only use brake fluids approved for Sprintervehicles. Always check for the identificationDOT 4 plus.Information about approved brake fluids canbe found in the Maintenance Booklet orobtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

Service product:brake fluid

Product name/number

Intac B026ERBoiling point: 500 ‡(260 †)RWet boiling point:356 ‡ (180 †)

MB Sheet No. 331.0

Maintenanceinterval

2 years

i Have the brake fluid renewed every 2years at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is usually a notice in the engine com-partment to remind you when the nextbrake fluid change is due.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Take care not to spill any coolant on pain-ted surfaces. You could otherwise damagethe paintwork.

When handling, storing and disposing of cool-ant and antifreeze, please observe the rele-vant regulations and the safety notes in the"Service products and capacities" section(Y page 318).

Coolant additive with antifreezerequirements

! Use only approved antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor that complies with MB Specifica-tion for Service Products, Sheet Number325. Using other, non-approved anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitors may causedamage to the coolant system and reducethe engine's service life.

Coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the followingtasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraises the boiling pointWhen the vehicle is first delivered, it is filledwith a coolant mixture that ensures adequateantifreeze and corrosion protection. Coolant

Service products and capacities 325

Technicaldata

Z

must be used in the system all year round toensure anti-corrosion protection and a raisedboiling point – even in countries with highoutside temperatures.To prevent damage to the engine cooling sys-tem, use only approved corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze that comply with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products.We recommend corrosion inhibitor/anti-freeze that meets the requirements in MBSpecifications for Service Products SheetNumber 325.Check the antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor con-centration in the coolant every six months.The percentage of corrosion inhibitor/anti-freeze additive in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This way, the engine cool-ing system is protected against freezingdown to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

If there has been coolant loss, do not refillonly withwater. If the vehicle has lost coolant,add equal parts water and corrosion inhibi-tor/antifreeze additive. The water used aspart of the coolant mixture must fulfill certainrequirements; these are usually fulfilled bydrinking water. If the water quality is not suf-ficient, you must treat the water.

Service product: coolant

Product name/number

EURO Peak Coolant/Antifreeze,OLD WORLD INDUSTRIESMB Sheet No. 325.0

Zerex G05, The Valvoline CompanyMB Sheet No. 325.0

Product name/number

Zerex G48, The Valvoline CompanyMB Sheet No. 325.0

Glysantin G05, BASF AGMB Sheet No. 325.0

CapacitiesEngine cooling system

Coolant Approximately10.75 US qt (10.0 l)

RefrigerantThe air-conditioning system uses the refrig-erant R‑134a. This refrigerant does not dam-age the ozone layer.

Product name/number Maintenanceinterval

Refrigerant R‑134aMB Sheet No. 361.0

—

Further information can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Washer fluid

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

326 Service products and capacitiesTechnicaldata

When handling washer fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 318).

Mixing ratioAdd windshield washer concentrate to thewasher fluid all year round. Adapt the mixingratio to the ambient temperature.At temperatures above freezing:X Fill up the washer fluid reservoir with a mix-ture of water and windshield washer con-centrate, e.g. Summerwash to preventsmearing.

At temperatures below freezing:X Fill up the washer fluid reservoir with a mix-ture of water and windshield washer con-centrate, e.g. Winterwash if there is a dan-ger of frost.This prevents washer fluid from freezing onthe windshield.

CapacitiesWindshield washer systemwith/withoutheadlamp cleaning system

Washer fluid Approx. 6.3 US qt(6.0 l)

Vehicle data

General notesThe following section contains importanttechnical data for your vehicle. Your vehicleregistration documents contain vehicle-spe-cific and equipment-dependent technicaldata such as vehicle dimensions and vehicleweights.

Cargo tie down points and carrier sys-tems

Cargo tie down points

General notes! Observe the information on the maximumloading capacity of the individual cargo tie-down points.If you use several cargo tie-down points tosecure a load, you must always take themaximum loading capacity of the weakestcargo tie-down point into account.If you brake hard, for example, the forcesacting could be up to several times theweight force of the load. Always use multi-ple cargo tie-down points in order to dis-tribute the force absorption. Load theanchorages evenly.

You will find further information about cargotie down points and cargo tie-down rings inthe "Transporting" section (Y page 242).

Cargo tie-down ringsThe maximum tensile load of the cargo tie-down rings is:

Cargo tie-downrings

Permissible nomi-nal tensile load

Passenger Vans 786.5 lbf(3500 N)

Cargo Van 1124.0 lbf(5000 N)

Vehicle data 327

Technicaldata

Z

Load railsThe maximum tensile loads of the cargo tiedown points in the cargo compartment are:

Cargo tie downpoint

Permissible nomi-nal tensile load

Load rails on cargocompartment floor

1124.0 lbf(5000 N)

Lower load rail onsidewall

562.0 lbf(2500 N)

Upper load rail onsidewall

337.0 lbf(1500 N)

The values specified apply only to loadsplaced on the cargo compartment floor if:Rthe load is secured to 2 cargo tie downpoints on the rail andRthe distance to the nearest load-securingpoint on the same rail is approximately 3 ft(1 m).

Roof carrier

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

G WARNINGIf you distribute the load unevenly in the vehi-cle, the handling as well as the steering andbraking characteristics are severely affected.There is a risk of an accident.Distribute the load evenly in the vehicle.Secure the load to prevent it from slipping.

! The weight of any load carried on the roof,including the roof carrier, must not exceedthe maximum permissible roof load.

The roof carrier supports must be mountedat equal distances.We recommend that you have a stabilizerinstalled on the front axle.

! For safety reasons, we recommend thatyou only use roof carrier systems that havebeen tested and approved for the Sprinter.This will help to avoid damage.

The data is valid for a load distributed evenlyover the entire roof area. Maximum roof loadand minimum number of pairs of roof carriersupports on vehicles with:

Maximumroof load

Minimumnumber ofpairs ofsupports

Standardroof

660 lbs(300 kg)

6

High roof 330 lbs(150 kg)

3

Reduce the load on shorter roof carriers pro-portionately. The maximum load per pair ofroof carrier supports is 110 lbs (50 kg).Loading directions and other information con-cerning load distribution and load securingcan be found in the "Transporting" section(Y page 240).

Trailer tow hitch

General notesWe recommend that you have the trailer towhitch mounted at an authorized SprinterDealer.Use only a trailer tow hitch that has been tes-ted and approved specially for your vehicle bythe distributor named on the inside of thefront cover. Only use a ball coupling that isapproved for your vehicle and Sprinter trailertow hitch. You can also find information onthe permitted dimensions of the ball coupling

328 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

on the identification plate of the trailer towhitch.You can obtain advice from a qualified spe-cialist workshop. Also observe the informa-tion on towing a trailer in the "Driving andparking" section (Y page 173).

Vehicle data 329

Technicaldata

Z

Maximum permitted weights and loads

! On vehicleswith a permissible gross vehicleweight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the permissiblegross combination weight is less than the total of the permissible gross vehicle weight andthe permissible trailer load. Exceeding the permissible gross combination weight can lead todamage to the drivetrain, to the transmission or to the trailer tow hitch.If the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, the relevant value for the permissible gross vehicleweight or the permissible trailer load is therefore lower. In this case, the trailer or the vehiclemay only be partially loaded.

The permissible weights and loads which cannot be exceeded can also be found:Rin your vehicle documents andRon the identification plates of the trailer tow hitch, the trailer and the vehicle (Y page 316).You will find the basic values approved by the manufacturer in the following table. If the valuesdiffer, the lowest value applies.Make sure that you adhere to the weight restrictions by having the weight checked on acalibrated weighbridge.

Vehicletype

Permissi-ble grossweightGVWR

Grossfront axleloadGAWR(FA)

Grossrear axleloadGAWR(RA)

Maximumpermissi-ble grossweight ofvehicle/trailercombina-tion14GCWR

Trailerload15GTW

Maxi-mum per-missiblenoseweightTWR

2500 8550 lbs(3878 kg)

3970 lbs(1801 kg)

5360 lbs(2431 kg)

13550 lbs(6146 kg)

5000 lbs(2268 kg)

500 lbs(227 kg)

3500 9900 lbs(4490 kg)Canadaonly

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

7060 lbs(3202 kg)

14900 lbs(6759 kg)16

5000 lbs(2268 kg)16

500 lbs(227 kg)16

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

15250 lbs(6917 kg)17

7500 lbs(3402 kg)17

750 lbs(340 kg)17

9990 lbs(4531 kg)USA only

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

7060 lbs(3202 kg)

14990 lbs(6799 kg)16

5000 lbs(2268 kg)16

500 lbs(227 kg)16

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

15250 lbs(6917 kg)17

7500 lbs(3402 kg)17

750 lbs(340 kg)17

10141 lbs(4600 kg)

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

7060 lbs(3202 kg)

14990 lbs(6799 kg)16

5000 lbs(2268 kg)16

500 lbs(227 kg)16

14Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle and trailer15Maximum permissible gross weight of the trailer16 Only for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).17 Not for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).

330 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

Vehicletype

Permissi-ble grossweightGVWR

Grossfront axleloadGAWR(FA)

Grossrear axleloadGAWR(RA)

Maximumpermissi-ble grossweight ofvehicle/trailercombina-tion14GCWR

Trailerload15GTW

Maxi-mum per-missiblenoseweightTWR

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

15250 lbs(6917 kg)17

7500 lbs(3402 kg)17

750 lbs(340 kg)17

11030 lbs(5003 kg)

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

7720 lbs(3502 kg)

15250 lbs(6917 kg)

5000 lbs(2268 kg)16

500 lbs(227 kg)16

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

7500 lbs(3402 kg)17

750 lbs(340 kg)17

14Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle and trailer15Maximum permissible gross weight of the trailer17 Not for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).16 Only for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).

Vehicle data 331

Technicaldata

Z

332